703789

Mercedes A-Class 2020 Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/570
Pagina verder
Digital – in the vehicleVehicle document walletDigital – on the InternetDigital – as an app
Familiarize yourself with the con‐
tents of the Operator's Manual
directly via the vehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle information"). Start with the
quick guide or broaden your
knowledge with practical tips.
Here you can find comprehen‐
sive information about operating
your vehicle and about services
and guarantees in printed form.
You can find the Operator's Man‐
ual on the Mercedes-Benz home‐
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides app
is available free-of-charge in
familiar app stores.
É1775840207YËÍ
1775840207
Apple
®
iOS Android
TM
Order no. P177 0393 13 Part no. 177 584 02 07
Edition B 2020
A-Class
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz A-Class
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
Example
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front-passenger airbag is enabled
If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled,
a child on the front-passenger seat may be
struck by the front-passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
As at 03.11.19
Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐
tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or injury to people.
Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐
gard of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The standard equipment and product description
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐
lowing factors:
R
Model
R
Order
R
National version
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce
changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The following documents are integral parts of
the vehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1775840207
1775840207
Symbols ........................................................ 5
At a glance .................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10
Indicator and warning lamps (Wide‐
screen Cockpit) ............................................ 12
Overhead control panel ................................ 14
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20
General notes ............................................. 22
Protecting the environment .......................... 22
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts ......................22
Operator's Manual ........................................23
Service and vehicle operation ....................... 24
Operating safety ...........................................25
Declaration of conformity for wireless
vehicle components .....................................26
Diagnostics connection ................................ 27
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 27
Correct use of the vehicle ............................28
Problems with your vehicle ........................... 28
Reporting safety defects ...............................28
Limited Warranty .......................................... 29
QR code for rescue card ...............................29
Data storage .................................................29
Copyright ...................................................... 32
Occupant safety ......................................... 34
Restraint system ...........................................34
Seat belts ..................................................... 36
Airbags ......................................................... 40
PRE-SAFE
®
system ....................................... 48
Safely transporting children in the vehi‐
cle ................................................................49
Notes on pets in the vehicle .........................63
Opening and closing .................................. 65
SmartKey ...................................................... 65
Doors ............................................................ 70
Trunk .............................................................74
Side windows ................................................ 78
Sliding sunroof .............................................. 81
Anti-theft protection .....................................86
Seats and stowing ..................................... 90
Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐
tion ............................................................... 90
Seats ............................................................ 91
Steering wheel ..............................................96
Easy entry and exit feature ...........................97
Operating the memory function .................... 98
Stowage areas .............................................. 99
Cup holder .................................................. 106
Sockets ....................................................... 108
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
and connection with the exterior antenna .. 109
Installing/removing the floor mats .............. 111
Light and visibility .................................... 113
Exterior lighting ........................................... 113
Interior lighting ............................................ 118
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system ........................................................ 120
Mirrors ........................................................ 122
Operating the sun visors ............................. 125
2
Contents
Climate control ......................................... 126
Overview of climate control systems ..........126
Operating the climate control system ......... 126
Driving and parking ................................. 130
Driving ........................................................ 130
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................139
Automatic transmission .............................. 142
Function of 4MATIC .................................... 147
Refueling ..................................................... 147
Parking .......................................................150
Driving and driving safety systems .............159
Vehicle towing instructions .........................213
Instrument Display and on-board
computer ................................................... 214
Instrument Display overview .......................214
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel ..........................................................215
Operating the on-board computer ............... 216
Adjusting the design of the Instrument
Display ........................................................ 217
Showing display content on the instru‐
ment cluster ................................................218
Overview of displays on the multifunc‐
tion display .................................................219
Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 220
Menus and submenus ................................ 220
Head-up Display ......................................... 227
Voice Control System .............................. 228
Notes on operating safety .......................... 228
Operation ................................................... 229
Using the Voice Control System effec‐
tively ........................................................... 231
Essential voice commands .........................232
MBUX multimedia system ....................... 247
Overview and operation .............................. 247
System settings .......................................... 281
Navigation .................................................. 290
Telephone ...................................................331
Online and Internet functions ..................... 359
Media ......................................................... 366
Radio .......................................................... 373
Sound ......................................................... 381
Maintenance and care ............................. 385
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 385
Engine compartment .................................. 386
Cleaning and care .......................................391
Breakdown assistance ............................ 401
Emergency .................................................. 401
Flat tire ....................................................... 401
Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 408
Tow starting or towing away ........................ 413
Electrical fuses ............................................ 418
Wheels and tires ...................................... 422
Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐
acteristics ...................................................422
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tires ............................................................ 422
Notes on snow chains ................................ 423
Tire pressure ...............................................424
Loading the vehicle .....................................431
Tire labeling ................................................ 435
Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 440
Changing a wheel .......................................443
Emergency spare wheel .............................. 452
Contents
3
Technical data .......................................... 456
Notes on technical data .............................. 456
Vehicle electronics .....................................456
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number overview ............................ 458
Operating fluids .......................................... 459
Vehicle data ................................................ 466
Display messages and warning/indi‐
cator lamps .............................................. 468
Display messages .......................................468
Warning and indicator lamps .......................515
Index ......................................................... 530
4
Contents
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐
lowing symbols:
&
DANGER Danger due to not observing
the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
#
Observe the warning notices.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe envi‐
ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐
ronmentally responsible disposal.
#
Observe environmental notes.
*
NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of
risks which may lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
#
Observe notes on material damage.
%
Useful instructions or further information
that could be helpful to you.
X
Instruction
(Q page)
Further information on a topic
Display
Information on the multifunction dis‐
play/media display
+
Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Corresponding submenus, which are
to be selected in the multimedia sys‐
tem
*Marks a cause
Symbols
5
Left-hand drive vehicles
6
At a glance – Cockpit
1
Steering wheel gearshift paddles
→
144
2
Combination switch
→
114
3
Instrument Display
→
214
4
DIRECT SELECT lever
→
142
5
Start/stop button
→
131
ECO start/stop function
→
138
6
Media display
→
250
7
Climate control systems
→
126
8
Hazard warning lights
→
115
9
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
→
45
A
Glove box
→
101
B
Stowage compartment
→
101
C
Cup holder
→
106
D
Control knob for:
Volume and switching sound on/off
→
247
Switches the MBUX multimedia system
on/off
→
247
E
Calls up navigation
→
290
F
Calls up the radio
→
374
Calls up media
→
369
G
Calls up the telephone
→
333
H
Calls up favorites
→
268
I
Calls up vehicle functions
→
260
J
Active Parking Assist
→
200
K
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
→
140
L
Touchpad
→
250
M
Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐
tem
→
215
N
Adjusts the steering wheel
→
96
O
Control panel:
On-board computer
→
215
Cruise control
→
171
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
→
174
P
Diagnostics connection
→
27
At a glance – Cockpit
7
Q
Opens the hood
→
386
R
Electric parking brake
→
156
S
Light switch
→
113
8
At a glance – Cockpit
Instrument Display (standard)
10
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
1
! ABS malfunction
→
525
2
#! Turn signal lights
→
114
3
h Tire pressure monitor
→
528
4
Speedometer
→
214
5
Multifunction display
→
219
6
# Electrical malfunction
→
519
7
L Distance warning
→
524
8
Brakes (red)
→
522
$ USA only
J Canada only
9
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
→
522
A
Electric parking brake applied (red)
→
522
F USA only
! Canada only
B
; Check Engine
→
519
C
R Rear fog light
→
114
D
K High beam
→
114
L Low beam
→
113
T Parking lamps
→
113
E
å ESP
®
OFF
→
525
÷ ESP
®
→
525
F
6 Restraint system
→
517
G
Fuel level indicator
H
æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
→
519
I
Ù Electric power steering malfunction
→
518
J
ü Seat belt not fastened
→
517
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
11
Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display
12
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)
1
Speedometer
→
214
2
#! Turn signal lights
→
114
3
Multifunction display
→
219
4
6 Restraint system
→
517
5
Tachometer
→
214
6
å ESP
®
OFF
→
525
÷ ESP
®
→
525
7
R Rear fog light
→
114
8
K High beam
→
114
L Low beam
→
113
T Parking lamps
→
113
9
ÿ Coolant too hot/cold
→
519
A
Coolant temperature display
→
214
B
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
→
522
C
# Electrical malfunction
→
519
D
L Distance warning
→
524
E
! ABS malfunction
→
525
F
Ù Electric power steering malfunction
→
518
G
h Tire pressure monitor
→
528
H
% This indicator lamp has no function
I
æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
→
519
J
Fuel level indicator
K
Electric parking brake applied (red)
→
522
F USA only
! Canada only
L
ü Seat belt not fastened
→
517
M
Brakes (red)
→
522
$ USA only
J Canada only
N
; Check Engine
→
519
O
ä This indicator lamp has no function
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)
13
14
At a glance – Overhead control panel
1
Sun visors
→
125
2
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
→
118
3
| Switches automatic interior lighting con‐
trol on/off
→
118
4
c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
→
118
5
u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/off
→
118
6
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
→
118
7
; me button
→
352
8
G SOS button
→
352
9
3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
→
81
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind
→
81
A
Inside rearview mirror
→
123
At a glance – Overhead control panel
15
16
At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
1
Operates the memory function
→
98
2
Adjusts the seats electrically
→
91
3
Switches the seat heating on/off
→
94
4
Switches the seat ventilation on/off
→
95
5
Locks/unlocks the vehicle
→
70
6
Opens the door
→
70
7
Opens the trunk lid
→
74
8
Operates the outside mirrors
→
122
9
Opens/closes the right side window
→
78
A
Opens/closes the rear right side window
→
78
B
Child safety lock for the rear side windows
→
63
C
Opens/closes the rear left side window
→
78
D
Opens/closes the left side window
→
78
E
Adjusts the head restraints
→
92
F
Configures the seat settings
→
94
G
Adjusts the seat backrest inclination
→
91
H
Adjusts the seat height
→
91
I
Adjusts the seat cushion inclination
→
91
J
Sets the seat fore-and-aft position
→
91
K
Adjusts the seat cushion length
→
91
At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
17
18
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
1
Safety vests
→
401
2
me button and SOS button
→
352
3
Hazard warning lights
→
115
4
Glove box
→
101
5
Starting assistance
→
411
6
Checking and refilling operating fluids
→
459
7
Tow-starting and towing away
→
414
8
Flat tire
→
401
9
QR code for accessing the rescue card
→
29
A
Tow-starting and towing away
→
414
B
TIREFIT kit
→
403
C
Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire
pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
the rescue card
→
147
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
19
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Info
5
Operator's Manual
5
Õ
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the
function and operation of:
R
The vehicle
R
The multimedia system
#
Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Search: search for keywords in order to find
quick answers to questions about the opera‐
tion of the vehicle.
R
Quick start: find the first steps towards set‐
ting up your vehicle.
R
Tips: find information that prepares you for
certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
R
Messages: receive additional information
about the messages in the instrument dis‐
play.
R
Bookmarks: gain access to your personally
saved bookmarks.
R
Language: select the language for the Digital
Operator's Manual.
1
Back
2
Adds bookmarks
3
Picture
4
Contents section
5
Menu
Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual,
e.g. warning notes, can be opened and closed.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital
Operator's Manual:
Direct access: open the required content in the
Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and hold‐
ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia
system:
20
Digital Operator's Manual
Instrument Display: call up brief information as
display messages in the instrument cluster.
Voice Control System: call up via the voice
control system
Global search: call up search results for con‐
tents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the
home screen
For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐
ual is deactivated while driving.
%
The Operator's Manual can also be found in
the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all com‐
mon app stores.
Digital Operator's Manual
21
Protecting the environment
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate the
vehicle.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally
responsible manner to help protect the envi‐
ronment. Please observe the following rec‐
ommendations on operating conditions and
personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#
Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐
rect.
#
Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no
longer need them).
#
Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
#
Always have maintenance work carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
#
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
#
Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary.
#
Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
#
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking.
#
Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
#
Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
#
Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO
display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations:
It is recommended that you re-use or recycle
materials instead of just disposing of them.
The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐
lations serve to protect the environment and
must be strictly observed.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components
Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned
components and parts with the same quality
as new parts. The same entitlement from the
Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.
#
Use recycled reconditioned compo‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.
22
General notes
*
NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices,
as well as control units and sensors for the
restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐
lowing areas of your vehicle:
R
Doors
R
Door pillars
R
Door sills
R
Seats
R
Cockpit
R
Instrument cluster
R
Center console
R
Lateral roof frame
#
Do not install accessory parts such as
audio systems in these areas.
#
Do not carry out repairs or welding.
#
Have aftermarket installation of acces‐
sories carried out at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety which have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐
function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels
and accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts are subject to
strict quality control. Each part has been spe‐
cially developed, manufactured or selected for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz
Genuine Parts are available for Mercedes-Benz
models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐
vide for quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) (/ page 458) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz Genuine Parts.
Operator's Manual
This Operator's Manual describes all models and
all standard and optional equipment available for
your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐
ual going to press. Country-specific differences
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This is also
the case for systems and functions relevant to
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle
may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle
contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐
cle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
General notes
23
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept in
the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
R
service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately.
R
unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R
the fuel may have an extremely low octane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in
Europe through our European Delivery Program.
For more information, please consult an author‐
ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to
one of the following address:
in the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
in Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms the service in
the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐
gram offers technical help in the case of a
breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
You can find further information in the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐
ment wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of address change" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) on the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We
can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐
sary.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐
ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐
cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of
Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet
or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
24
General notes
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard‐
ous to health
In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"),
the following detachable label has been added to
each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions
or system failures.
#
Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well any required
repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
a result of incorrect modifications to
electronic component parts
Modification to electronic components, their
software or wiring could impair their function
and/or the function of other networked com‐
ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
to safety could also be affected.
As a result, they may no longer function as
intended and/or endanger the operating
safety of the vehicle.
#
Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐
tronic component parts or their soft‐
ware.
#
You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data".
&
WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
materials on hot parts of the exhaust
system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system.
#
When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under‐
side.
General notes
25
#
Remove trapped plants or other flam‐
mable material.
#
If there is damage, consult a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle
In the following situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
R
The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road
R
The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐
hole
R
A heavy object strikes the underbody or
chassis components
In situations such as this, the body, the
underbody, chassis components, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
an accident, may not absorb the loads that
arise as intended.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can collect between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot
parts on the exhaust system.
#
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
or
#
If driving safety is impaired while con‐
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
the vehicle immediately in accordance
with the traffic conditions, and contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐
cle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: 1) These
devices may not cause harmful interference, and
2) These devices must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol‐
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including interfer‐
ence that may cause undesired operation of the
device."
USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐
ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface):
this device complies with Part 18 of the FCC
Rules."
The name and address of the responsible party
is:
peiker acustic GmbH
Max-Planck-Str. 28-32
61381 Friedrichsdorf
Germany
26
General notes
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems.
As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle could be affected.
#
Only connect the vehicle diagnostics
connection to devices which have been
tested with regard to their use and are
considered safe.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
*
NOTE Battery discharging from using
devices connected to the diagnostics
connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
#
Check the charge level of the battery.
#
If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable
distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions inspection during the main
inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐
rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐
cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant
works.
For the following, always have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter:
R
safety-relevant works
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
modifications as well as installations and
conversions
R
work on electronic components
General notes
27
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service center.
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐
faction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐
essary, contact us at one of the following
addresses:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA), go to
https://www.safercar.gov or write to Adminis‐
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW, Wash‐
ington, DC 20590, USA.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from: https://
www.safercar.gov
28
General notes
Limited Warranty
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising
from violation of these operating instruc‐
tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐
tion of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#
Follow the instructions in these operat‐
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐
cle damage.
QR code for rescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
tains the most important information about your
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the
electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at https://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Electronic control units
Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐
cle. Some of these are necessary for the safe
operation of your vehicle, while some assist you
when driving (driver assistance systems). In
addition, your vehicle provides comfort and
entertainment functions, which are also made
possible by electronic control units.
Electronic control units contain data memories
which can temporarily or permanently store
technical information about the vehicle's operat‐
ing state, component loads, maintenance
requirements and technical events or malfunc‐
tions.
In general, this information documents the state
of a component part, a module, a system or the
surroundings such as:
R
Operating status of system components (e.g.
fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)
R
Status messages concerning the vehicle or
its individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐
eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐
tened seat belts)
R
Malfunctions or faults in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
R
Information on events leading to vehicle
damage
R
System reactions in special driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐
bility control systems)
R
Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing the actual control unit
function, this data assists the manufacturer in
detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐
mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this
General notes
29
data is temporary and is only processed in the
vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is
stored in the event or fault memory.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical data
from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐
work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐
ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services).
Services include repair services, maintenance
processes, warranty claims and quality assur‐
ance measures, for example. The read out is per‐
formed via the legally prescribed port for the
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The
respective service network locations or third
parties collect, process and use the data. They
document technical statuses of the vehicle,
assist in finding malfunctions and improving
quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer,
if necessary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is
subject to product liability. For this, the manu‐
facturer requires technical data from vehicles.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
service outlet as part of repair or maintenance
work.
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into vehicle convenience and info‐
tainment functions yourself.
This includes, for example:
R
Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
R
Address book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐
grated navigation system
R
Entered navigation destinations
R
Data about the use of Internet services
This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it
is located on a device which you have connected
to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash
drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the
vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data
is sent to third parties only at your request, par‐
ticularly when you use online services in accord‐
ance with the settings that you have selected.
You can store or change convenience settings/
individualization in the vehicle at any time.
Depending on the equipment, this includes, for
example:
R
Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions
R
Suspension and climate control settings
R
Customizations such as interior lighting
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to the vehicle. You can control this by
means of the control elements integrated in the
vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone
can be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐
tain information is simultaneously transferred to
your smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration, this can
include:
R
General vehicle data
R
Position data
This allows you to use selected apps on your
smartphone, such as navigation or music play‐
back. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi‐
cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of
30
General notes
further data processing occurs is determined by
the provider of the specific app used. Which set‐
tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐
cific app and the operating system of your
smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐
cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐
nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones).
Online functions can be used via the wireless
network connection. This includes online serv‐
ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐
ufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer's services
Regarding online services of the manufacturer,
the individual functions are described by the
manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Operator's
Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with
the relevant data protection information. Per‐
sonal data may be used for the provision of
online services. Data is exchanged via a secure
connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated
IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐
cessed and used via the provision of services
exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or
with prior consent.
The services and functions (sometimes subject
to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated.
In some cases, this also applies to the entire
vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐
ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.
Third party services
If it is possible to use online services from other
providers, these services are the responsibility
of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms
of use. The manufacturer has no influence on
the content exchanged.
For this reason, please ask the service provider
for information about the type, extent and pur‐
pose of the collection and use of personal data
when services are provided by third parties.
MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me
connect
If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi‐
media system or Mercedes me connect, addi‐
tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use
of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca‐
tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the
MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con‐
nect.
For additional information, please refer to the
"MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the
Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only:
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐
uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
General notes
31
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which accidents and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties that have the special
equipment, such as law enforcement, can read
the information by accessing the vehicle or the
EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐
out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐
see. Exceptions to this representation include
responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by
federal, state or local government; in connection
with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA
or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required
by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of December
2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to
EDRs.
Copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and with updates on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
32
General notes
Registered trademarks
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg‐
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows Media
®
are regis‐
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGATSurvey
®
and related brands are regis‐
tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
General notes
33
Restraint system
Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com‐
ponents:
R
Seat belt system
R
Airbags
R
Child restraint system
R
Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐
cle occupants from coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an
accident. In the event of an accident, the
restraint system can also reduce the forces to
which the vehicle occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the
detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐
tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.
Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags
are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐
pant must observe the following information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly.
R
Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R
Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
R
Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com‐
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
and airbag generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Reduced restraint system protection
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
modifications to the restraint system
The restraint system can no longer function
correctly after alterations have been made.
The restraint system may then not protect
the vehicle occupants as intended by failing
in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
example
#
Never alter the parts of the restraint
system.
#
Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their
software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐
modate a person with disabilities, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
USA only: for details, contact our Customer
Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
34
Occupant safety
Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the vehicle is started.
The components of the restraint system are then
functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐
tem if:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a
journey
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig‐
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This may affect
the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air‐
bags, for example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐
dent
How the restraint system works is determined by
the severity of the impact detected and the type
of accident anticipated:
R
Frontal impact
R
Rear impact
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of
the restraint system are determined based on
the evaluation of the sensor values measured at
various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
the components of the restraint system must
take place in good time at the start of the colli‐
sion.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐
sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do
they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐
ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of
vehicle deceleration.
Occupant safety
35
The components of the restraint system can
be activated or deployed independently of
each other:
Component Detected deploy‐
ment situation
Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices
Frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact,
rollover
Driver's airbag, front
passenger airbag
Frontal impact
Knee airbag Frontal impact
Side airbag Side impact
Window curtain air‐
bag
Side impact, rollover,
frontal impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45).
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag
components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed.
#
Do not touch the air bag parts.
#
Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐
ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐
gered or an airbag deployed.
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐
gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also be
released:
R
The bang will not generally affect your hear‐
ing.
R
In general, the powder released is not haz‐
ardous to health but may cause short-term
breathing difficulties to persons suffering
from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices contain perchlorate material, which may
require special handling or environmental pro‐
tection measures. National guidelines regarding
waste disposal must be observed. In California,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Seat belts
Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
36
Occupant safety
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
pants have their seat belts fastened
correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor‐
rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat
(/ page 90).
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐
cle occupant must observe the following infor‐
mation:
R
The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
R
The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐
ter of the shoulder and as low down across
the hips as possible.
R
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under
your arm or behind your back.
R
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐
der section of the belt. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
R
Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
R
Only one person should use each seat belt at
any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐
dren to travel sitting on the lap of another
vehicle occupant.
R
Never secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants. Always observe the
instructions for loading the vehicle when
securing objects, luggage or loads
(/ page 99).
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a special seatbelt retractor:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt
retractor (/ page 55).
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 50).
Occupant safety
37
Limitations of the protection provided by the
seat belt
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
#
Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller build
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear
the seat belt correctly without a suitable
additional restraint system.
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐
tem.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
following situations:
R
The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R
The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt
anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
be deployed unintentionally or not function
as intended.
#
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐
rages or seat belt retractors.
#
Make sure that the seat belts are not
damaged, are not worn and are clean.
#
Always have the seat belts checked
immediately after an accident at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that are approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
38
Occupant safety
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐
sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera‐
tional and are unable to perform their inten‐
ded protective function.
#
Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐
ately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident.
*
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the
seat mechanism.
#
Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐
not be pulled out any further.
#
Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
responding seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device and side air bag when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the side air bag may also deploy
in the event of an accident along with other
systems.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device when the front-
passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front-
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Occupant safety
39
Device may also deploy in the event of an
accident along with other systems.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE
®
: If the front seat belt
is not pulled tightly across your body, the seat
belt adjustment may automatically apply a cer‐
tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt
tightly while it is adjusting.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 40).
Releasing seat belts
#
Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment
via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
#
Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and
front passenger
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐
ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
seconds every time the vehicle is started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
When the driver's and front passenger's doors
are closed and the driver and front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt
warning goes out.
In the following cases, the seat belt warning
lights up during a journey if:
R
The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front
passenger seat belt is not fastened.
R
The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1
Driver's knee bag
2
Driver's airbag
40
Occupant safety
3
Front passenger airbag
4
Front passenger knee airbag
5
Window curtain airbag
6
Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag can be rec‐
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
Potential protection from each airbag:
AIRBAG Potential protection for:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg
Driver's airbag,
front passenger
airbag
Head and ribcage
Window curtain
airbag
Head
Side airbag Ribcage and pelvis
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front-passenger airbag is enabled
If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled,
a child on the front-passenger seat may be
struck by the front-passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 60). Also, always
observe the notes on rearward-facing or
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front passenger seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff:
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45).
*
NOTE Important points to remember if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
on the front passenger side if:
R
There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
R
The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger
seat and the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
#
Stow objects in a suitable place.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation,
the window curtain airbag on the front
Occupant safety
41
passenger side may deploy. The airbag is
deployed regardless of whether the front
passenger seat is occupied.
Protection by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
tective function and deployment may even
cause further injuries.
In order to avoid risks, each vehicle occupant
must always make sure of the following:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to
ensure that the lap belt never lies across
the abdomen.
R
Adopt the correct seat position and keep
as far away as possible from the airbags.
R
Observe the following information.
#
Always make sure that there are no
objects between the airbag and vehicle
occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment
of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must
observe the following information in particular:
R
Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
When doing so, always observe the informa‐
tion on the correct driver's seat position
(/ page 90).
R
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully
deployed.
R
Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags.
R
Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not
put your feet on the cockpit, for example.
Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐
ment area of the airbag.
R
If children are traveling in the vehicle,
observe the additional notes (/ page 50).
R
Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an
airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
occupant must always make sure of the follow‐
ing in particular:
R
There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air‐
bag.
R
There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
R
There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R
There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
holders, attached to the vehicle within the
42
Occupant safety
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on the door, on the side window or
on the side wall trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐
ment area of an airbag. Always comply with
the accessory manufacturer's installation
instructions and, in particular, the notes on
suitable places for installation.
R
There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the airbag cover
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
no longer function correctly.
#
Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 40).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the use of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
vent the deployment of air bags integrated
into the seats.
Consequently, the air bags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do. In addition, operation of the automatic
front passenger air bag shutoff may be
restricted.
#
You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond‐
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions of the sensors in the door paneling
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐
formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The airbags might therefore not function
properly any more.
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do.
#
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
#
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer has a protective
function and cannot protect as intended in
the event of an accident.
#
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Occupant safety
43
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is
able to detect whether the front passenger seat
is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐
tem. The front passenger airbag and front
passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled
accordingly.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, always make sure of the
following:
R
Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (/ page 49).
R
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
R
Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or
behind the child restraint system.
R
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
R
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
R
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
R
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
ingly.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the sitting surface and
the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the
child restraint system could affect the func‐
tion of the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff.
This could result in the front passenger air‐
bag not functioning as intended during an
accident.
#
Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint
system.
#
The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the sitting
surface of the front passenger seat.
#
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possi‐
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
the front passenger seat.
#
Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 36).
R
Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R
Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be
disabled by mistake, for example in the following
situations:
R
The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
44
Occupant safety
R
The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐
face.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
deactivated front passenger airbag
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with
the vehicle interior, especially if the person is
sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
R
The person is seated correctly.
#
Ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐
sification of the person or child restraint system
on the front passenger seat takes place after the
front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
status of the front passenger airbag.
Always observe the notes on the function of the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(/ page 45).
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
tor lamps
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed during which the two PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up
simultaneously.
Occupant safety
45
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐
played after the self-test:
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to
deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled.
It will then not be deployed in the event of an
accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front passenger
airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp
light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
may not be used. Also in this case, do not install
a child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. Have automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Status display
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for
the current situation.
After installing a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐
tinuously.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 60).
Depending on the child restraint system and the
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not install the rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat.
Instead, install the rearward-facing child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
After installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat: depending on the child restraint system
and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off.
Always observe the following information.
46
Occupant safety
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect positioning of the forward-
facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with parts of the vehi‐
cle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
#
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible and fully retract
the seat cushion length adjustment.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat
belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐
der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be
routed forwards and downwards from
the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust
the front passenger seat accordingly.
#
Always observe the child restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 60).
If a person is sitting on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's
stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must
always observe the following information:
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond‐
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This
indicates that the front passenger airbag is
enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult
should not use the front passenger seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up continuously
or remains off, depending on the result of the
classification.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger
seat as far back as possible, or the per‐
son of smaller stature should use a rear
seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously: the person of
smaller stature should not use the front
passenger seat.
Occupant safety
47
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test,
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It
will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle interior, especially if
the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger air bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance with the per‐
son in the front passenger seat.
R
The person is seated properly with a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 60).
PRE-SAFE
®
system
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant protec‐
tion)
PRE-SAFE
®
is able to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can implement the following meas‐
ures independently of each other:
R
Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Closing the side windows.
R
Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
sliding sunroof.
R
Vehicles with memory function: Move the
front passenger seat to a more favorable
seat position.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound: provided that the multi‐
media system is switched on, generates a
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐
tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
*
NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or
the object.
#
Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE
®
system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings your‐
self.
48
Occupant safety
#
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS can detect certain impacts,
particularly an imminent rear impact, and take
pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle
occupants. These measures cannot necessarily
prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS can implement the following
measures independently of each other:
R
Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is can‐
celed automatically when the vehicle pulls
away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits
The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐
lowing situations:
R
when backing up
The system will not initiate any braking applica‐
tion in the following situations:
R
whilst driving
or
R
when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe when children are traveling
in the vehicle
%
Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
specific situation. In this way you can recog‐
nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐
dren are traveling in the vehicle
(/ page 50).
Be diligent
Bear in mind that neglecting to secure a child in
the child restraint system may have serious con‐
sequences. Always be diligent in securing a child
carefully before every journey.
To improve protection for children younger than
12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the
following information:
R
Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cle.
R
The child restraint system must be appropri‐
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐
ling a child restraint system.
Accident statistics show that children secured
on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐
dren secured on the front seats. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat.
Occupant safety
49
Generic term "child restraint system"
The generic term child restraint system is used
in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐
tem is, for example:
R
A baby car seat
R
A rearward-facing child seat
R
A forward-facing child seat
R
A child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child
booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observing laws and legal requirements
Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observing standards for child restraint sys‐
tems
All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐
ing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
complies with the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐
lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems
in the vehicle
Only use the following securing systems for child
restraint systems:
R
The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets
R
The vehicle's seat belt system
R
The Top Tether anchorages
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system is preferred.
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the
vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child
restraint system incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat
belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system, always comply with the permissible
gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐
tem (/ page 55).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
height where a three-point seat belt can be fitted
properly without a booster seat.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child
booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child
restraint system
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small
child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint
system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐
50
Occupant safety
site direction to the direction of travel and faces
backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in
a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor‐
rectly
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by incorrect installation of the child
restraint system
If the child restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
#
Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
#
Never place objects under or behind
the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐
ions.
#
Always use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them.
#
Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or secured, it could release in the
event of an accident, sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
The child restraint system could be flung
around and hit vehicle occupants.
#
Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use.
#
Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
R
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions as well as the vehicle-specific
information:
-
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 55).
-
Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 59).
-
Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
(/ page 61). Observe the specific
instructions for the rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems
(/ page 60).
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐
rent situation (/ page 45).
Occupant safety
51
R
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior and on the child restraint system.
R
Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system may no longer
function as it is supposed to if you make
modifications or attach objects to it, e.g. toys
or unsuitable accessories. This poses an
increased risk of injury!
Never modify the child restraint system. Only
attach accessories which the manufacturer
of the child restraint system has authorized
especially for this child restraint system.
Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint
systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
tems that have been subjected to a load in
an accident may then not be able to perform
their intended protective function.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#
Always replace child restraint systems
immediately that have been damaged or
involved in an accident.
#
Have the securing systems for the child
restraint systems checked at a qualified
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
&
WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suffer burns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system.
#
Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
#
Protect it with a blanket, for example.
#
If the child restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
52
Occupant safety
Observe when stopping or parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
serious or even fatal injury.
#
Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
Occupant safety
53
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system
Securing systems for child restraint systems
Vehicle seat
Left/right rear seat
Favored securing system:
®
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing sys‐
tem
¯
Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 57)
Alternative securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
Front passenger seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe:
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
current situation (/ page 45).
R
Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shut‐
off (/ page 44).
Center rear seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
¯
Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 57)
54
Occupant safety
Activating/deactivating the seat belt's spe‐
cial seatbelt retractor
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if a
seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is
in motion, the child restraint system is no
longer correctly secured. The child seat
safety feature is deactivated and the seat
belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel.
It is therefore not possible to engage the seat
belt again.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions.
#
Activate the child seat safety feature
again and correctly secure the child
restraint system.
When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor
ensures that the seat belts of the front
passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken
once the child restraint system is secured.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a special seatbelt retractor:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
#
To install a child restraint system: when
installing a child restraint system, always
observe the manufacturer's installation and
operating instructions as well as the informa‐
tion in this Operator's Manual.
#
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt
outlet.
#
Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle.
#
To activate the special seatbelt retractor:
pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
When the special seatbelt retractor is activa‐
ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound.
#
Push the child restraint system down until
the seat belt sits tightly.
#
To deactivate the special seatbelt retrac‐
tor: press the release button of the seat belt
buckle.
#
Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
the seat belt outlet.
Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
Occupant safety
55
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#
Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
permissible gross mass of the child and
child restraint system is exceeded
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys‐
tems in which the child is secured using the
integrated seat belt in the child restraint sys‐
tem, the permissible gross mass of the child
and child restraint system is 73 lb (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lb (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated seat belt does not offer suffi‐
cient protection. An excessive load may be
placed on the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachments and the child may not be
restrained in the event of an accident, for
example.
#
If the child and the child restraint sys‐
tem together weigh more than 73 lb
(33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system that secures the
child with the vehicle seat belt.
#
Also secure the child restraint system
with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the
mass of the child restraint system:
R
in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐
ing instructions for the child restraint system
used
R
on a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is still
complied with.
When installing a child restraint system, observe
the following:
O
Always observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a
child restraint system.
O
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for
the child restraint system used.
O
Make sure that the child's feet do not come
into contact with the front seat. If neces‐
sary, move the front seat forward slightly.
® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system, also observe the follow‐
ing:
O
When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat
and a Group I rearward-facing child
restraint system on a rear seat: adjust
the front seat so that the seat does not
touch the child restraint system.
O
When using a Group I forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble. In addition, the backrest of the child
56
Occupant safety
restraint system must, as far as possible, lie
flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
Once the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints imme‐
diately and adjust them correctly.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
group II or III, there may be restrictions on
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
1
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket
Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi‐
cle.
*
NOTE Be careful not to damage the seat
belt for the center seat when installing
the child restraint system
#
Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped.
#
Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system to both mounting brackets
in the vehicle.
Securing a Top Tether
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
rear seat backrests are not locked after
installing Top Tether belts
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking or sudden changes of
direction.
As a result, child restraint systems cannot
perform their intended protective function.
Rear seat backrests that are not locked can
Occupant safety
57
also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
event of an accident.
#
Always lock rear seat backrests after
installing Top Tether belts.
#
Observe the lock verification indicator.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
¯
If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury can be reduced by a Top
Tether. The Top Tether belt facilitates an
additional connection between the child
restraint system attached with LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
#
If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
(/ page 93).
#
Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage
3.
#
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐
lation instructions when doing so.
#
Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head
restraint 1 between the two head restraint
bars.
#
Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt
4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without
twisting.
#
Tension Top Tether belt 4. Comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐
lation instructions when doing so.
#
Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage
3.
#
If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐
wards (/ page 93). Make sure that you do
58
Occupant safety
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt 4.
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the rear seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#
Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
When installing a belt-secured child restraint
system, observe the following:
O
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for
the child restraint system used.
O
When using a category 0/0+ baby car
seat and a category I rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that the seat does
not touch the child restraint system.
O
When using a category I forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble.
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints imme‐
diately and adjust them correctly.
O
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the rear
seat.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions
on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be installed facing the
wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the
seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
O
Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
Occupant safety
59
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a child seat safety feature:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
When enabled, the child seat safety feature
ensures that the seat belts of the front
passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken
once the child restraint system is secured
(/ page 55).
#
Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
rear seat.
#
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems (/ page 61).
Always observe the status of the front passenger
airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐
tor lamp:
R
When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled.
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 45).
R
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐
bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy
during an accident.
60
Occupant safety
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
When installing a belt-secured child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, always
observe the following:
O
Observe the child restraint system manufac‐
turer's installation and operating instruc‐
tions.
O
When using a forward-facing child restraint
system in category I: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble.
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints imme‐
diately and adjust them correctly.
O
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions
on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing the wrong
direction.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
O
Never place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor
function ensures that the seat belt does not
slacken once the child restraint system is
secured (/ page 55).
#
Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest
position if possible.
#
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that
the front edge of the seat cushion is in the
highest position and the rear edge of the
seat cushion is in the lowest position.
#
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical
position possible.
#
Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
#
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
#
If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat
accordingly.
Occupant safety
61
Child safety locks
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear doors
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
serious or even fatal injury.
#
Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could, in particular:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
#
Always activate the child safety locks
installed if children are traveling in the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors
and the rear passenger compartment side win‐
dows.
62
Occupant safety
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
each door separately. The doors can no longer
be opened from the inside.
#
Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or
2 (deactivate).
#
Make sure that the child safety locks are
working properly.
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear passenger compartment side
windows
#
To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
The rear passenger compartment side win‐
dow can be opened or closed in the following
cases:
R
With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch
on the driver's door.
R
With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch
on the corresponding rear door or driv‐
er's door.
Notes on pets in the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Thereby an animal may:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Occupant safety
63
R
switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
the vehicle in the event of an accident or
sudden steering and braking maneuver and
injure vehicle occupants in the process.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
#
Always correctly secure animals while
driving, for example using a suitable
animal carrier.
64
Occupant safety
SmartKey
Overview of SmartKey functions
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
*
NOTE Damage to the key caused by
magnetic fields
#
Keep the key away from strong mag‐
netic fields.
%
The SmartKey may vary from the one shown
in the image, depending on the vehicle
equipment.
1
Locks
2
Indicator lamp
3
Unlocks
4
Opens the trunk lid
5
Panic alarm
%
If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after
pressing the Ü or ß button, the bat‐
tery is discharged.
Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 67).
The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following
components:
R
The doors
R
The fuel filler flap
Opening and closing
65
R
The trunk lid
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
theft protection is activated again.
Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐
tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect
the SmartKey's functionality.
Indicator lamp of the vehicle lock
Indicator lamp 1 in the trim on the driver's side
flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside.
Indicator lamp 1 remains off if the vehicle is
locked from inside or while the vehicle is in
motion.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
#
Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched off.
%
The panic alarm function is only available in
certain countries.
#
To activate: press button 1 for approx‐
imately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
#
To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.
or
#
Press the start/stop button on the cockpit
(the SmartKey is inside the vehicle).
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey:
R
Central unlocking
R
Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
66
Opening and closing
#
To switch between settings: press the
Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the indicator
lamp flashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel filler flap has been selected:
R
To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
R
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the SmartKey functions
If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for
an extended period of time, you can reduce the
energy consumption of the respective SmartKey.
To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions.
#
To deactivate: press the ß button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession.
The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice
briefly and lights up once.
#
To activate: press any button on the Smart‐
Key.
%
When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐
Key in the marked space of the center con‐
sole, the SmartKey functions are automati‐
cally activated (/ page 132).
Removing/inserting the emergency key
#
To remove: press release knob 1.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
#
Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in
the intermediate position.
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
intermediate position is not available.
#
Press release knob 1 again and fully
remove emergency key 2.
#
To insert: press release knob 1.
#
Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
%
You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to
a key ring.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
&
DANGER Serious damage to health
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
serious damage to health.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
#
Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
Opening and closing
67
#
If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
Requirements:
R
You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
#
Remove the emergency key (/ page 67).
#
Press release knob 2 down fully and slide
cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
#
Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the
arrow and remove.
#
Remove battery compartment 3 and take
out the discharged battery.
#
Insert the new battery into battery compart‐
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking
in the battery compartment and on the bat‐
tery when doing this.
#
Push in battery compartment 3.
#
Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages.
68
Opening and closing
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle.
Possible causes:
R
The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
R
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is faulty.
#
Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
#
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 67).
#
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a SmartKey.
#
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.
Opening and closing
69
Doors
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
#
To unlock and open a front door: pull door
handle 1.
#
To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door
handle.
#
To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐
dle again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle
from the inside
#
To unlock: press button 1.
#
To lock: press button 2.
The indicator lamp in the button on the driv‐
er's or front passenger door lights up.
%
You can also lock and unlock the vehicle
with the buttons on the front passenger door
and rear doors.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
R
If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
R
If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐
LESS-GO
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is outside the vehicle.
R
The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
R
The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
70
Opening and closing
#
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
face of the door handle.
#
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface
1 or 2.
#
Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
sor surface 2 until the closing process has
been completed.
%
Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 80).
If you open the trunk lid from outside, the trunk
lid is automatically unlocked.
Opening and closing
71
Problems with KEYLESS-GO
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Possible causes:
R
The SmartKey functions have been deactivated (/ page 67).
R
The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
R
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is faulty.
#
Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 67).
#
Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
#
Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 67).
#
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐
ing feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.
72
Opening and closing
#
To activate: press and hold button 2 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
#
To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
When the vehicle is locked automatically, the
indicator lamp in button 2 lights up.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
R
While the vehicle is being tow started/
pushed.
R
If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐
mometer.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
emergency key
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the
emergency key
%
If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the emergency key.
#
Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
into opening 1 in the cover.
#
Pull and hold the door handle.
#
Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle
until it releases.
#
Release the door handle.
Opening and closing
73
#
To unlock: turn the emergency key counter-
clockwise to position 1.
#
To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1.
#
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐
der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Locking the front passenger door and rear
doors with the emergency key
#
Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency
key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
#
To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle:
turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as
far as it will go.
#
To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle:
turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it
will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer
be opened from outside.
Trunk
Opening the trunk lid
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before
opening the trunk lid.
#
Never drive with the trunk lid open.
74
Opening and closing
*
NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta‐
cles above the vehicle
The trunk lid swings upwards when it is
opened.
#
Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐
cient clearance above the trunk lid.
You have the following options for opening
the trunk lid:
#
Pull the trunk lid handle.
#
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make
a kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 76).
#
Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1.
#
Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey.
Closing the trunk lid
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
You have the following options for closing
the trunk lid:
#
Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han‐
dle recess and push it closed.
Opening and closing
75
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the
trunk lid by performing a kicking movement
under the bumper.
Observe the notes when opening the trunk lid
(/ page 74).
&
WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system.
#
Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection
range of the sensors.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the trunk lid
R
When using an automatic car wash
R
When using a high pressure cleaner
#
Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that the SmartKey located is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle in
such situations.
When making the kicking movement, make sure
that your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐
wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Observe the following notes:
R
The SmartKey is behind the vehicle.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move‐
ment.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
R
Do not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly.
R
The kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.
1
Detection range of the sensors
76
Opening and closing
If several consecutive kicking movements are
not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following cases:
R
The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due
to road salt or snow.
R
The kicking movement is made using a pros‐
thetic leg.
The trunk lid could be opened unintentionally, in
the following situations:
R
If a person's arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing
the vehicle or picking up objects.
R
If objects are moved or placed behind the
vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
R
If clamping straps, tarps or other coverings
are pulled over the bumper.
R
If a protective mat with a length reaching
over the trunk sill down into the detection
range of the sensors is used.
R
If the protective mat is not secured correctly.
R
When working on the trailer hitch, trailers or
rear bicycle racks.
Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 67)
or do not carry the SmartKey about your person
in such situations.
Unlocking the trunk from inside with the
emergency release
Requirements:
R
The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and
charged.
#
Press the emergency release button 1
briefly.
The trunk lid will unlock and open.
Opening and closing
77
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#
When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#
If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
tended.
#
Activate the child safety lock for the
rear side windows.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
1
Closes
2
Opens
The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐
dence.
#
To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
78
Opening and closing
#
To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐
dows can continue being operated.
This function is available for around four minutes
or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side win‐
dows
If an object blocks a side window during the
closing process, the side window will open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#
During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
During resetting
This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window
again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
before starting a journey)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#
When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
#
Press and hold the Ü button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R
The vehicle is unlocked
R
The side windows are opened.
R
The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened.
R
The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.
%
If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid‐
ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds
are opened first.
#
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the Ü button.
#
To continue convenience opening: press
and hold the Ü button again.
Opening and closing
79
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle
from outside)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
inadvertent convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dow and the sliding sunroof.
#
Observe the complete closing proce‐
dure when using convenience closing.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
Press and hold the ß button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R
The vehicle is locked.
R
The side windows are closed.
R
The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
#
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the ß button.
#
To close the roller sunblinds: press and
hold the ß button again.
%
Convenience closing can also be operated
with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 70).
Problems with the side windows
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatally injured if reversing protection is
not activated
If you close a side window again immediately
after it has been blocked, the side window
will close with increased or maximum force.
The reversing feature will then not be active.
Parts of the body could become trapped in
the closing area in the process.
#
Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#
To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to re-
open the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A side window cannot be closed and
you cannot see the cause.
#
Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
#
Adjust the side windows.
80
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
#
Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
#
Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or
closed using the convenience opening
feature.
The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
#
Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace it if necessary (/ page 67).
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
%
The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the sliding
sunroof
During opening and closing, parts of the
body could get caught in the sweep of the
sliding sunroof.
#
When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
Opening and closing
81
#
Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐
dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the roller sun
blind
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts become trapped between the
roller sun blind and frame or the sliding sun‐
roof.
#
When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep of
the roller sun blind.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.
*
NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and
ice
Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of
the sliding sunroof.
#
Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice.
*
NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐
roof may damage the sealing strips.
#
Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
*
NOTE Important points to remember
when a roof rack is installed
When a roof rack is installed, raising or open‐
ing the sliding sunroof may be limited.
#
Check whether the sliding sunroof can
be raised or opened when a roof rack is
installed.
#
If in doubt, do not raise or open the
sliding sunroof.
82
Opening and closing
1
Raises
2
Opens
3
Closes/lowers
Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can be operated only when the roller sunblind is
open.
#
Check whether the sliding sunroof can be
raised or opened when a roof rack is instal‐
led.
#
To start automatic operation: press the
3 button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
#
To interrupt automatic operation: briefly
press the 3 button in any direction.
The opening/closing process will be stop‐
ped.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature
is available only when the sliding sunroof is
closed or raised.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding
sunroof
If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof
during the closing process, the sliding sunroof
will open again automatically. The automatic
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute for your attentiveness.
#
During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment even with
the reversing function active
The reversing feature does not react in par‐
ticular:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
Over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing
path
R
During resetting
This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing
83
Automatic reversing function of the roller
sunblind
If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur‐
ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will
open again automatically. The automatic revers‐
ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute
for your attentiveness.
#
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move‐
ment.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing feature
In particular, the reversing feature does not
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
gers.
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent entrapment in these situations.
#
When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range
of movement.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during
the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
%
The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can
interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing
function when driving" and "Automatic lower‐
ing".
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If
it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is
automatically lowered while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic lowering function
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If
the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it is
automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds.
At low speeds, it is raised again automatically.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐
matic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof
automatically lowers slightly at the rear.
This could trap you or other persons.
#
Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
#
If somebody becomes trapped, briefly
push the sliding sunroof button for‐
wards or backwards.
The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
%
The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
84
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof
closes with increased force.
Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.
#
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
#
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
#
Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist‐
ance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:
#
Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
#
Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
Opening and closing
85
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding
sunroof: The sliding sunroof or the
roller sunblind does not operate
smoothly.
#
Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
#
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being
started without the correct SmartKey.
The immobilizer is automatically activated when
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when
the ignition is switched on.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐
Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can
start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left
inside the vehicle.
%
In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the
system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system
If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R
When a door is opened
R
When the trunk lid is opened
R
When the hood is opened
R
When the interior motion sensor is triggered
(/ page 88)
R
When the tow-away alarm is triggered
(/ page 87)
The ATA system is armed automatically after
approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐
tions:
R
After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
86
Opening and closing
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system
is armed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in
the following situations:
R
After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐
Key
R
After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the stowage compartment
(/ page 132)
%
When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call
system is active and the alarm stays on for
more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐
matically sent to the Customer Assistance
Center (/ page 357).
%
In the case of severe battery discharging,
the anti-theft alarm system is automatically
deactivated to facilitate the next engine
start.
Deactivating the ATA
#
Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
SmartKey.
or
#
Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐
Key in the marked space (/ page 132)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO
#
Grasp the outside door handle with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle.
Function of the tow-away alarm
%
This function may not be available in all
countries.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an
alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is
detected while the tow-away alarm is armed.
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after
approximately 60 seconds:
R
After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐
lowing components are closed:
R
The doors
R
The trunk lid
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐
ted:
R
After pressing the Ü or p button on
the SmartKey
R
After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 132)
Opening and closing
87
R
After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on detecting damage on a parked
vehicle (/ page 158).
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Quick Access
#
Activate or deactivate Tow-away Protection.
The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐
ing cases:
R
The vehicle is unlocked again.
R
A door is opened.
R
The vehicle is locked again.
%
If quick access is unavailable, select the
Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu
to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm.
Function of the interior motion sensor
%
This function may not be available in all
countries.
When the interior motion sensor is activated, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐
ment is detected in the vehicle interior.
The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐
cally after approximately ten seconds:
R
after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The interior motion sensor is only activated
when the following components are closed:
R
the doors
R
the trunk lid
The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐
tivated:
R
after pressing the Ü or p button on
the SmartKey
R
after pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the stowage compartment
(/ page 132)
R
after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false
alarm:
R
moving objects such as mascots in the vehi‐
cle interior
R
when the side window is open
R
when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Activating/deactivating the interior motion
sensor
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Quick Access
#
Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-
sor.
The interior motion sensor is activated again in
the following cases:
R
The vehicle is unlocked again.
R
A door is opened.
R
The vehicle is locked again.
88
Opening and closing
%
If quick access is unavailable, select the
Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or
deactivate the interior motion sensor.
Opening and closing
89
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting steering
wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R
You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following
points into consideration.
R
You are sitting in an upright position
R
Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
R
Your legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
R
The back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint
R
You can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
You can move your legs freely
R
You can see all the displays on the instru‐
ment cluster clearly
R
You have a good overview of the traffic con‐
ditions
R
Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the center of your shoul‐
der and across your hips in the pelvic area
90
Seats and stowing
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with
Seat Comfort Package)
#
To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
1 and slide the front section of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.
#
To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever 2 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#
Make sure that the seat is engaged.
#
To adjust the seat cushion inclination:
turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards
until the desired position has been reached.
#
To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever
4 until the desired position has been
reached.
#
To adjust the seat backrest inclination:
turn handwheel 5 forwards and backwards
until the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1
Seat backrest inclination
2
Seat height
3
Seat cushion inclination
4
Seat fore-and-aft position
#
Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 98).
Seats and stowing
91
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1
Raise
2
Soften
3
Lower
4
Harden
#
Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
#
Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
#
Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
92
Seats and stowing
#
To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#
To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
#
To move forwards: press release knob 2
and pull the head restraint forwards.
#
To move backwards: press release knob 2
and push the head restraint backwards.
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear
seats mechanically
#
To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#
To lower: press the release knob 1 in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down.
Installing/removing the rear seat head
restraints
Removing
#
Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for‐
wards slightly (/ page 102).
#
Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it
will go.
Seats and stowing
93
#
Push release knob 1 in the direction of the
arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Installing
#
Insert the head restraint such that the
notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
#
Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
#
Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Configuring the seat settings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Comfort
5
Seat Comfort
Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar
region of the seat backrest (lumbar)
#
Select Lumbar.
#
Select the settings Z for the desired seat.
#
Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
#
Select Side Bolsters.
#
Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.
Selecting the massage program for the front
seats
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Comfort
5
Massage
#
Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage.
#
Start the program for the desired seat ;.
#
To set the massage intensity: switch High
Intensity on or off.
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Comfort
5
Seat Comfort
#
Select Reset.
#
Select ß for the desired seat.
The settings for the selected seat are reset.
Switching the seat heating on/off
&
WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
The health of persons with limited tempera‐
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
high temperatures may be affected or they
may even suffer burn-like injuries.
#
Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated after it is
switched on repeatedly.
*
NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over‐
heating may occur due to objects or docu‐
94
Seats and stowing
ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐
ions or child seats. This could cause damage
to the seat surface.
#
Make sure that no objects or docu‐
ments are on the seats when the seat
heating is switched on.
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
#
To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up.
#
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating
is switched off.
%
The seat heating will automatically switch
down from the three heating levels after 8,
10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating
switches off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
#
To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
Depending on the ventilation level, up to
three indicator lamps will light up.
Seats and stowing
95
#
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐
tion is switched off.
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐
dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Push release lever 1 down as far as it will
go.
The steering column is unlocked.
#
Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
#
Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
The steering column is locked.
#
Check and make sure that the steering col‐
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
96
Seats and stowing
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
#
Push the switch into position 1 or 2.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
wheel heater will switch off.
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature
&
WARNING Risk of accident when driving
off while adjusting the easy exit feature
‑ If you drive off while the easy entry and exit
feature is making adjustments, you could
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Always wait until the adjustment proc‐
ess is complete before driving off.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while adjusting the easy entry and exit
feature
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts
the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occu‐
pants – particularly children – could become
trapped.
#
During the adjustment process of the
easy entry and exit feature, make sure
that no one has any body parts in the
sweep of the seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
driver's seat:
#
Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process is stopped.
You can stop the adjustment process by press‐
ing one of the memory function position
switches.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during activation of the easy entry and
exit feature by children
If children activate the easy entry and exit
feature, they can become trapped, particu‐
larly when unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
Seats and stowing
97
When the easy entry and exit feature is active,
the driver's seat will move backwards and the
backrest will be moved to a steeper position
when:
R
You switch the ignition off with the driver's
door open
R
You open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off
%
The driver's seat will move backwards only if
it is not already in the rearmost position.
The seat backrest will move forwards only if
it is not already in the foremost position.
The driver's seat will move back to the last drive
position when:
R
You switch the ignition on with the driver's
door closed
R
You close the driver's door with the ignition
switched on
The last drive position will be stored when:
R
You switch the ignition off
R
You call up the seat settings via the memory
function
R
You save the seat setting using the memory
function
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
5
AUTO. SEAT ADJUSTMENT
5
Easy Entry/Exit
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Operating the memory function
&
WARNING Risk of an accident if the
memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv‐
er's side while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#
Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐
ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐
larly children – could become trapped.
#
During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
#
If someone becomes trapped, press a
preset position button or seat adjust‐
ment switch immediately.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti‐
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
98
Seats and stowing
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Storing
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
The following systems can be selected:
R
Seat
R
Seat contour
R
Outside mirrors
R
Head-up Display
#
Set the seat, the seat contour, the Head-up
Display and the outside mirrors to the
desired position.
#
Press memory button M and then press pre‐
set position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec‐
onds.
#
To call up: press and briefly hold memory
position switch 1, 2 or 3.
After releasing the button, the front seat,
Head-up Display, outside mirrors and seat
contour are moved into the stored position
automatically.
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before
opening the trunk lid.
#
Never drive with the trunk lid open.
Seats and stowing
99
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the
vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
always restrain the objects they contain in
the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Always stow and secure objects that
are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or too large in the trunk.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself.
#
Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closely in
this area.
#
Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in
mind when loading the vehicle:
R
Never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle
(including occupants). The values are speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
vehicle's B-pillar.
R
The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R
Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R
Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
distribute the load evenly.
100
Seats and stowing
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front stowage compart‐
ments
1
Stowage space in the doors
2
Stowage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection
3
Stowage compartment in the front center
console with a USB connection
4
Glove box
Locking/unlocking the glove box
#
Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐
wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).
Opening the stowage compartment for cus‐
tomer documents in the glove box
#
To open: turn the handle to the left or right.
Seats and stowing
101
Through-loading feature in the rear bench
seat
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#
Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked
in place, the lock verification indicator will be
red.
The center and outer seat backrests can be fol‐
ded forwards separately.
#
Vehicles with a memory function: If at
least one section of the rear seat backrest is
folded forwards, the corresponding front seat
will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to
avoid a collision.
#
If necessary, fully insert the rear seat back‐
rest head restraints.
The release handles are located beneath the rear
shelf.
#
Left and right seat backrests: pull the left
or right release handle 1 and fold the corre‐
sponding seat backrest forwards.
102
Seats and stowing
#
Center seat backrest: pull release catch 3
of seat backrest 2 forwards.
#
Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
#
If necessary, reset the driver's or front
passenger seat.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
*
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt when folding back the seat
backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
#
Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
#
Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐
wards, if necessary.
#
Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back
until it engages.
Left and right seat backrest: if the seat
backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock
verification indicator 2 will be visible.
Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is
not engaged and locked, red lock verification
indicator 3 will be visible.
Seats and stowing
103
Locking the release catch of the center rear
seat backrest
Requirements:
R
The left and center seat backrests are
engaged and joined together.
You can lock the center seat backrest release
catch if you want to secure the trunk against
unauthorized access. The center seat backrest
can then be folded forwards only together with
the left seat backrest.
#
Fold the center and left seat backrests for‐
wards.
#
To lock: slide catch 1 upwards.
The release catch of the center seat backrest
will be locked.
#
To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards.
Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 99).
1
Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading
feature in the rear bench seat)
104
Seats and stowing
Opening or closing the stowage space under
the trunk floor
#
To open: lift the trunk floor at recess 1 and
swing it upwards.
#
To close: fold the trunk floor downwards.
Attaching a roof rack
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the maximum
roof load is exceeded
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the usual driving
characteristics as well as the steering and
braking characteristics change. During cor‐
nering, the vehicle tilts more strongly and
may react more sluggishly to steering move‐
ments.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐
ing and braking characteristics, will be
greatly impaired.
#
Always comply with the maximum roof
load and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage from non-
approved roof racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks
which have not been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
#
Use only roof racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof rack is instal‐
led, the sliding sunroof can be fully
raised.
#
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof rack is instal‐
led, the trunk lid can be fully opened.
#
Position the load on the roof rack in
such a way that the vehicle will not sus‐
tain damage even when it is in motion.
Seats and stowing
105
*
NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel caused by a non-
approved roof rack
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel may be damaged by the roof rack if
you attempt to open it when using a roof
rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-
Benz.
#
When a roof rack is installed, open the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel only if this has been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel may be raised to allow ventilation of
the vehicle interior.
*
NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched
when being opened.
#
Do not use metallic or hard objects.
#
Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the
direction of the arrow.
#
Secure the roof rack to the anchorage points
under covers 1.
#
Comply with the roof rack manufacturer's
installation instructions.
#
Secure the load on the roof rack.
Cup holder
Installing the cup holder in or removing it
from the center console (automatic trans‐
mission)
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers
while the vehicle is moving.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is
moving, the container may be flung around
and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from traffic conditions
and you may lose control of the vehicle.
106
Seats and stowing
#
Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
#
Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size.
#
Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.
Cup holder in the stowage compartment without
cover
#
To remove: slide snap-in brackets 1 of the
cup holder inwards until they are unlocked.
#
Move the cup holder upwards out of the
stowage compartment.
%
The cup holder and the rubber mat beneath
it can be removed for cleaning, e.g. with
clean, lukewarm water.
Cup holder in the stowage compartment without
cover
#
To install: if necessary, open the stowage
compartment cover and insert the cup
holder, as shown, into the stowage compart‐
ment with the imprint facing the vehicle inte‐
rior.
Seats and stowing
107
#
Slide the cup holder onto the bars in the
stowage compartment.
#
Slide snap-in brackets 1 outwards until they
engage.
#
Press button 2 and/or 4.
Wings 3 fold upwards.
%
The cup holder wings can be folded down‐
wards and locked. The cup holder's holding
function will then not be available.
Opening or closing the cup holders in the
rear armrest
*
NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to
body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be
damaged by body weight.
#
Do not sit or support yourself on the
rear seat armrest.
*
NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup
holder could become damaged.
#
Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.
%
Depending on its equipment, your vehicle
will have a rear armrest with a cup holder.
#
To open: press cup holder 1 or 2.
Cup holder 1 or 2 will extend automati‐
cally.
#
To close: push cup holder 1 or 2 back
until it engages.
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket in the front center
console
Requirements:
R
Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible.
#
Lift up socket cap 1.
#
Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the stowage compartment
with cover: if you have connected a device to
the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage
compartment open.
108
Seats and stowing
Using the 12 V socket in the trunk
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
#
Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.
USB port in the rear passenger compartment
%
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
design of the stowage compartment and the
number of USB ports in the rear passenger
compartment center console may vary.
If the ignition is switched on you can charge a
USB device, e.g. a mobile phone, at USB ports
1 using a suitable charging cable.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
connection with the exterior antenna
Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile
phone
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
Seats and stowing
109
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of fire from placing
objects in the mobile phone stowage
compartment
There is a risk of fire, in particular, if you
place more than one mobile phone in the
mobile phone stowage compartment.
#
Apart from a mobile phone, do not
place any other objects in the mobile
phone stowage compartment, espe‐
cially those made of metal.
*
NOTE Damage to objects caused by
placing them in the mobile phone stow‐
age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, they may be dam‐
aged by electromagnetic fields.
#
Do not place credit cards, storage
media or other objects sensitive to
electromagnetic fields in the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
*
NOTE Damage to the mobile phone
stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage
compartment, the compartment may be
damaged.
#
Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior antenna via the charging module.
R
The charging function and wireless connec‐
tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's
exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐
tion is switched on.
R
Small mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R
Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may
not be able to be charged or connected with
the vehicle's exterior antenna.
R
The mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This may particularly
depend on the applications (apps) currently
open in the background.
R
To ensure more efficient charging and con‐
nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna,
remove the protective cover from the mobile
phone. Protective covers which are neces‐
sary for wireless charging are excluded.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone
Requirements:
110
Seats and stowing
R
The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. You can find a list of compatible
mobile phones at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com
#
Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐
ter of the marked surface on mat 1 as pos‐
sible with the display facing upwards.
When a message is shown in the multimedia
system, the mobile phone is being charged.
Malfunctions during the charging process are
shown in the media display.
%
The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
Stowage compartment without cover
Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored
and secured to prevent it from falling out while
you are driving.
#
To secure the mobile phone: swing lever
2 out.
Installing/removing the floor mats
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
Seats and stowing
111
#
To install: slide the corresponding seat
backwards and lay the floor mat in the foot‐
well.
#
Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
#
Adjust the corresponding seat.
#
To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2.
#
Remove the floor mat.
112
Seats and stowing
Exterior lighting
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1
W Left-hand standing lamps
2
X Right-hand standing lamps
3
T Parking lamps and license plate lamp
4
à Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5
L Low beam/high beam
6
R Switches the rear fog light on/off
When low beam is activated, the T parking
lamps indicator lamp is deactivated and replaced
by the L low beam indicator lamp.
#
Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐
vant legal stipulations.
*
NOTE Battery discharging by operating
the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery.
#
Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
In the event of severe battery discharging, the
standing lamps or parking lamps are automati‐
cally switched off to facilitate the next engine
start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐
ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the
driver's door is opened.
Light and visibility
113
R
Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 118).
Automatic driving lights function
The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run‐
ning lamps will be switched on automatically
depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐
ent light.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when the low
beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low
beam may not be switched on automatically
if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.
#
In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or off
Requirements:
R
The light switch is in the L or à posi‐
tion.
#
Press the R button.
Please observe the country-specific laws on the
use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the
lights
1
High beam
2
Turn signal light, right
3
High-beam flasher
4
Turn signal light, left
#
Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
114
Light and visibility
High beam
#
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
L or à position.
#
Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1.
When the high beam is activated, the L
low beam indicator lamp will be deactivated
and replaced by the K high beam indica‐
tor lamp.
#
To switch off: push the combination switch
in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the
direction of arrow 3.
High-beam flasher
#
Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal light
#
To indicate briefly: push the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light will flash
three times.
#
To indicate permanently: push the combi‐
nation switch beyond the point of resistance
in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:
R
Indicator operation activated by the driver
can extend for the duration of the lane
change.
R
If the driver indicated directly beforehand
but a lane change was not immediately
possible, the turn signal indicator may
activate automatically.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
lamps
#
Press button 1 .
The hazard warning lamps will switch on auto‐
matically if:
R
the airbag has been deployed.
Light and visibility
115
Cornering light
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illumi‐
nation of the roadway over a wide angle in the
turning direction, enabling better visibility on
tight bends, for example. It can be activated only
when the low beam is switched on.
The function is active in the following cases:
R
At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal indicator is switched on or the
steering wheel is turned
R
At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and
45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel
is turned
Traffic circle and intersection function: the
cornering light will be activated on both sides
based on an evaluation of the current GPS posi‐
tion of the vehicle. It will remain active until after
the vehicle has left the traffic circle or the inter‐
section.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐
nize the following road users:
R
Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
trians
R
Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
R
Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognize
them too late.
In these or similar situations, the automatic
high beam is not deactivated or is activated
despite the presence of other road users.
#
Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
R
In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R
If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐
tions.
116
Light and visibility
%
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available only in
vehicles with LED high performance head‐
lamps.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically
switches between the following types of light:
R
Low-beam headlamps
R
High-beam headlamps
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h):
R
If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
The high beam switches off automatically in the
following cases:
R
At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h).
R
If other road users are detected.
R
If street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds greater than approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h):
R
The headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐
lated automatically based on the distance to
other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
#
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
à position.
#
Switch on the high beam using the combina‐
tion switch.
When the high beam is switched on automat‐
ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on
the multifunction display comes on.
#
To switch off: switch off the high beam
using the combination switch.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay
time
Requirements:
R
The light switch is in the à position.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Light
5
Exterior Lighting Delay
#
Set the switch-off delay time.
The exterior lighting is activated for the set
time when the vehicle is parked.
Light and visibility
117
Switching the surround lighting on/off
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Light
5
Locator Lighting
When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior
lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle
is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur‐
round lighting is deactivated and the automatic
driving lights are activated.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1
p Front left reading lamp
2
| Automatic interior lighting control
3
c Front interior lighting
4
u Rear interior lighting
5
p Front right reading lamp
#
To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5
accordingly.
Control panel in the grab handle
1
p Rear passenger compartment reading
lamp
#
To switch on or off: press button 1.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Comfort
5
Ambient Lighting
Setting the color
#
Select Color.
#
Set the desired color.
118
Light and visibility
%
There are 64 colors available.
Adjusting the brightness
#
Select Brightness.
#
Adjust the brightness.
Activating the brightness for zones
#
Select Brightness.
#
Select Brightness Zones.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
The ACCENT, AMBIANCE and VENTS zones
can be set separately.
Activating multi-colored lighting
#
Select Color.
#
Select Multi-color.
There are ten preset color combinations
available.
#
Select a color combination.
Activating multi-colored animation
#
Select Color.
#
Select Multi-color Animation.
The chosen color combination will change at
predefined intervals.
Activating welcome lighting
#
Select Color.
#
Select Welcome.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi‐
ent lighting sequence will run.
Activating dependency on air conditioning
settings
#
Select Color.
#
Select Climate.
If changes are made to the temperature set‐
ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient
lighting will change briefly.
Switching the interior lighting switch-off
delay time on/off
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Light
5
Interior Lighting Delay
#
Switch the lighting switch-off delay time on
or off.
When this function is active, the interior light‐
ing is lit up for short time after the vehicle
has been locked.
Light and visibility
119
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system
Switching the windshield wipers on/off
1
g Windshield wipers off
2
Ä Automatic wiping, normal
3
Å Automatic wiping, frequent
4
° Continuous wiping, slow
5
¯ Continuous wiping, fast
#
Turn the combination switch to the correct
position 1 - 5.
#
Single wipe/washing: push the button on
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1.
R
í Single wipe
R
î Wipes with washer fluid
Changing the windshield wiper blades
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the windshield wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the
wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement
position
#
Switch the ignition on and switch off again
immediately.
#
Within around 15 seconds, press the î
button on the combination switch for approx‐
imately three seconds(/ page 120).
The wiper arms will move into the replace‐
ment position.
Removing the wiper blades
#
Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
shield.
120
Light and visibility
#
Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as
far as it will go.
#
Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
#
Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 4.
Installing the wiper blades
#
Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper
arm in the direction of arrow 1.
#
Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
#
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐
rectly.
#
Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐
shield.
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Press the î button on the combination
switch (/ page 120).
The wiper arms will move into the original
position.
#
Switch off the ignition.
Light and visibility
121
Maintenance display
#
Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐
nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐
led wiper blades.
If the color of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
%
The duration until the color changes varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgment of distances when using the
passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front-passenger
side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The
objects in view are in fact closer than they
appear.
As a result, you may misjudge the distance
between you and the road user driving
behind you, for example, when changing
lanes.
#
Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
der in order to ensure that you are
aware of the actual distance between
you and the road users driving behind
you.
122
Light and visibility
#
To fold in or out: briefly press button 2.
#
To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the
outside mirror to be adjusted.
#
Press button 4 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
%
If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
pletely discharged, you will have to reset the
outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic
mirror folding function work properly.
#
To adjust: briefly press button 2.
An outside mirror that has been pushed out of
position can be engaged in position again as fol‐
lows:
#
Vehicles without electrically folding out‐
side mirrors: Manually move the outside
mirror into the correct position.
#
Vehicles with electrically folding outside
mirrors: Press and hold button 2.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐
bly engage in position. The outside mirror will
now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
&
WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐
soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐
trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and
causes irritation. It must not come into con‐
tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs
or clothing or be swallowed.
#
If you come into contact with electro‐
lyte, observe the following:
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek
medical attention.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse
them thoroughly with clean water
and seek medical attention.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing
which has been contaminated with
electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
Light and visibility
123
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐
ror on the driver's side will automatically go into
anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the
sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits
The system will not go into anti-glare mode if:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
Reverse gear is engaged.
R
The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐
tion function
%
The parking position is available only in vehi‐
cles with a memory function.
The parking position makes parking easier.
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on
the front passenger's side when:
R
The parking position is stored (/ page 124).
R
The front-passenger mirror is selected.
R
Reverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
back to its original position when:
R
You shift the transmission to another trans‐
mission position.
R
You are traveling at a speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h).
R
You press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side.
Storing the parking position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
#
Press button 1 to select the front-
passenger outside mirror.
#
Engage reverse gear.
#
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 2.
124
Light and visibility
Calling up
#
Press button 1 to select the front-
passenger outside mirror.
#
Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
#
Switch Automatic Folding on or off.
Operating the sun visors
#
Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1
down.
#
Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to
the side.
Light and visibility
125
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control
An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐
filter in the engine compartment must always be
used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐
tion level monitoring and the air filtration work
correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed
correctly and the filter housing in the engine
compartment is closed correctly using the cap
and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use
filters recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the control panel for 3-zone
automatic climate control
The indicator lamps in the Ã, ¬, ¤,
g, Á and 0 buttons indicate that the
corresponding function is activated.
1
w Sets the temperature on the driver's
side
2
_ Sets the air distribution
3
H Sets the airflow or switches off climate
control
4
à Sets climate control to automatic
(/ page 127)
5
¬ Defrosts the windshield
6
¤ Switches the rear window heater
on/off
7
g Switches air-recirculation mode on/
off(/ page 128)
8
Á Switches the A/C function on/
off(/ page 126)
Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 128)
9
0 Activates/deactivates synchroniza‐
tion(/ page 128)
A
w Sets the temperature on the front
passenger side
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off
#
To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button.
#
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
the H button.
%
If climate control is switched off, the win‐
dows may fog up more quickly. Switch off
climate control only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on or off via the
control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
the vehicle's interior air.
#
Press the ¿Á button.
126
Climate control
Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other‐
wise, the windows may fog up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is
not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Calling up the air conditioning menu
Calling up the air conditioning menu using
the multimedia system
#
Select one of the temperature displays at the
lower edge of the media display.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
the multimedia system
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
the vehicle's interior air.
#
Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 127).
#
Select First Row of Seats.
#
Select A/C.
Depending on the previous status, the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐
trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply.
#
Press the à button.
#
To switch to manual mode: press the _
or à button.
In automatic mode, you can choose between five
different air quantities using the H button.
Automatic mode is retained.
Overview of air distribution settings
The symbols on the display indicate which vents
the airflow is being directed through:
¯
Defroster and side air vents
P
Center and side air vents
O
Footwell and side air vents
S
Center, side and footwell vents
a
Defroster, footwell and side air vents
_
All vents
b
Defroster, middle and side air vents
W
Automatic air distribution
Setting the air distribution
#
Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 127).
#
Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of
Seats.
#
To set the air distribution: select ¯,
P or O.
#
Set the airflow.
%
Several air distribution options can be selec‐
ted at the same time, for example to set the
temperature/air conditioning for the wind‐
shield and the footwells simultaneously.
The ¯ climate control for the windshield
can only be selected for the first seat row.
Climate control
127
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronization function via the control
panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The temperature and
air distribution settings for the driver's side are
adopted automatically for the front passenger
side.
#
Press the 0 button.
The synchronization function is deactivated if the
settings for one of the other climate zones are
changed.
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronization function using the multime‐
dia system
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The driver's settings
for temperature, air quantity and air distribution
are adopted automatically for all climate zones.
#
Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 127).
#
Select First Row of Seats.
#
Select SYNC.
Depending on the previous status, the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated.
Removing condensation from the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
#
Press the à button.
#
If the windows continue to fog up: press the
¬ button.
Windows fogged up on the outside
#
Switch on the windshield wipers.
#
Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
#
Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
fresh air mode after some time.
%
If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching the residual heat on/off (Canada)
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is parked.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐
ing the front compartment of the vehicle for
approximately 30 minutes, depending on the
temperature set.
#
To switch on: press the Á button.
Residual heat is switched off automatically.
128
Climate control
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
&
WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite
due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents.
#
Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to
the air vents.
#
If necessary, direct the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the
following:
R
Always keep the vents and the ventilation
grille in the vehicle interior free.
R
Keep the air inlet free of deposits
(/ page 391).
#
To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the
center and turn it to the left (open) or right
(closed) as far as it will go.
#
To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the center and move it up or down or to
the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
#
To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the
center and turn it to the left (open) or right
(closed) as far as it will go.
#
To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the center and move it up or down or to
the left or right.
Climate control
129
Driving
Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following topics in the
Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recog‐
nize dangers:
R
Emotion Start
R
AMG exhaust system
R
RACE START
R
DRIFT MODE
R
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
R
AMG steering-wheel buttons
Switching on the power supply or the igni‐
tion (without engine start)
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle".
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is in the vehicle and has been
recognized.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The brake pedal is not depressed.
130
Driving and parking
#
To switch on the power supply: press but‐
ton 1 once.
You can activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
R
You open the driver's door.
R
You press button 1 twice more.
#
To switch on the ignition: press button 1
twice.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the
following conditions is met:
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐
tion j or the electric parking brake is
applied.
R
You press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐
ton
&
DANGER Risk of death caused by
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐
mable material on the exhaust system
Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
mals or environmental influences may ignite
if they come into contact with hot parts of
the engine or exhaust system.
#
Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐
nized.
#
Shift the transmission to position j or i.
#
Depress the brake pedal and press button
1 once.
Driving and parking
131
#
If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
essential consumers and press button 1
once.
#
If the vehicle still does not start and the
Place the Key in the Marked Space See
Operator's Manual display message also
appears in the multifunction display: start
the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
%
You can switch off the engine while driving
by pressing button 1 for about three sec‐
onds or by pressing button 1 three times
within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
safety notes under "Driving tips"
(/ page 134).
Starting the vehicle with SmartKey in the
marked space (emergency operation mode)
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the
Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction display,
you can start the vehicle in emergency operation
mode.
Marked space (example with cup holder without
cover)
#
Open the cover of marked space 2 if neces‐
sary.
#
Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
#
Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring.
#
Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 on
the symbol 3.
The vehicle will start after a short time.
If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked
space 2 the engine continues running. For
further engine starts however, SmartKey 1
must be located in marked space 2 on sym‐
bol 3 during the entire journey.
#
Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start:
#
Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 and
leave it there.
#
Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐
cle using the start/stop button.
%
You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
132
Driving and parking
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐
ices
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before
commencing your journey
%
This function is not available in all countries.
If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the
previously selected air conditioning adjustment
is active.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
R
The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
R
It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
R
The fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
R
The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
%
You can also set the temperature with your
smartphone. Information on Mercedes me
connect and other services: https://
www.mercedes.me
This function is not available for all models.
Charging the battery before commencing
your journey
%
This function is not available in all countries.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a
message on your smartphone. You can then
start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge
the battery. The vehicle is automatically
switched off after ten minutes.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
R
The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
R
It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
R
The fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
&
WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐
ment due to unintentional starting of the
engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during
service or maintenance work.
#
Always secure the engine against unin‐
tentional starting before carrying out
maintenance or repair work.
Requirements:
R
Park position j is selected.
R
The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
R
The panic alarm is not activated.
R
The hazard warning lights are switched off.
R
The hood is closed.
R
The doors are closed and locked.
R
The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
#
Start the vehicle using the smartphone.
After every vehicle start, the engine runs for
ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐
tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star‐
ted once with the SmartKey before trying to
start the vehicle again with the smartphone. you
can stop the vehicle again at any time.
%
Further information can be found in the
smartphone app.
Driving and parking
133
Securing the engine against starting before
carrying out maintenance or repair work:
#
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
or
#
Unlock the doors.
or
#
Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Breaking-in notes
To preserve the engine during the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km):
R
Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
R
Drive the vehicle in drive program A
or ;.
R
Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐
est when the needle reaches the last third
before the red area in the tachometer.
R
Do not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake.
R
Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do
not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown).
R
Only increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
1,000 miles (1,500 km).
This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following breaking-in
notes:
R
In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐
tain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐
tem effectiveness is not reached until the
end of this teach-in process.
R
Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are
either new or have been replaced only ach‐
ieve optimum braking effect and grip after
several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐
pensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
134
Driving and parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable footwear
Operation of the pedals may be restricted
due to unsuitable footwear such as:
R
Shoes with platform soles
R
Shoes with high heels
R
Slippers
#
When driving always wear suitable
shoes in order to be able to operate the
pedals safely.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐
ing off the ignition when driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available. This may affect the power steering
system and the brake force boosting, for
example.
You will then need to use considerably more
force to steer and brake.
#
Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐
ing.
&
DANGER Risk of death caused by
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#
Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
cle. This is the case when the vehicle
becomes stuck in snow, for example.
#
Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
ning.
#
Open a window on the side of the vehi‐
cle facing away from the wind to ensure
an adequate supply of fresh air.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to being under the influence of alco‐
hol and drugs while driving
Driving when under the influence of alcohol
and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous
combination. Even small quantities of alcohol
or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception
and judgment.
Driving and parking
135
The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐
dent greatly increases if you drive when
under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
#
Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while
driving, and do not allow anyone to
drive who has been drinking alcohol or
taking drugs.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
when driving, the brake system may over‐
heat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
#
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
#
Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time
while driving.
*
NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
continuously depressing the brake pedal
#
Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐
uously whilst driving.
#
To use the braking effect of the engine,
shift to a lower gear in good time.
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
engine when pulling away
#
Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
ately.
#
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
*
NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is
misfiring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐
lytic converter.
#
Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
#
Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads
The braking effect is limited on salt-treated
roads.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
R
Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase
considerably or result in braking only on one
side
R
Maintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up:
R
Brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
journey
136
Driving and parking
Notes on hydroplaning
Hydroplaning can take place once a certain
amount of water has accumulated on the road
surface.
Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐
itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning
may occur:
R
Reduce speed
R
Avoid tire ruts
R
Avoid sudden steering movements
R
Brake carefully
%
Also observe the notes on regularly checking
wheels and tires (/ page 422).
Notes on driving through water on the road
surface
Water which has entered into the vehicle can
damage the engine, electrics and transmission.
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine
and cause engine damage.
Observe the following if you must drive through
water:
R
The water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body
R
Drive at walking pace at most, otherwise
water can enter the vehicle interior or engine
compartment
R
Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐
cles, can create waves which may exceed the
maximum permissible height of the water
The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after
fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function
The engine is switched off automatically in the
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
mission position h or i.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
If you switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐
sion position h or i, the engine will automati‐
cally stop in the following situations:
R
You stop behind a vehicle that is pulling
away.
R
You stop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐
cle in front of you.
R
You turn the steering wheel hard at a low
speed.
%
In transmission position k, the engine is
not switched off automatically even when
the HOLD function is switched on.
Driving and parking
137
The engine is restarted automatically if:
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission: In
transmission position h, you release the
brake pedal when the HOLD function is not
active.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You shift into transmission position h or
k.
R
You depress the accelerator pedal.
R
An automatic engine start is required by the
vehicle.
ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi‐
function display:
R
The è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was
switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
R
The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐
tions for an engine stop have been met.
R
Neither the è nor ç symbol appears
when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐
gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop
sign.
R
The èOFF symbol appears: the ECO
start/stop function is deactivated or there is
a malfunction.
%
If, in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor, the
engine should be switched off by the ECO
start/stop function, you have the following
options:
R
Switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐
sion position h or i.
R
You engage transmission position j.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.
The Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition
Off Before Exiting display message also appears
in the multifunction display. If you do not switch
off the ignition, the ignition is automatically
switched off after three minutes.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/
stop function
#
Press button 1.
A display appears in the instrument cluster
when switching the ECO start/stop function
off/on.
%
A continuous display appears in the instru‐
ment cluster while the ECO start/stop func‐
tion is deactivated.
138
Driving and parking
ECO display function
The ECO display summarizes your driving char‐
acteristics from the start of the journey to its
completion and assists you in achieving the
most economical driving style.
You can influence consumption if you:
R
Drive with particular care.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Drive in drive program ;.
R
Observe the gearshift recommendations.
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly,
the outer edge will light up and the segment will
fill up when the following driving style is adop‐
ted:
R
1 Steady speed
R
2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R
3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be gray, the
outer edge will be dark and the segment will
empty when the following driving style is adop‐
ted:
R
1 Fluctuations in speed
R
2 Heavy braking
R
3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have
driven economically:
R
The three segments will fill up completely at
the same time
R
The edge around all three segments will light
up
The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison with a driver with a
very sporty driving style will be shown in the
center of display 4. The range displayed does
not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
between the following drive programs:
=
(Individual): individual settings
C
(Sport): sporty driving style
A
(Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style
;
(Eco): particularly economical driving
style (vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion)
%
The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display of the on-board com‐
puter.
Driving and parking
139
Depending on the drive program, the following
systems change their characteristics:
R
Drive:
-
Engine and transmission management
-
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
ESP
®
R
Vehicles with adaptive damping adjust‐
ment: suspension
R
Electric power steering
Selecting the drive program
%
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle is
equipped with either a switch or a button.
#
Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards.
The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display.
#
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2.
The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in the
multifunction display.
#
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2 again.
The chosen drive program appears.
140
Driving and parking
Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia
system)
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
5
DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I
#
Select Individual Config..
#
Select and set a category.
Switching the reset display on/off
#
Switch Request at Start on or off.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started
a prompt appears asking whether the last active
drive program should be restored. If the ECO
start/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐
tional prompt appears asking if the function
should remain deactivated.
%
The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard
settings.
Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐
ted the A drive program is set automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐
matically.
%
This function must be activated for each user
profile separately. Only when this function is
activated will the drive program and Eco
start/stop setting for the previous journey
be saved for the respective user profile.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Info
#
Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Info
#
Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.
%
The actual (maximum) values that can be
achieved for engine output and engine tor‐
que may deviate from the certified values
within the country-specific guidelines for
permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No.
85 or country-specific guidelines).
Factors that can influence this are, for exam‐
ple:
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
%
The values displayed serve only as orienta‐
tion. The values for engine output and
engine torque shown in the media display
may deviate from the actual values.
Calling up fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Info
#
Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption is
displayed.
Driving and parking
141
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#
If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a
standstill, always depress the brake
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐
mission position. The current transmission posi‐
tion is displayed in the multifunction display.
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
142
Driving and parking
i
Neutral
h
Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display k is
shown in the multifunction display.
Engaging neutral N
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display i is
shown in the multifunction display.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will
allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic
transmission to remain in neutral i
i even if
the ignition is switched off or the driver's
door is opened:
#
Start the vehicle.
#
Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the vehicle is stationary.
#
Release the brake pedal.
#
Switch the ignition off.
%
If you then exit the vehicle leaving the
SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐
mission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P
#
Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 150).
#
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is
stationary.
#
When the vehicle is stationary, press button
j.
Park position is only engaged when the
transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display. If no transmission
position display j appears, secure the vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one
of the following conditions is met:
R
You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐
tion h or k.
R
You open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k.
%
To maneuver with an open driver's door,
open the driver's door while stationary and
engage transmission position h or k
again.
%
At very low outside temperatures below
approx. -4 °F (-20 °C), you may not be able
to shift the transmission from j to another
transmission position when the engine is
switched off. If this is the case, only change
the transmission position while the engine is
running.
Driving and parking
143
Engaging drive position D
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display h is
shown in the multifunction display.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐
sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐
cally. This depends, among other things, on the
following factors:
R
The selected drive program
R
The position of the accelerator pedal
R
The driving speed
Manual gearshifting
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#
Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
When the automatic transmission is shifted to
position h, you can manually shift it with the
steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the
automatic transmission shifts to a higher or
lower gear depending on the steering wheel
gearshift paddle being pulled.
You have two options to manually shift the auto‐
matic transmission:
R
Temporary setting
R
Permanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual gear‐
shifting is deactivated.
Temporary setting:
#
To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1 or 2.
Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
time. Transmission position p and the cur‐
rent gear appear in the multifunction display.
%
How long the manual gearshifting stays acti‐
vated is dependent on various factors. Man‐
ual shifting can be deactivated automatically
when changing the drive program, restarting
the vehicle when the transmission position is
engaged again h or due to the driving style.
#
To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2.
#
To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1.
If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear‐
shift paddle 1, the transmission shifts to
the lowest possible gear.
144
Driving and parking
#
To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2 and hold it in place.
The transmission position h appears in the
multifunction display.
Permanent setting:
#
Change to drive program =(/ page 140).
#
Select drive setting p (/ page 141).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
Gearshift recommendation
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
#
If gearshift recommendation message 1 is
shown on the multifunction display, shift to
the recommended gear.
Using kickdown
#
Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the next
gear when the maximum engine speed is
reached to protect the engine from overrevving.
Glide mode function
With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode
helps you to reduce fuel consumption.
Glide mode is characterized by the following:
R
The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
R
The transmission position h is displayed in
green in the multifunction display.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐
tions are met:
R
Drive program ; is selected.
R
The speed is within a suitable range.
R
The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
R
You do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
%
Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the
drive program =.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Driving and parking
145
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is
not available.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐
ing parameters:
R
Incline
R
Downhill gradient
R
Temperature
R
Height
R
Speed
R
Operating status of the engine
R
Traffic situation
%
Glide mode can be ended by pressing a
steering wheel gearshift paddle
(/ page 144).
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The transmission has a faulty gearshift.
The transmission is losing oil.
146
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
#
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration characteristics are
deteriorating.
The transmission no longer shifts gear.
The transmission is in emergency operation mode.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Switch the transmission to position j.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
#
Switch the transmission to position h.
#
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Function of 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven
when needed. Together with ESP
®
and 4ETS,
4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle
whenever a driven wheel spins due to insuffi‐
cient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐
ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐
cially for maintaining a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in lane.
%
In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#
Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided.
Driving and parking
147
#
Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while
refueling the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
#
Keep children away from fuel.
#
Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#
Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
#
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&
WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due
to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can create sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapors.
#
Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic vehicle body.
This discharges any electrostatic charge
that may have built up.
#
Do not get into the vehicle again during
the refueling process.
Otherwise, electrostatic charge can
build up again.
*
NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#
The RON requirement is located in the
fuel filler flap.
#
Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your
vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Never refuel using any of the following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
148
Driving and parking
*
NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐
cles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the
wrong fuel:
R
Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
*
NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
by overfilled fuel tanks
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
If you have added too much fuel because of a
defective filling pump, for instance:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*
NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
Requirements
R
The vehicle is unlocked (/ page 66).
%
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
1
Fuel filler flap
2
Bracket for fuel filler cap
3
Fuel type
4
Tire pressure table
5
QR code for rescue card
#
Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
#
Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Driving and parking
149
#
Insert the fuel filler cap from above into
bracket 2.
#
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
#
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#
Close fuel filler flap 1.
%
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
Parking
Parking the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐
cle rolling away.
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled
way even at a slight downhill gradient.
#
Ensure that the parked vehicle is always
properly secured against rolling away as
follows:
R
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn
the front wheels so that the vehicle
rolls towards the curb if it starts
moving.
R
Apply the parking brake.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: shift the transmission to posi‐
tion j.
R
Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first 1 or reverse gear k.
&
WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow.
#
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
#
In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
150
Driving and parking
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it
rolling away
#
Always secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing away.
#
Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying
the brake pedal.
#
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front
wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the
curb if it starts moving.
#
Apply the electric parking brake.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Engage transmission position j in a station‐
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
(/ page 143).
#
Switch off the engine and the ignition by
pressing button 1.
#
Release the service brake slowly.
#
Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
%
When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic
sliding sunroof for approximately five
minutes if the driver's door is closed.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
&
DANGER Risk of death caused by
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
Driving and parking
151
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of injury when opening
or closing a door with the garage door
opener
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, people in
the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or struck by the door.
#
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
is within the range of movement of the
door.
Only operate the following doors using the
garage door opener:
R
Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐
ture.
R
Doors which conform to the current U.S.
safety standards.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of
the door.
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The ignition is switched on.
%
The garage door opener function is always
available when the ignition is switched on.
#
Check if the transmission frequency of the
remote control has the frequency range of
280 to 868 MHz.
Radio equipment approval number:
R
NZLMUAHL5 (USA)
R
4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
#
Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
%
It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐
cator lamp flashes yellow.
#
Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
#
Point remote control 5 from a distance of
0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button
1, 2 or 3.
#
Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until one of the following signals appears:
R
Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐
uously. Programming is complete.
R
Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
152
Driving and parking
synchronization of the rolling code with
the door system must also be carried out.
#
If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
#
Release all of the buttons.
%
The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the
garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements:
R
The door system uses a rolling code.
R
The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive.
R
The vehicle as well as persons and objects,
are located outside the range of movement
of the door.
#
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
#
Press previously programmed button 1, 2
or 3 repeatedly until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com‐
plete.
%
Please also read the operating instructions
for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the
remote control
#
Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
#
Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
#
Hold remote control 5 at various angles
from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in
(8 cm) in front of the inside rearview mirror.
You should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Driving and parking
153
#
Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
at various distances in front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
#
Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6 on
remote control 5 again before transmission
ends.
#
Align the antenna line of the door opener unit
with the remote control.
%
Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
R
On the toll free HomeLink
®
Hotline on
1-800-355-3515.
R
On the Internet at https://
www.homelink.com/mercedes.
Opening or closing the door
Requirements:
R
The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
#
Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until
the door opens or closes.
#
If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
the previously pressed button again until the
door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory
#
Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
#
If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3.
The entire memory has been deleted.
Radio equipment approval numbers for the
garage door opener
154
Driving and parking
Radio equipment approval numbers
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐
ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas
operando em caráter primário.
Para maiores informações acessar
www.anatel.gov.br
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio type approval number
EgyptTAC.2511151293.WIR
Andorra CE
Australia R-NZ
Barbados MED1578
Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74
European
Union
CE
GibraltarCE
Iceland CE
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/299
CanadaIC: 4112A-MUAHL5
Kuwait CE
Liechten‐
stein
CE
CountryRadio type approval number
Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448
Monaco CE
New Zea‐
land
R-NZ
NorwayCE
Russian
Federa‐
tion
Not required
Saudi Ara‐
bia
TA 10525
Switzer‐
land
CE
South
Africa
TA-2015/1386
Turkey Not required
Driving and parking
155
Country Radio type approval number
United
Arab Emi‐
rates
ER41849/15
Dealer No: DA35176/14
United
States
FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(/ page 26).
Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake function (applying
automatically)
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐
mission is in position j and one of the follow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
%
To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also applied:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill.
R
The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐
tionary.
156
Driving and parking
R
Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of the following conditions
is also fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
R
There is a system malfunction.
R
The power supply is insufficient.
R
The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
appears in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing
automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
The engine is running.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you
shift from transmission position j to h or
k when on level ground with the driver's
door closed.
R
If the transmission is in position k, the
trunk lid must be closed.
R
The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the seat
belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt
buckle of the driver's seat, the following condi‐
tions must be fulfilled:
R
You shift from transmission position j.
R
You have previously driven at speeds greater
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the electric parking brake is released, the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking
brake manually
Applying
Driving and parking
157
#
Push handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐
tor lamp appears in the instrument cluster.
%
The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐
ously.
Releasing
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Pull handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐
tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking
#
Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please
Release Parking Brake message is displayed.
When the vehicle has been braked to a
standstill, the electric parking brake is
applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐
ada) indicator lamp appears in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Information on detecting damage on a
parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away
alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will
receive a notification in the multimedia system
when you switch on the ignition.
You will receive information about the following
points:
R
The area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged.
R
The force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent
activation:
R
The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
story garage.
%
Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to
prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐
vate the tow-away alarm, damage detection
will also be deactivated.
%
In the case of severe battery discharging,
the function for detecting damage on a
parked vehicle is automatically deactivated
to facilitate the next engine start.
System limits
Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐
uations:
R
The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is
damaged by a key.
R
Impact occurs at low speed.
R
The electric parking brake is not applied.
Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended
period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐
aged by heavy discharging.
%
Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
158
Driving and parking
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐
tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function
%
This function is not available for all models.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be
minimized during extended periods of non-oper‐
ation.
Standby mode is characterized by the following:
R
the starter battery is preserved.
R
the maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display.
R
the connection to online services is interrup‐
ted.
R
the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail‐
able.
R
the interior motion sensor and tow-away
alarm functions are not available.
R
the function for detecting damage on a
parked vehicle is not available.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
multimedia system:
R
the engine is switched off.
R
the ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐
tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can‐
not be guaranteed that the starter battery will
reliably start the engine.
The starter battery must be charged first in the
following situations:
R
The vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended.
R
The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby
Mode message appears in the media display.
%
Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐
ing the vehicle for an extended period)
Requirements:
R
The engine is switched off.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
#
Switch Standby Mode on or off.
When you activate the function, a prompt
appears.
#
Select Yes.
Standby mode is activated.
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐
vering the vehicle. The driving systems are aids
and do not relieve you of your responsibility per‐
taining to road traffic law. Pay attention to the
traffic conditions at all times and intervene
when necessary. Be aware of the limitations
regarding the safe use of these systems.
Information on radar and ultrasonic sensors
Some driving and driving safety systems use
radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area
Driving and parking
159
in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depend‐
ing on the vehicle's equipment).
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers
and/or behind the radiator grill. The ultrasonic
sensors are located in the front and rear bump‐
ers. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush
(/ page 397). The sensors must not be cov‐
ered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging
loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against
stone chipping. Additional license plate bracket
can likewise impair the function of the ultrasonic
sensors. In the event of damage to the bumpers
or radiator grill, or following a collision impacting
the bumpers or radiator grill, have the function
of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. If the sensors are damaged, some
driving systems and driving safety systems may
no longer function properly.
Overview of driving systems and driving
safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving systems and driving safety
systems:
R
360° Camera (/ page 195)
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/ page 161)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 172)
R
Active Brake Assist (/ page 164)
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 211)
R
Start-off assist (/ page 186)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 204)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 161)
R
Hill Start Assist (/ page 185)
R
Suspension with adaptive damping adjust‐
ment (/ page 187)
R
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 164)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 161)
R
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist (/ page 164)
R
Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 176)
R
HOLD function (/ page 185)
R
STEER CONTROL (/ page 164)
R
Active Steering Assist with rescue lane func‐
tion (/ page 179)
R
Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 182)
R
Active Parking Assist (/ page 198)
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 187)
R
Rear view camera (/ page 192)
R
Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 181)
R
Cruise control (/ page 170)
R
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
with exit warning (/ page 208)
R
Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 206)
160
Driving and parking
Function of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the
brake pressure in critical driving situations:
R
During braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are
prevented from locking.
R
Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
System limits
R
ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph
(8 km/h).
R
ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yel‐
low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐
uously in the instrument cluster after the
engine is started.
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
&
WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐
tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
#
Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS
prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS supports your emergency braking situation
with additional brake force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
R
BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐
sure.
R
BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram)
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is
malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry
out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other
driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
cannot carry
out vehicle stabilization.
#
ESP
®
should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
Driving and parking
161
ESP
®
can monitor and improve driving stability
and traction in the following situations, within
physical limits:
R
When pulling away on wet or slippery road‐
way.
R
When braking.
R
In strong side winds when you are driving
faster than 47 mph (75 km/h).
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired
by the driver, ESP
®
can stabilize the vehicle by
intervening in the following ways:
R
One or more wheels are braked.
R
The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å ESP
®
OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster.
Observe the following points when ESP
®
is deac‐
tivated:
R
Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R
Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
R
The drive wheels could spin.
R
ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
%
When ESP
®
is deactivated, you are still assis‐
ted by ESP
®
when braking.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp flashes in the
instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels
has reached its grip limit:
R
Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
R
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum‐
stances.
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the follow‐
ing situations:
R
When using snow chains.
R
In deep snow.
R
On sand or gravel.
%
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up continu‐
ously, ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information:
R
Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 515)
R
Display messages (/ page 468)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
and
makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on
a slippery roadway.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
intervening in the following ways:
R
The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin.
R
More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP
®
The drive programs enable ESP
®
to adapt to dif‐
ferent weather and road conditions as well as
the driver's preferred driving style. You can
select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch (/ page 140).
162
Driving and parking
ESP
®
characteristics per drive program
Drive program
ESP
®
mode
Characteristics
A (Comfort)
; (Economy)
ESP
®
Comfort
These drive programs provide the ideal balance
between traction and stability.
Select drive program ; or A in difficult
road conditions, such as snow or ice, or when
the road is wet from rain.
C (Sport)
ESP
®
Sport
This drive program continues to offer stability
but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐
siastic driver a more active driving style.
Select drive program C in good road condi‐
tions, for example on dry roads and clear
stretches of road.
Activating/deactivating ESP
®
(Electronic Sta‐
bility Program)
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Quick Access
%
ESP
®
can only be activated/deactivated
using quick access when at least one other
function is available in quick access. ESP
®
can otherwise be found in the Assistance
menu.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
#
Select ESP.
A prompt appears.
#
Select On or å Off.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å ESP
®
OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster.
Observe the information on warning lamps and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster.
Driving and parking
163
Function of ESP
®
Crosswind Assist
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐
cle in the lane:
R
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h)
and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving
straight ahead or cornering slightly.
R
The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐
ual brake application on one side.
Function of EBD (electronic brake force dis‐
tribution)
EBD is characterized by the following:
R
Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels.
R
Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in
the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering recommendation is given particu‐
larly in the following situations:
R
Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake
R
The vehicle starts to skid
System limits
STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
R
The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electric power steering.
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of the following
functions:
R
Distance warning function
R
Autonomous braking function
R
Situation-dependent braking assistance
R
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assist
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or
pedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a colli‐
sion.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐
tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE
®
: depending on the
country, an additional haptic warning occurs in
the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the
seat belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
164
Driving and parking
In especially critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.
In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone
occur simultaneously with the braking applica‐
tion.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐
imum full-stop braking if necessary.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
braking assistance has occurred, display 1
appears in the multifunction display and then
automatically goes out after a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
additional preventive measures for occupant
protection (PRE-SAFE
®
) may also be initiated.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
R
Give a warning or brake without reason
R
Not give a warning or not brake
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only
an aid. The driver is responsible for
maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for
braking in good time.
#
Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
essary.
%
If the system is unavailable, the æ display
appears in the multifunction display.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in
the following speed ranges:
The distance warning function issues a warning
in the following situations:
R
From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or
pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent
warning tone and the L distance warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE
®
: depending on
the country, an additional haptic warning
occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐
sioning of the seat belt.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐
ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation
allows this.
Driving and parking
165
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles
traveling in
front
Stationary
vehicles
Crossing
vehicles
Moving
pedestrians
Stationary
pedestrians
Crossing
cyclists
Cyclists travel‐
ing in front
Stationary
cyclists
Vehicles
without Driv‐
ing Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx.
37 mph
(60 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction
Vehicles with
Driving Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx.
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
166
Driving and parking
The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles
traveling in
front
Stationary
vehicles
Crossing
vehicles
Moving
pedestrians
Stationary
pedestrians
Crossing
cyclists
Cyclists travel‐
ing in front
Stationary
cyclists
Vehicles
without Driv‐
ing Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
124 mph
(200 km/h)
Up to approx.
31 mph
(50 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx.
37 mph
(60 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx.
37 mph
(60 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction
Vehicles with
Driving Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx.
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Driving and parking
167
Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles
traveling in
front
Stationary
vehicles
Crossing
vehicles
Moving
pedestrians
Stationary
pedestrians
Crossing
cyclists
Cyclists travel‐
ing in front
Stationary
cyclists
Vehicles
without Driv‐
ing Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx.
37 mph
(60 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx.
37 mph
(60 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction
Vehicles with
Driving Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx.
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx.
50 mph
(80 km/h)
Up to approx.
43 mph
(70 km/h)
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake
Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
R
Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown.
R
Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐
cation when one of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
R
You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R
There is no longer a risk of collision.
R
An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with
Driving Assistance Package)
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐
teristics:
R
The ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians.
R
Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving maneuver.
168
Driving and parking
R
Activation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving maneuver.
R
Assistance during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle.
R
Reaction from a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐
imately 43 mph (70 km/h).
You can prevent the assistance at any time by
actively steering.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident despite
Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In addition, the steering support of Evasive
Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to
avoid a collision.
In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:
R
give an unnecessary warning or provide
assistance
R
not give a warning or not provide assis‐
tance
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
Steering Assist alone.
#
Be ready to brake and take evasive
action if necessary.
#
Prevent the assistance by actively
steering in non-critical driving situa‐
tions.
#
Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐
trians are close to the path of your vehi‐
cle.
System limits
Full system performance is not available for a
few seconds after switching on the ignition or
after driving off.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambient light.
R
If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered.
R
If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong
radar reflections in parking garages.
R
If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed.
R
In complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified.
R
If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
the sensor detection range.
R
If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
R
If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background.
R
If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects.
R
On bends with a tight radius.
%
The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐
matically while a certain distance is being
driven after the vehicle has been delivered.
Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only
partially available during this teach-in period.
Driving and parking
169
Setting Active Brake Assist
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Active Brake Assist
The following settings are available:
R
Early
R
Medium
R
Late
#
Select a setting.
The setting is retained when the engine is
next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist
%
It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.
#
Select Off.
The distance warning function, the autono‐
mous braking function and the Evasive Steer‐
ing Assist are deactivated.
When the vehicle is next started, the middle
setting is automatically selected.
%
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the status bar of the
multifunction display.
Speed control cruise control
Function of cruise control
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
selected by the driver.
If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to the stored speed.
Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐
ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any
speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maxi‐
mum speed.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Cruise control is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: Cruise control is
available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph
(250 km/h).
Displays in the multifunction display
The status of cruise control and the stored
speed are shown in the multifunction display.
1
Cruise control is selected
2
Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated
3
Speed is saved, cruise control is activated
170
Driving and parking
%
The segments between the stored speed and
the end of the segment display light up in
the speedometer.
System limits
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐
ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
ing and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
tions:
R
In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
winding roads.
R
On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle could then skid.
R
If you are driving when visibility is poor.
Operating cruise control
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
decelerates.
#
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements:
R
ESP
®
must be activated, but not intervening.
R
The driven speed is at least 15 mph
(20 km/h).
R
The transmission is in position h.
#
To activate cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 up.
#
To activate cruise control: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-).
The current speed is stored and maintained
by the vehicle.
or
Driving and parking
171
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (RES).
The last stored speed is called up and main‐
tained by the vehicle.
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the currently driven speed is stored.
%
When you switch off the vehicle, the last
speed stored is cleared.
#
To increase/reduce speed: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the
pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5 mph (10 km/h).
or
#
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+).
If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign
Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with
a maximum permissible speed and this is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster, you can choose
between the following options:
#
To adopt the detected speed: press rocker
switch 3 up (RES).
The maximum permissible speed shown by
the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle
maintains this speed.
#
To deactivate cruise control: press rocker
switch 3 down (CNCL).
#
To switch off cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 down.
%
If you brake, deactivate ESP
®
or if ESP
®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in
front are detected, the set distance is main‐
tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a
halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐
ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and
the set speed. The speed and distance to the
vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering
wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance
Package, in the range between 15 mph
(20 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h) and, on
172
Driving and parking
vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, in
the range between 15 mph (20 km/h) and
130 mph (210 km/h).
Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
R
Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel efficient, com‐
fortable or dynamic) (/ page 139)
R
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
motorcycles)
R
Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to
change to the overtaking lane
R
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictions
into account on highways or on multi-lane
roads with separate roadways (country-
dependent)
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐
ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle has
been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, sepa‐
rate roadways by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi‐
cle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If
a critical situation is detected when driving off, a
visual and acoustic warning is given indicating
that the driver must now take control of the vehi‐
cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis‐
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed
and for braking in good time.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambient light.
R
The windshield in the area of the camera is
dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
R
If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R
In parking garages or on roads with steep
uphill or downhill gradients.
R
If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐
erating can cause one or several wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐
ation or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
R
If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
R
If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the
currently driven speed.
R
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
Driving and parking
173
#
Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning.
#
In these cases, adjust your speed and
keep a sufficient distance.
#
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
R
when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes
R
to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
R
to complex traffic conditions
R
to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations.
#
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been started.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
R
ESP
®
is activated and is not intervening.
R
The transmission is in position h.
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed.
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being
used to park the vehicle or to exit from a
parking space.
R
The vehicle does not skid.
174
Driving and parking
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
#
Press button 1.
Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
#
To activate without a stored speed: press
rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-),
or press rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The current speed is stored and maintained
by the vehicle.
or
#
To activate with a stored speed: press
rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
%
By pressing rocker switch 4 up again, the
speed limitation shown in the instrument
cluster will be adopted by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or variable limiter.
#
To accept the displayed speed restriction
when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
is active: press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
The speed limit displayed in the instrument
cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The
vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle
in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Accepting the displayed speed restriction
when Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted
#
Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
The speed limit displayed in the instrument
cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The
vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle
in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
#
Remove your foot from the brake pedal and
activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
#
Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
or
#
Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Driving and parking
175
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being
activated when you leave the driver's
seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
#
Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away
before you leave the driver's seat.
#
Press rocker switch 4 down (CNCL).
%
If you brake, deactivate ESP
®
or if ESP
®
intervenes, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Increasing or reducing the speed
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point and hold.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5 mph (10 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) and hold beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 5 mph (10 km/h).
Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐
tance from the vehicle in front
#
Press rocker switch 2 up or down.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
If a change in the speed limit is detected and
automatic adoption of speed limits is activated,
the new speed is automatically adopted as the
stored speed (/ page 207).
176
Driving and parking
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is
level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the
case of signs indicating entry into an urban area,
the speed is adapted according to the speed
permitted within the urban area. The speed limit
display in the Instrument Display is always upda‐
ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited
stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom‐
mended speed is automatically adopted as the
stored speed. The system uses the speed stored
on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom‐
mended speed. If you do not alter the stored
speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec‐
ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h).
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been
put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐
tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher
than the set speed are adopted.
Active Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. The
driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and
for braking in good time. The maximum permissi‐
ble speed also depends on factors such as the
road surface and traffic conditions.
System limits
Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain
time or due to weather conditions) cannot be
properly detected by the system. The maximum
permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a
trailer is not detected by the system. In these sit‐
uations you must adjust your speed yourself.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's
speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit
Assist may be too high or incorrect in some
individual cases, such as:
R
In the wet or in fog
R
When towing a trailer
#
Ensure that the driven speed complies
with traffic regulations.
#
Adjust the driving speed to suit current
traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐
vated, the vehicle speed will be adjusted accord‐
ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on
the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐
ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐
fortable or dynamic manner. When the route
event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates
again to the stored speed. The set distance to
the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and
speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.
Route-based speed adaptation can be config‐
ured in the multimedia system (/ page 178).
The following route events are taken into
account:
R
Bends
R
T-intersections, traffic circles and toll sta‐
tions
R
Turns and exits
Driving and parking
177
%
When the toll station is reached, Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as
the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐
cator to change lanes is switched on and one of
the following situations is detected:
R
Turning off at intersections
R
Driving on slowing-down lanes
R
Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right
speed and observing other road users. This
applies in particular to intersections, traffic cir‐
cles and traffic lights, as route-based speed
adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐
still.
When route guidance is active, the first speed
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the
turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected
route is confirmed and further speed adjustment
is activated.
Speed adjustment is canceled in the following
cases:
R
If the turn signal indicator is switched off
before the route event.
R
If the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits
Route-based speed adaptation does not take
right of way regulations into account. The driver
is responsible for complying with road traffic
regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
In difficult conditions, for example unclear roads,
lane narrowing, wet road surfaces, snow or ice,
or when driving with a trailer, the speed adjust‐
ment made by the system may not always be
suitable. In these situations the driver must
intervene accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
route-based speed adjustment
Route-based speed adjustment might mal‐
function or be temporarily unavailable in the
following situations:
R
If the driver does not follow the calcula‐
ted route
R
If map data is not up to date or available
R
In road construction areas
R
In bad weather or road conditions
R
If the accelerator pedal is depressed
R
In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
#
Adjust the speed to the traffic situation.
Setting route-based speed adaptation
Requirements:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
178
Driving and parking
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Route-based Speed
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
When the function is active, the vehicle
speed is adjusted depending on the route
events ahead.
%
Further information on the route-based
speed adaptation (/ page 177).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps
you to stay in the center of the lane by means of
moderate steering interventions. Depending on
the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the
vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐
ence.
%
Depending on the country, in the lower
speed range Active Steering Assist can use
the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐
essary, Active Steering Assist can then also
provide assistance when driving away from
the center of the lane to form a rescue lane,
for example.
When the system is actively steering, the à
symbol is shown in green in the multifunction
display.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist
switches to passive mode. The system provides
no support in this case. During the transition
from active to passive status, the à symbol is
shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the sys‐
tem is passive, the à symbol is shown as
gray in the multifunction display.
Steering and touch detection
The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐
vene at any time to correct the course of the
vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must
expect a change from active to passive mode or
vice versa at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
time or has removed their hands from the steer‐
ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐
play 1 appears in the multifunction display. If
the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or
gives no confirmation to the system, a warning
tone sounds in addition to the visual warning
message.
The warning is not issued, or is stopped, when
the driver gives confirmation to the system:
R
The driver steers the vehicle.
Driving and parking
179
R
The driver presses a steering wheel button or
operates Touch Control.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual warning is
issued and a warning tone sounds.
Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane. Before changing lanes,
the driver must make sure that the neighboring
lane is free (glance over the shoulder).
System limits
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the
steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the
vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following instances:
R
There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient
light or strong shadows on the roadway.
R
There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R
Insufficient road illumination.
R
The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
by a sticker.
R
No, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, or the markings change
quickly, e.g. in a construction area or inter‐
sections.
R
The lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R
The distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.
R
The road is narrow and winding.
R
There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the
following conditions:
R
On tight bends and when turning.
R
When crossing intersections.
R
At traffic circles or toll stations.
R
When actively changing lane without switch‐
ing on the turn signal indicator.
R
When the tire pressure is too low.
Depending on the selected vehicle settings,
Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Observe the status display of Active Steering
Assist in the multifunction display
(/ page 183).
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist
are reached there is no guarantee that the
system will remain active or will keep the
vehicle in lane.
#
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
#
Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐
tion to traffic conditions.
180
Driving and parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
A malfunction in the detection of lane mark‐
ings and objects can occur.
This could cause unexpected steering inter‐
vention.
#
Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering
Assist
Requirements:
R
ESP
®
is activated, but is not intervening.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Quick Access
#
Select a Steering Assist.
Function of Active Lane Change Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver
when changing lanes by applying steering torque
if the driver operates a turn signal indicator.
Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all
the following conditions are met:
R
You are driving on a freeway or road with
multiple lanes in the direction of travel.
R
The neighboring lane is separated by a bro‐
ken lane marking.
R
No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane.
R
The driven speed is between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).
R
Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in
the multimedia system.
R
Active Steering Assist is switched on and
active.
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
a lane change is permitted, the lane change
begins after the driver has activated the turn sig‐
nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a
green arrow 2 next to the steering wheel sym‐
bol. The Lane Change to the Left message also
appears, for example. If Active Lane Change
Assist has been activated with the turn signal
indicator but a lane change is not immediately
possible, a gray arrow 1 appears next to the
steering wheel symbol, which remains green.
When the lane change assistance starts, the turn
signal indicator is automatically activated along
with the display in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
181
If the assistance graphic is shown when chang‐
ing lanes, the lane change display appears with
an additional arrow pointing towards the adja‐
cent lane (/ page 183).
If a lane change is not possible, the arrow fades
out after a few seconds and a new lane change
must be initiated. An immediate lane change is
only possible on freeway sections without speed
limits.
If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change
Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the
Lane Change Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display and a warning tone sounds.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from chang‐
ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always detect
clearly if the adjacent lane is free.
The lane change might be initiated although
the adjacent lane is not free.
#
Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighboring lane is free and there is
no danger to other road users.
#
Monitor the lane change.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Lane
Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change
Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐
antee that the system will remain active.
Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you
by applying steering torques.
#
Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on the steering wheel.
Observe the traffic conditions and steer
and/or brake if necessary.
System limits
The system limitations of Active Steering Assist
apply to Active Lane Change Assist
(/ page 179).
The system may also be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
R
The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,
damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and
snow, for example.
R
The exterior lighting shows a fault.
%
The Active Lane Change Assist sensors
adjust automatically while a certain distance
is being driven after the vehicle has been
delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is
unavailable or only partially available during
this teach-in process; no arrow appears next
to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol
when the turn signal indicator is activated.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change
Assist
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Active Lane Change Assist
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the driver continually ignores the visual or
acoustic warning to put their hands on the steer‐
182
Driving and parking
ing wheel, the Beginning Emergency Stop mes‐
sage appears in the multifunction display. If the
driver still does not respond, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehi‐
cle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.
Depending on the country, at speeds below
40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights
switch on automatically.
When the vehicle is stationary, the following
actions are carried out:
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended
R
The vehicle is unlocked
R
If possible, an emergency call is placed to
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any
time by performing one of the following actions:
R
Steering
R
Braking or accelerating
R
Pressing a steering-wheel button
R
Operating Touch Control
R
Activating or deactivating Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Overview of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus‐
ter
The assistance graphic and the status display
show the status of the following functions in the
instrument cluster:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Route-based speed adaptation
R
Active Steering Assist
Assistant display
1
Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event
2
Vehicle in front
3
Distance indicator
4
Set specified distance
5
Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis‐
play
Driving and parking
183
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis‐
play and route-based speed adaptation
1
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected,
set specified distance (number of segments
below the vehicle)
2
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva‐
ted, speed stored
3
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, no vehicle detected (bright
vehicle symbol)
4
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi‐
cle symbol)
5
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and route-
based speed adaptation active, speed stored
%
On highways or high-speed major roads, the
green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐
cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
%
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond
the setting of the Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐
sive mode. The ç Suspended message
appears in the multifunction display.
Speedometer
The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐
eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the
speed adjustment is less than the stored speed
due to the route event ahead, the segments in
the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐
tions to the speed due to manual or automatic
adoption of the speed limit, are displayed in the
control feedback of the multifunction display on
a single line.
Active Steering Assist status display
1
Gray steering wheel: Active Steering Assist
switched on and passive
2
Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assist
switched on and active
3
Flashing steering wheel: prompt to the driver
to actively confirm or transition from active
to passive status, system limits detected
During the transition from active to passive sta‐
tus, symbol 3 is shown as enlarged and flash‐
184
Driving and parking
ing. Once the system is passive, symbol 1 is
shown as gray in the multifunction display.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short
time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in position h or k.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll
away.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it can roll away.
#
Therefore, swiftly move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐
bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains
with the driver.
System limits
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a sufficient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
R
The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being activated when you
leave the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD
function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle
can roll away in the following situations:
R
If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply.
R
If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
#
Always deactivate the HOLD function
and secure the vehicle against rolling
away before leaving the vehicle.
Driving and parking
185
*
NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched
on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐
tain situations:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
HOLD function
R
Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit‐
uations:
#
During towing
#
In a car wash
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is stationary.
R
The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
R
The engine is running or has been automati‐
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐
vated.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in position h, k or i
Activating the HOLD function
#
Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time quickly depress further until the ë
display appears in the multifunction display.
#
Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
#
Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
#
Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐
play disappears from the multifunction dis‐
play.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐
ing situations:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is switched to position j.
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
transmission position j and/or by the electric
parking brake:
R
The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened.
R
The vehicle is switched off.
R
There is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
Start-off assist
Function of start-off assist
Start-off assist enables optimal vehicle accelera‐
tion from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-
grip road surface is required, the tires and vehi‐
cle must also be in good condition.
Do not activate start-off assist on public roads.
Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐
tion on ESP
®
(/ page 161).
186
Driving and parking
Activating the start-off assist
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and having
an accident from wheels spinning
When you use start-off assist, individual
wheels could spin and you could lose control
of the vehicle.
If ESP
®
is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐
ding and accident!
#
Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
#
Deactivating ESP
®
(/ page 163).
#
Move the steering wheel to the straight-
ahead position.
#
Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left
foot and keep it depressed.
#
Engage the h drive position (/ page 144).
#
Select the sportiest available drive program
B or C(/ page 140).
#
Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
#
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐
tion.
#
Switch on ESP
®
once the acceleration proce‐
dure is complete. ESP
®
will otherwise not be
able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Canceling start-off assist
#
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
#
Reactivate the ESP
®
.
Function of adaptive damping adjustment
Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment
continuously adjusts the characteristics of the
suspension dampers to the current operating
and driving conditions.
The damping is set individually for each wheel
and is affected by the following factors:
R
The road surface conditions
R
Vehicle load
R
The drive program selected
R
The driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking assistance system with ultrasound. It
monitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐
tiple sensors 1 on the front bumper and on the
rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows
you the distance between your vehicle and a
detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Driving and parking
187
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐
ing and parking remains with you. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in/exiting parking spaces.
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning
tone sounds from a distance of approximately
1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A
continuous warning tone sounds from a distance
of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn
Early All Around setting in the multimedia sys‐
tem, the warning tones for front and side impact
protection can be set to sound at a greater dis‐
tance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and
2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 192).
%
The Warn Early All Around setting is always
active in the rear of the vehicle.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
Active Parking Assist is unavailable.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the
multimedia system
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a
360° Camera
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360°
Camera
If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an
obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a
pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The color of the individual segments of the warn‐
ing display is based on the distance to the detec‐
ted obstacle:
R
Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft
(1.0 m)
188
Driving and parking
R
Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft
(0.6 m)
R
Red segments: obstacles at a very short
distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less
Display of Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
in the Head-up Display
Optionally, obstacles detected by Active Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.0 ft
(0.6 m) on the sides 3 can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐
rily take into account the following obstacles:
R
Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects.
R
Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of trucks.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Vehicles without 360° Camera
Vehicles with 360° Camera
Driving and parking
189
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Rear segments 1 or all-round seg‐
ments 2 light up red. The é sym‐
bol appears in the multifunction dis‐
play.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deactivated due to signal interference.
#
Start the vehicle again.
#
Check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.
Rear segments 1 or all-round seg‐
ments 2 light up red. At the same
time, a warning tone sounds for
approximately two seconds every time
the vehicle is started. The é symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
The sensors are dirty.
#
Clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 397).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
#
Start the vehicle again.
#
If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protec‐
tion
Passive side impact protection is an additional
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which
warns the driver about obstacles at the side of
the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles
are detected between the front and rear detec‐
tion range. In order for an object on the side to
be detected, the sensors in the front and rear
bumper must first detect the object while you
are driving past it.
During the parking procedure or maneuvering,
objects are detected as the vehicle drives past.
If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐
cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a
warning is issued. The segments on the sides
light up yellow or red, depending on the distance
to the obstacle.
Segment color depending on distance
Color Lateral distance
YellowApprox. 1.0 - 2.0 ft
(30 - 60 cm)
RedApprox. < 1.0 ft
(30 cm)
190
Driving and parking
In order for lateral front or rear segments to be
displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance
of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the
vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all
of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐
played.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles
without a 360° Camera
1
Operational front and rear
2
Operational front, rear and sides
3
Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)
and rear (red)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles
with a 360° Camera
1
Operational front and rear
2
Operational front, rear and sides
3
Obstacles detected at the front right (red)
Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the
following situations, for example:
R
You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion.
R
You open the doors.
After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the
sides must be detected again before a new
warning can be issued.
System limits
The system limits for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro‐
tection.
The following objects are not detected, for exam‐
ple:
R
Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from
the side
R
Objects placed next to the vehicle
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
*
NOTE Risk of an accident from objects
at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range.
#
When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐
cle, pay particular attention to any
objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars.
The vehicle or other objects could oth‐
erwise be damaged.
Driving and parking
191
If the é symbol is shown in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.
Multimedia system:
4
Settings
5
Quick Access
5
PARKTRONIC
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
%
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Volume.
#
Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Pitch.
#
Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning
tones
You can specify whether the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence
when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐
cle.
#
Select Warn Early All Around.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
You can specify whether the volume of a media
source in the multimedia system is to be
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds a warning tone.
#
Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Reversing camera
Function of the rear view camera
When you engage reverse gear, the image from
rear view camera 1 is shown in the media dis‐
play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the
vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its
current position. This helps you to orient your‐
self and to avoid obstacles when backing up.
192
Driving and parking
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the
maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐
ing.
The guide lines in the media display show the
distances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐
played only apply to road level.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select from the following views:
R
Normal view
R
Wide-angle view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Normal view
1
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
2
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
3
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
4
Bumper
5
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
Wide-angle view
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Driving and parking
193
Normal view
1
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4
Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance
between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and
3.3 ft (1.0 m)
5
Red warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close
(approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)
6
Orange warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐
tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft
(0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))
%
If the entire system fails, the segments of
the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear, the display of
the segments changes as follows:
R
The rear segments are shown in red
when backing up.
R
The rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out (/ page 189).
Wide-angle view
System failure
194
Driving and parking
If the rear view camera is not operational, a mes‐
sage appears in the multimedia system.
System limits
The rear view camera will not function or will
only partially function in the following situations:
R
The trunk lid is open.
R
There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night.
R
The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
rear view camera (/ page 397).
R
The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐
aged. In this case, have the camera and its
position and setting checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
%
Do not use the rear view camera in these
types of situation. You could otherwise injure
others or collide with objects when parking
the vehicle.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate bracket or bicycle rack).
%
The contrast of the display may be impaired
by direct sunlight or by other light sources,
e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this
case, pay particular attention.
%
Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
360° camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐
ity.
The views of the 360° Camera are always availa‐
ble when driving forwards up to a speed of
approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing
up.
The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor‐
rectly or not show them at all. It is not a substi‐
tute for your attention to the surroundings. The
responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking
remains with you. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu‐
vering area while maneuvering and parking.
The system evaluates images from the following
cameras:
R
Rear view camera
R
Front camera
R
Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
Views of the 360° Camera
You can select from different views:
Driving and parking
195
1
Wide-angle view, front
2
Top view with image from the front camera
3
Top view with images from the side cameras
in the outside mirrors
4
Wide-angle view, rear
5
Top view with image from the rear view cam‐
era
6
Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch)
Top view
1
Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
take at the current steering wheel angle
2
Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
3
Your vehicle from above
The color of the individual segments of warning
display 2 is based on the distance to the detec‐
ted obstacle:
R
Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft
(1.0 m)
R
Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft
(0.6 m)
R
Red segments: obstacles at a very short
distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and no object is detected, the segments of the
warning display are shown in gray.
%
If the entire system fails, the segments of
the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear, the display of
the segments changes as follows:
R
The rear segments are shown in red
when backing up.
R
The rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out (/ page 189).
196
Driving and parking
Guide lines
1
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4
Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
%
When Active Parking Assist is active, lane
markings 1 are displayed in green.
The guide lines in the media display show
the distances to your vehicle. The distances
apply to road level.
Side view of the mirror cameras
The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
1
Guide line of external vehicle dimensions
with outside mirrors folded out
2
Marker of the wheel contact points
System failure
If the 360° Camera is not ready for operation,
the following message appears in the multimedia
system:
System limits
The 360° Camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
R
The doors are open.
R
The side mirrors are folded in.
R
The trunk lid is open.
R
There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night.
R
The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
ged up.
R
If cameras or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed are damaged. In
Driving and parking
197
this event, have the cameras, their positions
and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
%
Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir‐
cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth‐
ers or collide with objects when parking the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the
standard height can result in inaccuracies in the
guide lines and in the display of the generated
images, depending on technical conditions.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license
plate bracket, bicycle rack).
%
The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt direct sunlight or by other light
sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%
Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
(/ page 397).
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera
#
Engage reverse gear.
#
Select the desired view in the multimedia
system (/ page 195).
Opening the camera cover of the rear view
camera
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
#
Select Open Camera Cover.
%
The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system which uses ultrasound and is
automatically activated during forward travel.
The system is operational at speeds below
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
If all requirements are met, the Ç display
appears in the multifunction display. The system
then independently locates and measures paral‐
lel and perpendicular parking spaces on both
sides of the vehicle.
When Active Parking Assist has detected parking
spaces, the È display appears in the multi‐
function display. The arrows show on which side
of the road detected parking spaces are located.
They are then shown in the media display. The
parking space and, if necessary, the parking
direction can be selected as desired. Active
Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path,
switches on the turn signal indicator and assists
you in parking and exiting the parking space.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active
Parking Assist provides assistance when chang‐
ing gear, accelerating, braking and steering the
vehicle.
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range.
198
Driving and parking
Active Parking Assist is canceled if, among other
things, one of the following actions is carried
out:
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
R
Active Parking Assist is deactivated.
R
You begin steering.
R
You apply the parking brake.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
you engage transmission position j.
R
ESP
®
intervenes.
R
You open the doors or the trunk lid while
driving.
System limits
Objects located above or below the detection
range of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or Active
Parking Assist are not detected when the park‐
ing space is being measured. These are also not
taken into account when the parking maneuver
is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs
or loading ramps of trucks, or the boundaries of
parking spaces. In some circumstances, Active
Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the
parking space prematurely.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects located above or below the
detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the
detection range, the following situations may
arise:
R
Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of
these objects.
This could cause a collision.
#
In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Parking
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer
drawbars might not be identified as such or be
measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking
Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
situations:
R
In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
R
When transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
R
If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
R
When snow chains are installed.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g. the
following:
R
Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
R
Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel in the following situations:
R
If two parking spaces are located immedi‐
ately next to each other.
R
If the parking space is immediately next to a
low obstacle such as a curb.
Driving and parking
199
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the
direction of travel in the following situations:
R
If the parking space is on a curb.
R
If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the center console.
#
Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Park‐
ing Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking
spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.
%
Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path.
#
If you have driven past a parking space: bring
the vehicle to a standstill.
#
Select desired parking space 4.
#
Where necessary, select the parking direc‐
tion: forwards or reverse.
Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on
selected parking space 4 and the parking
direction.
200
Driving and parking
#
Confirm selected parking space 4.
%
The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐
matically when the parking procedure
begins. The turn signal indicator is switched
off automatically when you switch to h.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal
indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐
tor accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects
or other road users.
#
Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#
If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse
Gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi‐
tion.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
On completion of the parking procedure, the
Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle
display message appears. Further maneuvering
may still be necessary.
#
After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
When required by legal requirements or local
conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
%
You can stop the vehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro‐
cedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. The parking procedure can
then be continued. If no new vehicle path is
available, the transmission position will be
changed again. If the vehicle has not yet
reached the parking space, the parking pro‐
cedure will be canceled, should a gear be
changed.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking
Assist
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been parked with Active
Parking Assist.
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the center console.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐
cle and surroundings during the entire parking
procedure.
#
Start the vehicle.
Driving and parking
201
#
Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active
Parking Assist.
#
If the vehicle has been parked at right angles
to the direction of travel: in area 2, select
direction of travel 3, left or right.
%
The vehicle path shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path.
#
Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of
the parking space.
%
The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐
matically when the exiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal
indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐
tor accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects
or other road users.
#
Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#
If, for example, the Please Engage Forward
Gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi‐
tion.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is switched off auto‐
matically.
After the exiting procedure has been completed,
the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of
202
Driving and parking
Vehicle message appears in the media display. A
warning tone and the following display in the
media display prompt you to take over control of
the vehicle:
You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change
gear yourself again.
Function of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is
detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph
(2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the
É symbol appears in the media display.
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
limited detection performance of Drive
Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐
tify objects and traffic situations.
In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:
R
Warn you without reason and limit the
vehicle speed.
R
Not warn you or not limit the vehicle
speed.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
#
Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐
essary, provided the traffic situation
permits and that it is safe to take eva‐
sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range.
A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐
uations, for example:
R
If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals.
R
If the wrong gear is selected.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following
conditions:
R
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
R
Every time the gear is changed to k or h
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
R
If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
R
If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits
The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited
on inclines.
%
Also observe the system limits of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 187).
Function of Cross Traffic Alert
%
Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist (/ page 208).
Driving and parking
203
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Cross Traffic
Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic
when backing up out of a parking space. The
radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the
area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation
is detected, symbol 1 appears in the media dis‐
play. If the driver does not respond to the warn‐
ing, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automat‐
ically.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles
or other objects, detection is not possible.
Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following
conditions:
R
If Blind Spot Assist is activated.
R
If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace.
R
If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits
Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.
%
Also observe the system limits of Active
Blind Spot Assist (/ page 208).
Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐
tance
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
#
Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off.
%
Maneuvering assistance must be active for
the function of Drive Away Assist
(/ page 203).
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the
part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver. On long journeys,
take regular breaks in good time that allow for
adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
R
Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R
Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention
level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐
ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐
play. You can acknowledge the message and
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after a minimum of
15 minutes.
204
Driving and parking
You can have the following status information for
ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
menu of the on-board computer:
R
The length of the journey since the last
break.
R
The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST:
-
The fuller the circle, the higher the atten‐
tional level determined
-
As your attention wanes, the circle in the
center of the display becomes smaller
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System Suspended message appears.
If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,
the multimedia system offers to search for a rest
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐
tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐
ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph
(60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all in the following situations:
R
If you have been driving for less than approx‐
imately 30 minutes.
R
If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes).
R
If there is a strong side wind.
R
If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R
If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
R
If the time has been set incorrectly.
R
In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently.
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐
tinuing the journey in the following situations:
R
If you switch off the engine.
R
If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking
a break).
Driving and parking
205
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Attention Assist
Setting options
#
Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area
#
Select Suggest Rest Area.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or
increasing lack of attention, it suggests a
rest area in the vicinity.
#
Select the suggested rest area.
You are guided to the selected rest area.
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist
Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐
tifunction camera 1. It assists you by display‐
ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐
tions in the instrument cluster and optionally in
the Head-up Display or central display.
Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data
stored in the navigation system, it can update
the display in the following situations without
detecting traffic signs:
R
When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. free‐
way entry or exit roads.
R
When a village or city boundary which is
stored in the digital map is passed.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g.
when wet).
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for keeping a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking
in good time.
Warning when the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
this, you can specify in the multimedia system
by how much the maximum permissible speed
can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a
visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
206
Driving and parking
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit
1
Permissible speed
2
Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3
Additional sign with restriction
%
Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis‐
play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the
Instrument Display indicates that additional
traffic signs have been detected. These can
also be displayed in the media display and
optionally in the Head-up Display.
If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐
rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to
missing signs), the following display appears in
the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in
a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup‐
ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all
countries.
%
Also observe the information on display mes‐
sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 468).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R
If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R
If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
ged up, damaged or covered.
R
If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt or snow, or because they are covered
or due to insufficient lighting.
R
If the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
R
If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.
R
If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs
outside the camera's field of vision.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist
Requirements:
R
Only vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be
activated for the automatic adoption of
speed limits.
Driving and parking
207
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating/deactivating automatic adoption
of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving
Assistance Package)
#
Select Limit Adoption.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign
Assist are automatically adopted by Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
%
If one of the following systems is activated,
the speed detected can be manually adopted
as the speed limit:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Cruise control
R
Variable limiter
Further information (/ page 174).
Displaying detected traffic signs in the
media display
#
Select Display in Central Display.
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Adjusting the type of warning
#
Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off.
Adjusting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a
warning is issued when exceeded.
#
Select Warning Threshold.
#
Set the desired speed.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot
Assist with exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active
Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to
monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and
10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐
imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse‐
quently enters the monitoring range directly next
to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside
mirror lights up red.
If a vehicle is detected close to the side of your
vehicle, the red warning lamp in the outside mir‐
ror flashes. If you switch on the turn signal indi‐
cator in the corresponding direction, a warning
tone sounds once. If the turn signal indicator
remains switched on, all other detected vehicles
are indicated only by the flashing of the red
warning lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
different speed.
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
drivers in this situation.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐
208
Driving and parking
cles and are no substitute for attentive driving.
Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to
the side for other road users and obstacles.
Exit warning
The exit warning is an additional function of
Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu‐
pants about approaching vehicles when leaving
the vehicle when stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite exit
warning
The exit warning reacts neither to stationary
objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a
greatly different speed.
As a result, the exit warning cannot warn
drivers in these situations.
#
Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation when opening the doors
and make sure there is sufficient clear‐
ance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this
is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle
occupant opens the door on the side with the
warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning
lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash.
This additional function is only available when
Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi‐
mum of three minutes after the ignition has
been switched off. The exit warning is no longer
available once the warning lamp in the outside
mirror flashes three times.
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐
tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The
responsibility for opening and closing the doors
and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐
cle occupants.
System limits
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
may be limited in the following situations:
R
If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
R
In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
R
If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes
R
If the road has very wide or narrow lanes
R
If vehicles are not driving in the middle of
their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
ders. Always make sure that there is sufficient
distance to the side for other traffic or obsta‐
cles.
Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐
side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro‐
longed time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
The exit warning may be limited in the following
situations:
R
When the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces
R
When people approach the vehicle
R
In the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
Driving and parking
209
Function of brake application (Active Blind
Spot Assist)
%
The brake application function is only availa‐
ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance
Package.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐
recting brake application is carried out. This is
designed to help you avoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is availa‐
ble in the speed range between approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
brake application of Active Blind Spot
Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
#
Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Blind Spot
Assist warns you or makes a course-
correcting brake application.
#
Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
following:
R
If vehicles overtake too closely on the
side, placing them in the blind spot area
R
Vehicles approaching and overtaking you
at a greatly different speed
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐
uations.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐
ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐
play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the multifunction display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐
priate brake application. This brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
210
Driving and parking
System limits
Either a course-correcting brake application
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
all, may occur in the following situations:
R
Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
R
A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
R
You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R
You brake or accelerate significantly.
R
A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
or Active Brake Assist.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is
detected.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
#
Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
or
#
Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, Blind
Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is
available.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐
tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned
by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and gui‐
ded by a course-correcting brake application
back into your lane.
You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐
ing wheel in the following circumstances:
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking.
R
A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
You will also be guided back into your lane by
means of a course-correcting brake application
if the following conditions are met:
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both edges of the lane.
R
A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐
ing.
You can activate or deactivate the Active Lane
Keeping Assist warning.
The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis‐
played in the on-board computer:
R
ð (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
activated and operating.
R
ð (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
activated, but not operating.
Driving and parking
211
R
ï: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva‐
ted or there is a malfunction.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce
the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your
driving style nor override the laws of physics. It
cannot take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying
in lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can bring the vehicle
back into the lane with a lane-correcting brake
application. In the case of a broken lane marking
being detected, a brake application will only be
made if a vehicle has been detected in the adja‐
cent lane. Oncoming traffic can be detected.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package or
Driving Assistance Plus Package: overtaking
vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can also
be detected.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age or Driving Assistance Plus Package: a
lane-correcting brake application also takes
place when, in addition to a broken lane mark‐
ing, the edge of a firm road surface is detected
(e.g. central reservation).
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the
speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and
124 mph (200 km/h).
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐
play 1 appears in the multifunction display.
Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist
%
The availability of the following function is
country-dependent.
A lane-correcting brake application also occurs
in the Sensitive setting in the following situa‐
tions:
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a solid
lane marking.
R
A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
System limits
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
the following situations:
R
You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐
erate.
R
You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
tor (situation-dependent).
R
A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP
®
, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
R
You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
eration.
R
When ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed.
212
Driving and parking
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R
If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections.
R
If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
ged up, damaged or covered.
R
If there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one
lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R
If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐
ered.
R
If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
R
If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
R
If the roadway is very narrow and winding.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sen‐
sors to monitor several areas around the vehicle.
If the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty
or covered with snow, the system may be
impaired or may not function. If an obstacle in
the lane in which you are driving has been detec‐
ted, no lane-correcting brake application occurs.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping
Assist
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Quick Access
5
Active Lane Keeping Assist
#
Activate or deactivate the function.
Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Assistance
5
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity
%
The availability of this function is dependent
on the country.
#
Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Activating/deactivating the haptic warning
#
Select Warning.
Activate or deactivate the function.
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems can lead to damage on the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be
guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed
vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may
swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐
mitted towing methods (/ page 413) and the
instructions for towing with both axles on the
ground (/ page 414).
Driving and parking
213
Instrument Display overview
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to an
instrument display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, park the vehicle immediately and
safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument Display (standard)
1
Speedometer (example)
2
Multifunction display
3
Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
tor
Further content can be shown on multifunction
display 2:
R
Assistant display
R
Telephone
R
Navigation
R
Trip
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Vehicle dynamics
R
Styles
R
Maintenance
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐
pit
1
Speedometer (example)
2
Multifunction display
3
Tachometer (example)
4
Coolant temperature gauge
5
Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator,
range
214
Instrument Display and on-board computer
%
In addition to multifunction display 2, fur‐
ther content can be shown on displays 1
and 3 (/ page 218).
The segments on speedometer 1 indicate the
system status for the following:
R
Cruise control(/ page 170)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 172)
*
NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
#
Do not drive with the engine in the over‐
revving range.
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the
engine when the red mark on the tachometer
(overrevving range) is reached.
Vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit: during
normal operating conditions, coolant tempera‐
ture display 4 may rise to the red mark.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel
1
P Back/Home button, on-board com‐
puter
Press and hold: shows standard display
2
Touch Control, on-board computer
3
Control panel for cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC
4
Control panel for MBUX multimedia system:
£ Voice Control System
ß Displays favorites
VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or
switches the sound off 8 (press)
Instrument Display and on-board computer
215
6 Makes/accepts a call
~ Rejects/ends a call
5
ò Calls up the home screen
6
Touch Control multimedia system
7
% Back button
Operating the on-board computer
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are currently driving when operat‐
ing the on-board computer.
%
The on-board computer displays will appear
on the multifunction display (/ page 219).
The on-board computer is operated using left-
hand Touch Control 2 and left-hand back/
home button 1.
When the on-board computer is being operated,
different acoustic signals will sound as operating
feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached
or when you are scrolling through a list.
The following menus are available:
R
Assistance
R
Phone
R
Navigation
R
Trip
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Designs & Disp.
R
Service
The menus can be called up from the menu bar
on the multifunction display.
#
To call up the menu bar: press back button
on the left 1 until the menu bar is dis‐
played.
%
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call
up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
216
Instrument Display and on-board computer
%
The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit.
#
To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or
right on left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To call up a menu or confirm a selection:
press left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To scroll through displays or lists on the
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on left-
hand Touch Control 2.
#
To call up a submenu or confirm a selec‐
tion: press left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To exit a submenu: press back button on
the left 1.
Selecting the Head-up Display
#
To switch on the Head-up Display: switch
on the Head-up Display via the multimedia
system or activate it in the menu bar by swip‐
ing upwards on left-hand Touch Control 2.
The Head-up Display menu has been selec‐
ted on the Head-up Display.
#
To switch to the Head-up Display: press
left-hand Touch Control 2 or swipe upwards
on left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To select what the Head-up Display
shows: swipe upwards or downwards on left-
hand Touch Control 2.
Full-screen menu
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the
Widescreen Cockpit: the following menus can
be shown in full on the Instrument Display:
R
Assistance
R
Trip
R
Navigation
#
On the corresponding menu, use left-hand
Touch Control 2 to scroll to the end of the
list.
#
Press left-hand Touch Control 2.
The selected menu will be displayed in full.
Adjusting the design of the Instrument Dis‐
play
On-board computer:
4
Designs & Disp.
Setting the design
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The Instrument Display will be shown in the
selected design.
The following designs can be selected, depend‐
ing on the vehicle equipment:
R
Classic
R
Sport
R
Progressive
Instrument Display and on-board computer
217
R
Understated
R
Standard Displays
Showing display content on the instrument
cluster
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the
Widescreen Cockpit: additional display content
can be shown on the instrument cluster.
%
The display content on the instrument clus‐
ter adapts to the respective topic selection
in the multimedia system.
#
To select display content: swipe to the
right or left on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control to select the required
display content.
When the display content is selected, it will
briefly be highlighted.
1
The index points show the selected display
content.
2
Display content, left (example: speedometer)
When the display content is selected 2, it will
briefly be highlighted.
Display content selection, left:
R
Speedometer
R
Time/date
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
R
Range
R
Audio
3
Display content, center (example: media
menu)
The index points show the selected menu
content.
The menu content of the respective menu from
the menu bar on the multifunction display is dis‐
played in the display content, center.
Display content menu selection, center:
R
Assistance
R
Telephone
R
Navigation
R
Trip
218
Instrument Display and on-board computer
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Styles and display
R
Service
4
Display content, right (example: tachometer)
Display content selection, right:
R
Tachometer
R
Average fuel consumption
R
ECO display
R
Navigation
R
G-meter
R
Assistant display
Overview of displays on the multifunction
display
1
Outside temperature
2
Time
3
Digital speedometer
4
Display section
5
Drive program
6
Transmission position
%
Vehicles with standard Instrument Dis‐
play: the position of the displays differs from
those shown here.
Further displays on the multifunction display:
Z
Gearshift recommendation (/ page 145)
u
Active Parking Assist (/ page 200)
é
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 191)
h
Cruise control (/ page 170)
ç
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 172)
ê
Active Brake Assist (/ page 170)
à
Active Steering Assist (/ page 179)
ð
Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 211)
±
Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 181)
è
ECO start/stop function (/ page 137)
ë
HOLD function (/ page 185)
Instrument Display and on-board computer
219
_
Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 116)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected
instructions and traffic signs (/ page 206).
Adjusting the instrument lighting
#
Turn brightness control 1 up or down.
The lighting of the Instrument Display and in
the control elements of the vehicle interior is
adjusted.
Menus and submenus
Calling up functions on the Service menu of
the on-board computer
On-board computer:
4
Service
#
To select a function: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Functions on the Service menu:
R
Message memory (/ page 468)
R
Tires:
-
Restart the tire pressure loss warning
system (/ page 430)
-
Check the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitor (/ page 428)
-
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(/ page 429)
R
ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
(/ page 385)
R
Coolant: coolant temperature display
R
Engine Oil Level: engine oil level
R
Consumption Info: fuel life cycle consump‐
tion
Calling up displays on the Assistance menu
On-board computer:
4
Assistance
The following displays are available on the Assis‐
tance menu:
R
Assistance
R
Attention level (/ page 204)
R
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: full screen
#
To switch between the displays: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
220
Instrument Display and on-board computer
%
The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit.
Status displays on the assistant display:
R
Û ATTENTION ASSIST: deactivated
R
Gray lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist activated
R
Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist active
R
¸ Gray radar waves next to vehicle: Blind
Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena‐
bled
R
¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle:
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
active
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays
(/ page 172)
Calling up displays on the Trip menu
On-board computer:
4
Trip
#
To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Trip menu in the standard cockpit:
R
Speedometer
R
Tachometer
R
Range and current fuel consumption
R
ECO display (/ page 139)
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
Trip menu in the Widescreen Cockpit:
R
Standard display
R
Current fuel consumption
R
ECO display (/ page 139)
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
R
Full screen
Standard display (example)
1
Trip distance
2
Total distance
Instrument Display and on-board computer
221
Trip computer (example)
1
Total distance
2
Driving time
3
Average speed
4
Average fuel consumption
%
The illustrations show the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit.
Resetting values on the Trip menu of the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Trip
You can reset the values of the following func‐
tions:
R
Trip distance
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
R
ECO display (/ page 139)
#
To select the function to be reset: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Select Yes .
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol, the values of the function will be reset
immediately.
Calling up navigation instructions on the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Navigation
The following displays are available in the naviga‐
tion menu:
R
Navigation view
R
Map view
R
Full-surface map view
Example: no change of direction announced
1
Distance to the next change of direction
2
Distance to the next destination
222
Instrument Display and on-board computer
3
Estimated arrival time at next destination
4
Current road
Example: change of direction announced
1
Distance to the change of direction
2
Road to which the change of direction leads
3
Change-of-direction symbol
4
Recommended lane (white)
5
Possible lane
6
Lane not recommended (dark gray)
Further possible displays on the Navigation
menu:
R
Direction of Travel: display of direction of
travel and road currently being traveled on.
R
New Route... or Calculating Route...: a new
route is being calculated.
R
Road Not Mapped: the road is unknown, e.g.
for newly built roads.
R
No Route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
R
Off Map: the map for the current location is
not available.
R
Area of Dest. Reached: when an intermediate
destination is reached, the intermediate des‐
tination flag will be displayed with the num‐
ber of the intermediate destination Î.
After this, route guidance will continue. Once
the destination is reached, the checkered
flag Í will be displayed. Route guidance
will now be complete
#
To exit the menu: press the back button on
the left.
Vehicles with the MBUX multimedia system:
You can also start navigation to one of the
recent destinations on the Navigation menu:
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select a destination: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Route guidance will start.
If route guidance has already been activated,
a query will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
#
Select Yes.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Route guidance will start.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
223
Selecting radio stations using the on-board
computer
On-board computer:
4
Radio
1
Frequency range
2
Station
3
Name of track
%
The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit
When you select a station from the memory pre‐
sets, the preset will appear next to the station
name. When you select a saved station in the
frequency range, an asterisk will appear next to
the station name.
#
To select a radio station: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting the frequency range or memory
preset
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Operating media playback using the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Media
1
Media source
2
Track number and current track
3
Name of artist (example)
%
The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit
#
To change tracks on an active media
source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
224
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Changing a media source
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select a media source: swipe upwards
or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Dialing telephone numbers using the on-
board computer
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
When using the phone, observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
On-board computer:
4
Phone
The most recent telephone calls (dialed,
received and missed calls) are displayed on the
Phone menu.
#
To select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If there is only one telephone number
saved to an entry: the telephone number
will be selected.
#
If there are multiple telephone numbers
saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control to
select the desired telephone number.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The telephone number will be dialed.
The following displays may appear instead of the
telephone numbers dialed:
R
Please Wait: the application is starting. If a
Bluetooth
®
connection to the mobile phone
is not established, the menu for authorizing
and connecting a mobile phone will be dis‐
played on the multimedia system
(/ page 334).
R
Updating Data…: the call list is being upda‐
ted.
R
Importing Contacts: contacts are being
imported from the mobile phone or a storage
medium.
Accepting/rejecting an incoming call
Vehicles with Head-up Display: when you
receive a call, the Incoming Call message will
appear on the Head-up Display.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
225
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select 6 (accept)
or ~ (reject).
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
You may accept or reject the call using the 6
or ~ button on the steering wheel.
Setting the Head-up Display using the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
HEAD-UP DISPLAY
The following Head-up Display settings can be
selected:
R
Position
R
Brightness
R
Displays
R
Messages
R
Assistance status
R
Telephone
R
Audio
R
Voice Control System
#
To choose a setting: swipe to the right on
the left-hand Touch Control.
Settings menu 5 is selected.
#
To call up the Settings menu: press the
left-hand Touch Control.
#
To adjust the position: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left
or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To set messages, assistance status, tele‐
phone, audio and the Voice Control Sys‐
tem: press the left-hand Touch Control.
The list of setting options will be displayed.
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select a setting by
pressing the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting what the Head-up Display shows
(Example)
1
To switch the Head-up Display on/off
2
Left display area
Navigation system
Average consumption
G-meter
3
Central display area
Set speed in the driver assistance system,
e.g. cruise control
Warnings from driver assistance systems,
e.g. distance warning
4
Right display area
226
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Traffic Sign Assist
Assistant display
5
To select the settings
6
Index points
Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can
be hidden.
%
In audio mode, the station name, track or
last calls will be shown temporarily when the
audio source is being actively operated.
#
To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Head-up Display
Function of the Head-up Display
The Head-up Display projects information above
the cockpit into the driver's field of vision, e.g.
the speed of the vehicle, information from the
navigation system or driver assistance systems
and some warning messages.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different
content can be shown in the three display areas
of the Head-up Display (/ page 226).
Display elements
1
Navigation instructions
2
Current speed
3
Detected instructions and traffic signs
4
Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)
System limits
The visibility of the displays will be affected by
the following conditions:
R
Seat position
R
Image position setting
R
Ambient light
R
Wet roadway
R
Objects on the display cover
R
Polarization in sunglasses
%
In extreme sunlight, sections of the display
may appear washed out. You can correct this
by deactivating and reactivating the Head-up
Display.
Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the
multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Quick Access
#
Select HUD.
The Head-up Display is activated.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
227
Notes on operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/load compartment.
For your own safety, always observe the follow‐
ing points when operating mobile communica‐
tions equipment and especially your voice con‐
trol system:
R
Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
try in which you are driving.
R
While driving, only operate mobile communi‐
cations equipment and your voice control
system when the traffic conditions permit it.
You may otherwise be distracted from the
traffic conditions and cause an accident,
injuring yourself and others.
228
Voice Control System
R
If you use the voice control system in an
emergency your voice can change and your
telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can
thereby be unnecessarily delayed.
R
Familiarize yourself with the voice control
system functions before starting the journey.
R
Comply with the loading guidelines
(/ page 99).
Operation
Overview of operating the multifunction
steering wheel
The Voice Control System is operational approx‐
imately thirty seconds after the ignition is
switched on.
1
Press the rocker switch up: £ starts the
dialog
2
Press the control knob: 8 switches the
sound off or on (ends the dialog)
Turn the control knob up/down: increases/
decreases the volume
3
Press the rocker switch down: ~ rejects/
ends a call (ends the dialog)
Conducting a dialog
For the dialog with the Voice Control System,
you can use complete sentences of colloquial
language as voice commands, such as, for exam‐
ple, "Please show me the list of the last calls" or
"How warm is it outside?". It is not necessary to
first change to the relevant application such as
"Telephone" or "Vehicle function".
#
To activate or continue dialog by using a
keyword: say "Hello Mercedes" to activate
the Voice Control System. Voice activation
must be switched on in the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 230). For this, it is not neces‐
sary to press up the £ rocker switch on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Voice activation can also be directly com‐
bined with a voice command, e.g. "Hi
Mercedes, how fast can I drive?".
or
#
Press the £ rocker switch up on the mul‐
tifunction steering wheel.
You can say a voice command after an
acoustic signal.
Voice Control System
229
#
To correct an entry: say the Correction
voice command.
#
To select an entry from the selection list:
say the line number or the contents.
#
To browse the selection list: say the Next
or Back voice command.
#
To interrupt the dialog: say the Pause voice
command.
The dialog can be continued with the "Hello
Mercedes" voice command or by pressing up
the £ rocker switch on the multifunction
steering wheel.
#
To jump to the preceding dialog: say the
Back voice command.
#
To jump back to the top dialog level: say
the Home voice command.
#
To cancel the dialog: say the Close voice
command or press the 8 or ~ button
on the multifunction steering wheel.
#
To interrupt a voice output: speak in the
middle of a voice dialog when the system is
still answering.
The voice output is shortened and the con‐
clusion is reached more quickly.
%
The Speak During Voice Output option must
be switched on in the multimedia system for
this (/ page 230).
Overview of operable functions in the Voice
Control System
You can use the Voice Control System to operate
the following functions depending on the vehicle
equipment:
R
Telephone
R
Text messages
R
Navigation
R
Address book
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Vehicle functions
R
Weather
Full functionality is only available for you with
activation of online voice control (/ page 230).
Notes on the language setting
You can change the language of the Voice Con‐
trol System via the system language settings. If
the set system language is not supported by the
Voice Control System, English will be selected.
The Voice Control System is available in English,
French, Portuguese and Spanish.
Setting the Voice Control System (multime‐
dia system)
Requirements:
R
For online voice control: your vehicle is
connected with your Mercedes me user
account (/ page 355).
R
There is an Internet connection
(/ page 359).
R
For online use of contacts: online voice
control is activated.
230
Voice Control System
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
LINGUATRONIC
Switching voice activation of the Voice Con‐
trol System on/off
#
Select Voice Activation "Hey Mercedes".
Depending on the previous status, the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated.
When the function is active, the "Hi
Mercedes" voice command can activate the
dialog.
Activating/deactivating online voice control
#
Activate Online Voice Control.
%
Online voice control is activated at the fac‐
tory.
#
Select Online Voice Control Subscr..
You will be connected with the Mercedes me
portal.
#
Activate online voice control in the Mercedes
me portal.
Activating contacts for online use
#
Select Contacts for Online Use.
When the function is active, contacts will be
found more easily and accurately using voice
input. The quality of the enunciation of con‐
tact names by the system will also be
improved.
Switching on voice interruption
#
Select Speak During Voice Output.
If the function is active, a command can be
interjected during voice output of the sys‐
tem.
Using the Voice Control System effectively
Voice Control System audible help functions
Using the corresponding voice commands you
receive the following information and assistance
in the following cases:
R
For optimal operation: say the Voice con-
trol tutorial voice command or call up the
Digital Operator's Manual with Could you go
to the Voice Control System tutorial please?,
for example. The full extent of the Digital
Operator's Manual is available when the vehi‐
cle is stationary. Here you can also find
explanatory videos which introduce you to
the functions of the Voice Control System.
R
Current application: on the multifunction
steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch
up and say the Help voice command. You will
receive suggestions and information about
operation of the Voice Control System for the
current application.
R
Continued dialog: say the Help voice com‐
mand during a voice dialog. For every step of
the dialog you receive matching information.
R
Specific function: say the voice command
for the desired function, e.g. with "Hello
Mercedes, I need help with the radio" or after
pressing the £ rocker switch on the multi‐
function steering wheel up, say the Help for
the telephone voice command, for example.
Voice Control System
231
Notes on optimal use of the Voice Control
System
Notes on how to improve recognition:
R
Activate online voice control (/ page 230).
R
Only operate the Voice Control System from
the driver's seat.
R
Say the voice commands coherently and
clearly, but do not exaggerate the words.
R
Avoid loud noises that cause interference
while making a voice command entry, e.g.
the entertainment in the rear passenger
compartment.
R
For telephone or address book entries:
-
Only create sensible address book entries
in the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter
surname and first name in the correct
field.
-
Do not use any abbreviations, unneces‐
sary spaces or special characters.
R
For radio station names: say the Read out
station list voice command and say the
desired station name in the way the voice
output reads aloud to you.
%
To improve recognition, depending on the
outside temperature, either the blowers for
ventilation or heating are reduced when the
Voice Control System is started.
Information on online voice control
Online voice control improves recognition and
makes additional results available as a result of
external information, e.g. information about POIs
and about the weather. We therefore recom‐
mend that you activate online voice control.
You will need a Mercedes me user account for
this. If you do not yet have a user account you
have to create one and connect it with your vehi‐
cle (/ page 262).
Then call up your Mercedes me user account.
The Mercedes me services are shown and can
be activated (/ page 263).
In addition, online voice control must be activa‐
ted (/ page 230).
Essential voice commands
Notes on the voice commands
Aside from the exact voice commands (see the
"Voice command" column in the following tables)
to call up specific functions, in most cases the
Voice Control System also understands a great
many paraphrases from daily usage. Examples of
these are listed in the "Colloquial examples" col‐
umn. For some languages however these exam‐
ples are only available to a limited extent.
%
Content in angled brackets, e.g. <POI> or
<contact>, is a placeholder which has to be
completed by you with the desired term. The
voice command Set <POI> as intermediate
destination could, for example, be completed
with: Set Mercedes-Benz Arena as intermedi-
ate destination.
Overview of switch voice commands
Switch voice commands can be used to open
certain applications.
232
Voice Control System
Switch voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Switch to navigation I would like to go to navigation
Switches to navigation
Switch to address book I would like to switch to the
address book
Switches to the address book
Switch to telephoneIwould like to switch to the phone
Switches to the telephone
Switch to messages Can you switch to messages
please?
Switches to the text message application
Switch to radio I would like to switch to the radio
Switches to radio
Switch to media I would like to switch to the media
application
Switches to media
Switch to comfort I would like to go to the comfort
application
Switches to the comfort settings
Switch to vehicle info I would like to go to the vehicle
application
Switches to vehicle information
Switch to settings I would like to go to the settings
menu
Switches to the menu with the setting options
Voice Control System
233
%
It is not necessary to first call up a menu in
order to operate a function it contains with
the Voice Control System. You can operate
the function directly using voice input, e.g.
call a contact or enter a destination for navi‐
gation. You can find further information in
the overview tables for voice commands.
Overview of navigation voice commands
Using the navigation voice commands you can
enter POIs and conventional addresses or navi‐
gate to your own contacts. You can also carry
out important navigation settings directly. The
following list offers just a small selection of the
possible navigation commands. You will receive
additional suggestions if you say Help for naviga-
tion.
Navigation voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Navigate to <address> Navigate to Canal Street, New York
Starts route guidance to the desired address.
Navigate to <contact>Drive/bring me to the contact
address of John Doe
Starts route guidance to a contact from the address book.
234
Voice Control System
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Navigate to <3 word address>
The example is for the English lan‐
guage:
Drive to Parade.Help.Bleat
Starts route guidance to a 3 word address from what3words.
The example mentioned navigates you to the Empire State Building.
Observe the following information:
R
3 word addresses are language dependent.
R
Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in
all countries and in all languages. Additional information on 3 word
addresses from what3words can be found in the Navigation section
under "Entering the destination as a 3 word address".
The Empire State Building, for example, has the following 3 word
addresses:
R
English: parade.help.bleat
R
French: commun.verbe.bisquer
R
Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca
Home I would like to go home/I want to
drive to my home address
Starts route guidance to the home address.
Work I would like to navigate to work
Starts route guidance to work.
Enter POI Take me to a POI
Enters a POI, e.g. Brandenburg Gate.
Navigate to <POI> Navigate to "McDonald's"
Starts route guidance to a POI.
Voice Control System
235
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Navigate to the online POI <POI> Navigate to online POI "McDonald's
Searches online for a POI and starts route guidance.
Start route guidance Begin route guidance/Can you
start route guidance?
Starts route guidance to a destination.
Cancel route guidance Can you quit route guidance?
Cancels route guidance.
Restart route guidance I would like to resume route guid-
ance
Continues route guidance after a break.
Set <address> as intermediate des-
tination
Set "9 Euclid Avenue in Cleveland"
as an intermediate destination
Selects an intermediate destination for the route.
Set <contact> as intermediate des-
tination
Set "John Doe" as intermediate des-
tination
Selects an intermediate destination from the contacts for the route.
Set <POI> as intermediate destina-
tion
Set "Trump Tower" as an intermedi-
ate destination
Selects a POI as an intermediate destination for the route.
Enter address in <country> I would like to enter a new address
in "France"
Selects a destination in another country.
Enter ZIP codeStart route guidance to a new ZIP
code
Enters a ZIP code.
Last destinations Show the previous destinations
Selects a destination from the previous destinations.
236
Voice Control System
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Show alternative routes Search for alternative routes
Shows one of the alternative routes calculated.
Driving recommendations on Switch on driving recommendations
Switches on voice output for route guidance.
Driving recommendations off Mute the driving instructions
Switches off voice output for route guidance.
Show traffic map Switch on traffic jam info
Displays traffic information on the map.
Hide traffic map Switch off the traffic jam messages
Hides the traffic information.
POI icons on Show me point of interest icons on
the map please
Displays the POI symbols on the map.
Hide POI icons I would like to hide all POI symbols
Hides the POI symbols.
Overview of telephone voice commands
You can use the telephone voice commands to
make phone calls or search through the address
book. The following list offers just a small selec‐
tion of the possible telephone commands. You
will receive additional suggestions if you say
Help for phone.
Voice Control System
237
Telephone voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Call <telephone number> I would like you to dial 0171xxxxxxx
Makes a telephone call by entering the telephone number directly.
Call <contact> Call Jane Smith on her mobile
Makes a telephone call directly by entering a name from the address
book.
Call Mercedes-Benz emergency
call center
Could you call the Mercedes-Benz
emergency center?
Triggers an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
Call Mercedes me I’d like you to call the MB break-
down assistance please
Places a call with Mercedes-Benz breakdown assistance.
Latest calls Show me the list of missed calls
Shows the list of missed calls.
Previous calls Show me the last calls
The list shows all outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Incoming calls Show me the calls received
Shows the list of incoming calls.
Outgoing calls Show me the list of outgoing calls
Shows the list of outgoing calls.
Search for <contact>Could you open the contact "John
Doe"?
Opens the contact data of a contact in the address book.
238
Voice Control System
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Redial Redial/Call last phone number
Makes a call to the last telephone number dialed.
Change phoneCould you please switch to the sec-
ond phone?
Changes the primary telephone
Overview of radio voice commands
Radio voice commands can also be used when
the radio application runs in the background and
another application is visible in the foreground.
The following list offers just a small selection of
the possible radio voice commands. You will
receive additional suggestions if you say Help
for radio.
Radio voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Station <station name> I would like to select station "Cool
FM"
Selects the radio station.
Radio frequency <Frequency> Go to station/radio frequency
"eighty seven point five mega-
hertz".
Enters a radio frequency, e.g. in the FM waveband.
Next radio station Call up the next radio station
Calls up the next radio station from the station list.
Previous stationSwitch to the last radio station/to
the previous program
Switches to the previous radio station.
Voice Control System
239
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Save radio station Save the radio station, please
Saves the radio station currently playing.
Show station list Please show me the list of all radio
stations
Shows the radio list with the radio stations that can currently be received.
Read out radio station list Please read out the radio program
Reads out the radio list with the radio stations that can currently be
received.
Traffic information on Switch on the traffic info
Switches on traffic announcements.
Traffic information off I'd like to switch off traffic info
Switches off traffic announcements.
Radio info on I want you to turn on additional
radio station text
Switches on the radio text information for the radio station currently play‐
ing.
Radio info off I want you to turn off additional
radio station text
Switches off the radio text information for the radio station currently play‐
ing.
Change to radio favorites Please show me the list of all favor-
ite radio stations
Shows the favorites with the saved radio stations.
Overview of media player voice commands
Media player voice commands can also be used
when the media player application runs in the
background and another application is visible in
the foreground. The following list offers just a
small selection of the possible media player
voice commands. You will receive additional sug‐
gestions if you say Help for media or Help for
player.
240
Voice Control System
Media player voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Play <track/albums/artists/
composers/music genres>
Play "Yellow Submarine"
The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers or genres
are accepted during the search. In the case of a clear search result the
track found is played back immediately.
Play track <track> Play song "So What"
The available tracks are played back.
Play album <album> Play album "A Night at the Opera"
The available albums are played back.
Play artist <artist>Iwant to listen to the artist
"Madonna"
The available artists are played back.
Play composer <composer>I'd like to hear the composer "Lud-
wig van Beethoven"
The available composers are played back.
Play music genre <music genre> I'd like to hear the music genre
"Bebop"
The available music genres are played back.
Search for track <track> I would like to search for the song
"Sailing"
The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search. A selec‐
tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish
to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Search for album <album>Search for album "A Night at the
Opera"
The names of all available albums are accepted during the search. A
selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you
wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Voice Control System
241
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Search for artist <artist>Iwould like to search for the artist
"Elton John"
The names of all available artists are accepted during the search. A selec‐
tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish
to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Search for composer <composer>Search for composer "Beethoven"
The names of all available composers are accepted during the search. A
selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you
wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Search for music genre <music
genre>
Search for music genre "Classical"
The names of all available music genres are accepted during the search. A
selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you
wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Next track Start the next song/video clip/film
Plays back the next track.
Previous track Play the last song/track/clip again
Plays back the previous track.
Repeat this track I'd like to listen to this track again
The current track is played back from the beginning.
Play similar music I'd like to hear similar music
Plays back similar tracks.
Play random music Play me a random track
Plays back random tracks.
Random playback on Turn random playback on
Switches to random mode.
242
Voice Control System
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Random track list off Switch off shuffle mode
Switches off random mode.
What am I listening to? Which music is currently playing?
The information about the track currently playing is read aloud.
Overview of message voice commands
Messages can be created, edited and listened to
using the message voice commands. The follow‐
ing list offers just a small selection of the possi‐
ble message commands. You will receive addi‐
tional suggestions if you say Help for messaging.
Message voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Text message to <Name> I would like to write a new text to
"John Doe's mobile number"
Creates a text message. All address book names are available.
Text message to <Name> <Text> I would like you to write a new text
to "Jane Doe" with the following
text: "I am running late"
Writes a text message to the person mentioned. The content of the text
can be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated.
Read out new text messages I would like you to read out the
new text messages
Reads out new text messages.
Read out the last text message
from <Name>
I would like you to read out the last
text message from "John Doe"
Reads out the last text message from the person mentioned.
Voice Control System
243
Overview of vehicle voice commands
You can use the vehicle voice commands to
directly call up the corresponding menus for the
vehicle settings and operate vehicle functions.
The following list offers just a small selection of
the possible vehicle voice commands. You will
receive additional suggestions if you say Help
for vehicle settings or Help for vehicle functions.
%
If no seat or side is mentioned for com‐
mands that relate to a seat or side of vehicle
then all actions are carried out automatically
for the driver's seat.
Vehicle voice commands
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Temperature colder I would like to reduce the tempera-
ture
Lowers the temperature of the air conditioning system.
Air recirculation on I would like to activate the air circu-
lation
Switches on air recirculation mode for the air conditioning system.
Automatic climate control driver on I would like to switch on the auto-
matic climate control for the driv-
er's seat
Switches on automatic climate control for the driver's or front passenger
side.
Ambient light blue I would like to set the interior light-
ing to blue
Switches the ambiance light, e.g. to blue.
Wave massage driver on I would like to switch on the wave
massage for the driver's seat
Switches on the wave massage for the driver's or front passenger seat.
244
Voice Control System
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Massage driver's seat off Switch the driver's side massage
off
Switches off the massage function for the driver's or front passenger seat.
Seat heating driver on I would like to switch on the seat
heating for the driver's seat
Switches on the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat.
Seat heating front passenger level
2
Seat heating front-passenger on
level 2
Sets the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat to level 2.
Current speed limit I would like to hear the speed limit
Calls up the current speed limit.
Outside temperature I would like to find out what the
temperature outside is like
Calls up the outside temperature.
Average consumption What is the current average con-
sumption?
Calls up average consumption.
Vehicle data Can you please display the vehicle
data menu?
Calls up the vehicle data.
Range Tell me the current range
Calls up the current range data.
Assistance menu Show me the driver assistance set-
tings
Displays the assistance settings.
Voice Control System
245
Voice command Colloquial example Function
Climate control menu I would like to see the climate con-
trol menu
Displays the climate control settings.
Light menu I would like to change the light set-
tings
Displays the light settings.
Seats menu I would like to switch to seat menu
Displays the seat adjustment settings.
Massage menu I would like to switch to the mas-
sage seat menu
Displays the massage settings.
Next serviceTell me my next service appoint-
ment
Calls up the next service due date.
246
Voice Control System
Overview and operation
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
1
Touch Control and control panel for the
MBUX multimedia system
Operating Touch Control(/ page 250)
2
Media display with touch functionality
Home screen overview(/ page 249)
Operating the touchscreen (/ page 251)
3
Touchpad
Operating the touchpad(/ page 252)
4
Control knob
Press and hold: switches the multimedia sys‐
tem or media display on or off
Press briefly: switches the mute function
on/off
Turn: adjusts the volume
5
Buttons for navigation, radio/media and
telephone
Calling up applications (/ page 260)
6
Buttons for vehicle functions/system set‐
tings and favorites/themes
Calling up applications (/ page 260)
You can operate the MBUX multimedia system
with these control elements:
R
Touch Control 1 and touchpad 3
The operation for both control elements is
achieved by cursor control.
R
Media display 2
%
Alternatively, you can conduct a dialog with
the Voice Control System (/ page 229).
Numerous application, online services, services
and apps are available for you. You can call
MBUX multimedia system
247
these up using the home screen or using buttons
5 and 6 next to the touchpad.
You can conveniently call up and add favorites
using the ß rocker switch on the steering
wheel or using the ß button next to the
touchpad. Quick-access in the home screen and
in the applications serve to select functions
more quickly.
If you use the learn function of the multimedia
system, you will receive suggestions during oper‐
ation of the most probable navigation destina‐
tions, radio stations and contacts. The configu‐
ration of the suggestions takes place in your pro‐
file. You can compile your profile from various
vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia
system. You can create themes for various driv‐
ing situations in the home screen as well as
using the ß rocker switch or the ß but‐
ton.
The Notifications Center collects incoming notifi‐
cations, e.g. about an available software update.
Depending on the type of notification it offers
various actions. You can call up the Notifications
Center on the home screen and in the applica‐
tion menus.
With the global search in the vehicle you can
search on-board across many categories as well
as online in the Internet. You can use the global
search in the home screen and in the notifica‐
tions.
Protection against theft
This device is equipped with technical provisions
to protect it against theft. Further information on
protection against theft can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on the media display
Observe the notes on caring for the interior
(/ page 398).
Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
off feature: if the temperature is too high, the
brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
media display may then switch off completely for
a while.
%
If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the multimedia sys‐
tem display.
248
MBUX multimedia system
Home screen overview
1
On the home screen: displays the first three
applications
In other displays: calls up the home screen
2
Calls up the profile
3
Calls up the global search
4
SOS NOT READY display only when the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not
available
5
Displays, for example network display, bat‐
tery status of the mobile phone connected,
signal strength of the mobile phone network,
time
6
Calls up the Notifications Center
The star indicates new notifications.
7
Calls up an application using the symbol
8
Name of the application, beneath the current
selection or information
9
Quick-access (in the example: calls up desti‐
nation entry, enters the destination address
for home)
A
Number of applications and currently selec‐
ted display area
MBUX multimedia system
249
B
Calls up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 127)
C
Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and
FAVORITES
Central control elements overview
1
Touch Control
2
Media display with touch functionality
3
Touchpad
Touch Control
Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimedia
system)
1
© button
Shows the home screen and calls up appli‐
cations
250
MBUX multimedia system
Shows suggestions, themes and favorites:
when the home screen is shown, swipe
down on Touch Control 2.
2
Touch Control
3
G button
Pressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐
play
4
Control panel for MBUX multimedia system:
ß rocker switch
Press down briefly: shows favorites
Press down and hold: adds favorites and
themes
Control knob
Turn: adjusts the volume VOL
Press: switches off the sound 8
6 rocker switch
Press up: makes or accepts a call
~ rocker switch
Press down: rejects or ends a call
You can navigate in menus and lists via the
touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 by
using a single-finger swipe.
#
To select the menu item or entry: swipe
up, down, left or right.
#
Press Touch Control 2.
#
To enter a character: enter a character
using the keyboard.
#
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
5
Touch Control Sensitivity
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
Setting acoustic operating feedback for the
Touch Control
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
The function is supported by the selection in a
list.
#
Select Acoustic Operating Feedback.
#
Set Normal, Loud or Off.
If the function is activated you will hear a
clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When
the beginning or end of the list is reached
you will hear another clicking sound.
Touchscreen
Operating the touchscreen
Tapping
#
To select a menu item or entry: tap on a
symbol or an entry.
#
To increase the map scale: tap twice
quickly with one finger.
#
To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin‐
gers.
#
To enter characters with the keypad: tap
on a button.
Single-finger swipe
#
To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left
or right.
MBUX multimedia system
251
#
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
#
To use handwriting to enter characters:
write the character with one finger on the
touchscreen.
Two-finger swipe
#
To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
#
To enlarge or reduce the size of a section
of a website: move two fingers together or
apart.
#
To turn the map: turn counter-clockwise or
clockwise using two fingers.
Touching, holding and moving
#
To move the map: touch the touchscreen
and move your finger in any direction.
#
To set the volume on a scale: touch the
touchscreen and move the finger to the left
or right.
Touching and holding
#
To save the destination in the map: touch
the touchscreen and hold until a message is
shown.
#
To call up a global menu in the applica‐
tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until
the OPTIONS menu appears.
Setting acoustic operation feedback for the
touchscreen
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
The function is supported by the selection in a
list.
#
Select Acoustic Operating Feedback.
#
Set Normal, Loud or Off.
If the function is activated you will hear a
clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When
the beginning or end of the list is reached
you will hear another clicking sound.
Touchpad
Operating the touchpad
1
G button
Pressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐
play
2
~ button
Pressing: calls up the control menu of the
last active audio source
252
MBUX multimedia system
Swiping to the left of right across ~:
selects the previous or next radio station/
music track
3
© button
Pressing: shows the home screen and calls
up applications
4
Touchpad
%
Calls up suggestions, themes and favorites:
when the home screen is shown, swipe
down on touchpad 4.
You can navigate in menus and lists via the
touch-sensitive surface of touchpad 4 by using
a single-finger swipe.
#
To select the menu item or entry: move
the selection by swiping up, down, left or
right.
#
Confirm the selection by pressing on touch‐
pad 4.
or
#
If Touchpad Tap is activated, tapping is suffi‐
cient (/ page 253).
#
To enter a character: select a character on
the keyboard (/ page 275).
or
#
Write a character on the touchpad with hand‐
writing input.
#
To move the digital map: when the digital
map is shown with the navigation menu,
swipe up with one finger.
#
Press the touchpad.
The digital map can be moved.
#
Swipe in all directions.
Use the following functions with a two-finger
swipe:
#
To call up the Notifications Center: swipe
down with two fingers.
#
To close the Notifications Center: swipe
up with two fingers.
#
To call up the control menu of the last
active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐
gers.
#
To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
#
To enlarge or reduce the size of a section
of a website: move two fingers together or
apart.
Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
5
Touchpad Sensitivity
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
#
To set the pressure sensitivity: switch
Touchpad Tap on or off.
If the function is switched on, a tap on the
touchpad is enough to select a menu item.
Switching the read-aloud function for hand‐
writing recognition on/off
Requirements:
R
The multimedia system is equipped with a
voice control system.
R
The read-aloud function is available for the
selected system language.
MBUX multimedia system
253
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Audio
#
Switch Read Out Handwriting Recognition on
or off.
If the function is activated, characters are
read aloud as they are written on the touch‐
pad.
Activating/deactivating haptic operating
feedback for the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
The function supports you when making entries
on the touchpad and when selecting menus.
#
Switch Haptic Operating Feedback on or off.
When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐
back in the form of a vibration is effected
when the touchpad is operated.
Setting acoustic operating feedback for the
touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
The function is supported by the selection in a
list.
#
Select Acoustic Operating Feedback.
#
Set Normal, Loud or Off.
If the function is activated you will hear a
clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When
the beginning or end of the list is reached
you will hear another clicking sound.
Selecting a station and track using the
touchpad
#
Swipe to the left or right over the ~ but‐
ton.
Radio: the previous or next station is set.
Media source: the previous or next track is
selected.
or
#
To show the control menu: press the ~
button on the touchpad.
or
#
Swipe upwards using two fingers on the
touchpad.
The control menu appears for the audio
source that was last selected.
#
Swipe left or right using one finger.
Radio: the previous or next station is set.
Media source: the previous or next track is
selected.
#
To hide the control menu: swipe down on
the touchpad using two fingers.
MBUX Interior Assistant
Notes on lasers and laser classification
&
WARNING Risk of injury from laser radi‐
ation from the camera
This product uses a laser system. If the hous‐
ing is opened or damaged, invisible laser
254
MBUX multimedia system
beams can escape in an uncontrolled man‐
ner.
Laser radiation can damage your retina.
#
Do not open the housing.
#
Always have maintenance work and
repairs carried out by a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
This product complies with the requirements of
the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with
exception of the variations according to the FDA
Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007.
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior
Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia
system can be operated contact-free. In addi‐
tion, the reading light or search light can be
switched on or off contact-free.
The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate
between driver and front passenger interactions.
The MBUX Interior Assistant recognizes certain
hand positions (poses).
MBUX multimedia system
255
The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:
Interaction area Interaction Description
In front of the media display/above the touch‐
pad
Proximity to the control element The MBUX Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the
hand towards a control element.
Depending on the active application, the display will be
adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate
between driver and front passenger.
No specific hand position is required.
Above the center console Defined poses With defined poses a function is triggered depending on the
application active.
Below the inside rearview mirrorBrief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside
rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front
passenger is switched on and off.
Front passenger seat Stretching out the hand above the
front passenger seat
By stretching out the hand above the front passenger seat
the search light is switched on. If the hand is withdrawn from
this area, the search light is switched off again.
Operating functions by proximity of the hand
to the touchscreen and touchpad
Requirements:
R
One of the following applications appears in
the media display:
-
Seat settings with displays for the driver
and front passenger seat, e.g. Seat Com-
fort
-
Home screen
256
MBUX multimedia system
-
Radio menu or media menu
-
Map in the navigation
-
Active Parking Assist
R
Recognition occurs as the hand approaches
to approximately 4 in (10 cm) from the touch‐
pad or the touchscreen.
Seat adjustments by the driver or front
passenger
In the seat settings menu, the MBUX Interior
Assistant detects proximity to various control
elements of the multimedia system. In addition,
the MBUX Interior Assistant detects from which
seat the action emanates.
Hand approaching the touchscreen
Hand approaching the touchpad
#
With the seat setting display active, move the
hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad.
The seat of the person operating, driver's
seat or front passenger seat, is enlarged in
the media display.
The appropriate control elements are pre-
selected automatically.
#
Depending on the function, the person oper‐
ating can either switch the function on or off
directly or make other settings.
Highlighting an application on the home
screen
The MBUX Interior Assistant detects in which
area the hand is in front of the touchscreen. The
display of objects shown is adjusted to improve
orientation.
#
Move a hand towards the touchscreen.
The symbol for the application is enlarged.
The quick-access applications will be high‐
lighted.
#
Continue operation, e.g. select a quick-
access application.
%
Further information about the home screen
(/ page 249).
MBUX multimedia system
257
Activating cover change in the radio menu
and media menu
The MBUX Interior Assistant reduces the number
of operating steps.
#
Move a hand towards the touchscreen or
touchpad.
The current information, e.g. about the radio
station, track and artist are hidden. Cover
change is activated.
#
Continue operation and select a cover.
#
As the hand is moved away from the
touchscreen or touchpad, the current infor‐
mation is shown again.
%
Further information on the radio menu
(/ page 374) and the media menu
(/ page 369).
Showing the navigation menu on the map
The MBUX Interior Assistant shows the naviga‐
tion menu.
#
Move a hand towards the touchscreen or
touchpad.
The navigation menu is shown.
#
Continue operation and select a symbol.
#
As the hand is moved away from the
touchscreen or touchpad, the media display
hides the navigation menu.
%
Further information on the navigation menu
(/ page 290).
Showing operating symbols in the Active
Parking Assist camera image (only from driv‐
er's seat)
The MBUX Interior Assistant facilitates quick-
access for the driver to various camera views.
#
With the Active Parking Assist display active,
move the hand in the direction of the
touchscreen.
The camera operation symbols are displayed.
#
Continue operation and display the desired
front, rear, left and right camera views.
%
Further information on Active Parking Assist
functions (/ page 198).
Operating a function with the favorites pose
Requirements:
R
To call up favorites: there is at least one
favorite.
R
The area for recognition of the favorite's
pose is above the center console at the
height of the climate control vents and the
media display. The hand should have a dis‐
tance of at least 4 in (10 cm) from the media
display.
R
The pose is held for a brief time.
Calling up favorites
A pose calls up a favorite.
The driver and front passenger can connect two
different favorites with the V pose.
%
If a favorite has not yet been saved and con‐
nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the
multimedia system will assist you.
258
MBUX multimedia system
Carrying out the V pose
#
Position the hand above the center console
and in the direction of the media display. The
back of the hand is facing upwards. In doing
so the index and middle finger are extended
with the other fingers bent inwards.
The favorite is called up.
Switching the reading light for the driver and
front passenger on/off using gesture mode
Requirements:
R
The function is available when it is dark.
R
The gesture is carried out in the interaction
area (under the inside rearview mirror).
Briefly moving the hand up and down under the
inside rearview mirror switches the reading light
specifically for the driver or front passenger on
or off.
Carrying out operation of the reading light
#
Move the hand up and down vertically under
the reading light.
The reading light is switched on or off.
Switching the search light for the driver
on/off using gesture mode
Requirements:
R
The front passenger seat is not occupied.
R
The function is available when it is dark.
R
The gesture is completed in the interaction
area (front-passenger seat).
R
The seat belt on the front passenger seat
must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.
Stretching out with the hand over the front
passenger seat when unoccupied switches a
search light on for the driver when it is dark.
Pulling the hand back switches the search light
off again.
Interaction area for operating the search light
#
To switch on: reach across the front
passenger seat with your hand.
The search light is switched on for the driver.
MBUX multimedia system
259
#
To switch off: take your hand back away
from the front passenger seat.
The search light is switched off again.
Settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Interior Assistant
#
To switch on full functionality of the
MBUX Interior Assistant: select On.
The option is activated #.
#
To activate additional functions for read‐
ing and search lights: select Including
Reading Light.
When the option is switched on, the display
button is activated.
The functions for the reading and search
lights are activated in addition to the proxim‐
ity functions.
#
To switch off the MBUX Interior Assis‐
tant: select Off.
The option is activated #.
Main functions
Calling up applications
1
y button
Calls up vehicle functions
2
z button
Calls up navigation
3
| button
Calls up radio or media
4
% button
Calls up the telephone
5
ß button
Press briefly: calls up favorites
(/ page 268)
Press and hold: adds a favorite
(/ page 268) or creates a new theme
(/ page 265)
Alternatively in the home screen: when you
start the vehicle the home screen is shown in
the media display.
#
Select the application by swiping and tap‐
ping.
or
#
In any display: press the © button on the
Touch Control or on the touchpad.
or
#
Tap on the © symbol on the touchscreen.
The applications are displayed.
#
Select the application by swiping and tap‐
ping.
Changing the arrangement of applications on
the home screen
#
Call up the home screen.
260
MBUX multimedia system
#
Touch and hold an application on the
touchscreen until symbols appear.
#
Tap on = or ; and move the applica‐
tion in the menu.
#
Tap on ø.
Profile
Notes on profiles
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during adjustment of the driver's seat
after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment
of the driver's seat to the position saved
under the profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
pants could be injured in the process.
#
Make sure that when the position of
driver's seat is being adjusted using the
multimedia system, no people or body
parts are in the seat's range of move‐
ment.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐
ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐
ately:
#
a) Tap the warning message on the
media display.
or
#
b) Press a memory position button or a
seat adjustment switch on the driver's
door.
The adjustment process is stopped.
The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrap‐
ment feature.
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will
not be set after calling up the driver's profile.
Overview of profiles
Using the multimedia system up to seven pro‐
files can be created in the vehicle.
Profiles store your personal vehicle settings and
settings for the multimedia system.
If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the
driver can select their profile before the journey,
without changing the settings of other drivers.
You can select the profile:
R
When entering (/ page 264)
R
Using the home screen (/ page 249)
The profile settings are activated as soon as a
profile is selected.
%
When you call up your profile, the driver's
seat and outside mirrors can be set.
If you call up your profile when driving then
the driver's seat position will not be adjus‐
ted.
You can cancel the setting process with the
following actions:
R
Tap on the Positioning Seat and Steering
Wheel… Please tap to cancel. warning on
the media display.
R
Press one of the seat operating buttons
in the driver's door.
Profile content
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
ing settings can be stored in your profile, for
example:
R
Driver's seat and mirror settings
MBUX multimedia system
261
R
Driver's seat memory
R
Radio (including station list)
R
Last destinations
R
Climate control
R
Ambient lighting
R
DYNAMIC SELECT I (individual)
R
Instrument Display, Head-up Display and
style (display style of the multimedia system)
R
Themes, suggestions and favorites
%
Settings for driver assistance systems can‐
not be saved in the profile.
Mercedes me connect profile
If you use a profile from Mercedes me connect,
the following online functions are available, for
example:
R
You can configure the settings in the vehicle
using the Mercedes me app and the
Mercedes me portal.
R
You can synchronize your profile on
Mercedes me connect with the profile in the
vehicle (/ page 263).
R
You can add a personal profile photo that is
shown in the vehicle.
R
You can take your profile and some of your
settings with you in new vehicles.
Requirements for using Mercedes me con‐
nect profiles:
For the vehicle owner:
R
You have a Mercedes me user account.
R
The vehicle has been connected with the
user account.
R
The personalization service is activated.
For additional users of the vehicle:
R
You have a Mercedes me user account.
R
The vehicle owner has invited you to connect
your user account on Mercedes me with that
of his vehicle.
R
You have accepted the invitation.
Creating a new profile
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
f Profiles
#
Select W Create Profile.
#
Select an avatar.
#
Enter the name and confirm with a.
#
Select Continuer.
#
To save the current settings in a profile:
select Current Settings.
#
Select Save.
or
#
To adopt the factory settings: select Fac-
tory Settings.
#
Select Save.
%
Further information on setting a user profile
(/ page 263).
#
Activate Bluetooth
®
and select Connect
Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the
user profile (/ page 334).
You can also set up a user profile without regis‐
tering a mobile phone.
#
Select Finish.
The user profile is saved.
262
MBUX multimedia system
Selecting profile options
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
f Profiles
#
Select Ä for a profile.
#
To edit a profile: select Edit Profile.
#
Select an avatar.
#
Change the name, if necessary.
#
Select Save.
#
To configure suggestions: select Sugges-
tion Settings (/ page 267).
#
To reset favorites or themes: select Reset
Favorite to Factory Settings or Reset
Themes to Factory Settings.
#
Select Yes.
#
To reset a profile: select Reset Profile to
Factory Settings.
#
Select Yes.
#
To delete a profile: select Delete Profile.
#
Select Yes.
%
The guest profile cannot be deleted.
Protecting profile content
To protect your profile content and settings you
can create a PIN in the Mercedes me portal for
your profile. When PIN protection is active, you
have to enter the PIN to select your profile.
#
Select Protect Content.
#
Select Mercedes me Portal.
The browser opens and you are transferred
to the Mercedes me portal.
Selecting a profile
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
f Profiles
%
When you call up your profile, the driver's
seat and outside mirrors can be set.
You can cancel the setting process with the
following actions:
R
Tap on the Positioning Seat and Steering
Wheel… Please tap to cancel. warning on
the media display.
R
Press one of the seat operating buttons
in the driver's door.
#
Select a profile.
#
Press the a button to confirm the mes‐
sage.
The profile is loaded and activated.
%
Alternatively, the profile can already be
selected when the vehicle is entered
(/ page 264).
Synchronizing a profile
Requirements:
R
You have a Mercedes me user account.
R
The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes
me user account.
R
The personalization service is activated on
Mercedes me connect.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
f Profiles
5
General Settings
Synchronization enables the following:
R
You can configure the vehicle settings using
the Mercedes me app.
R
The profile on Mercedes me connect and the
profile in the vehicle are aligned (profile man‐
agement).
MBUX multimedia system
263
#
Activate Synchronize Profiles Automatically.
The profiles in the vehicle are automatically
synchronized with the profiles on Mercedes
me connect when the ignition is switched on
and off.
or
#
Select Synchronize Profiles Now.
After selecting this option, the profiles in the
vehicle are synchronized with the profiles on
Mercedes me connect.
%
During synchronization the profile list and
the profile functions are blocked.
%
Note on data protection: if you do not wish
to share your data with Mercedes me, make
sure that the automatic synchronization is
switched off and do not select Synchronize
Profiles Now.
Showing the profile selection when entering
Requirements:
R
At least one profile has been created.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
f Profiles
If the option is activated, you can see a profile as
soon as you get in.
#
Select General Settings.
#
Activate Show Profile Selection When Get-
ting In.
When the vehicle is started, the media dis‐
play shows the active profile.
Themes
Overview of themes
You can configure the vehicle settings according
to your preferences and save as a theme. A
theme can be called up any time via the home
screen. There is then no need to make the
desired settings again.
There are pre-defined themes available, e.g.
Journey, Efficiency and Lounge.
Example for the use of themes
For recurring driving situations, such as long
drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer‐
red settings in a theme in the vehicle.
You can save the following settings in a theme,
for example:
R
Displays (e.g. navigation map or tachometer)
R
Preferred radio station
R
Favored drive program
These settings are saved under the name you
wish when setting up a theme (/ page 265). On
the next freeway journey you can select this
theme and thereby restore your settings.
Content of a theme
Depending on vehicle equipment the following
settings can be saved in a theme:
R
Setting of the Instrument Display
(/ page 214)
R
Setting of the Head-up Display (/ page 226)
R
Setting of the ambient lighting (/ page 118)
R
Active audio source, e.g. radio or USB
264
MBUX multimedia system
R
Starting screen for the media display
R
Visual style (/ page 281)
R
DYNAMIC SELECT drive program
(/ page 140)
R
Eco start/stop setting (/ page 138)
R
Navigation system settings
%
A theme contains the currently active set‐
tings in the vehicle.
Calling up themes
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
When the home screen is shown, swipe up
until THEMES appears.
#
Select a theme.
Creating new themes
Requirements:
R
The settings which are to be saved in the
theme are active.
The overview shows the settings which can
be saved in a theme (/ page 264).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
THEMES
#
Select W Create Theme.
The settings which are saved in the theme
are shown.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select additional settings which are to be
saved in the theme.
R
Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐
tings in the theme.
R
Select Navigation (Navigation), to save
the active navigation settings in the
theme.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select an entry screen.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select an image.
#
Enter the names into the entry field and con‐
firm with a.
#
To save a theme: select Save.
When the maximum number that can be
saved is reached:
#
Select a from the prompt.
#
Select a theme that should be overwritten.
The settings which are saved in the theme
are shown.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select additional settings which are to be
saved in the theme.
R
Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐
tings in the theme.
R
Select Navigation (Navigation), to save
the active navigation settings in the
theme.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select an entry screen.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select an image.
#
Enter the names into the entry field and con‐
firm with a.
#
To save a theme: select Save.
MBUX multimedia system
265
Creating using the ßß rocker switch or but‐
ton
#
Press and hold the bottom section of the
ß rocker switch on the steering wheel.
or
#
Press and hold the ß button next to the
touchpad.
#
Select W Create Theme.
The settings which are saved in the theme
are shown.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select additional settings which are to be
saved in the theme.
R
Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐
tings in the theme.
R
Select Navigation (Navigation), to save
the active navigation settings in the
theme.
#
Select Continue r.
#
Select an image.
#
Enter the names into the entry field and con‐
firm with a.
#
To save a theme: select Save.
Modifying themes
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
When the home screen is shown, swipe up
until THEMES appears.
#
Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu is
shown.
#
Select Rename.
#
Enter the name.
#
Select Save✓.
Moving themes
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
When the home screen is shown, swipe up
until THEMES appears.
#
Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu is
shown.
#
Select Move.
#
Tap on = or ;.
#
Tap on ø.
Moving the themes menu in the home screen
#
Select ©.
#
Swipe upwards and select Set New Order.
#
Select Themes.
#
Tap on 9 or :.
#
Tap on ø.
Deleting themes
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
When the home screen is shown, swipe up
until THEMES appears.
#
Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu is
shown.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Suggestions
Suggestions overview
The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver.
Based on previously used functions, the most
likely navigation destinations, media sources,
266
MBUX multimedia system
radio stations or contacts are offered under
SUGGESTIONS.
Suggestions are shown when the following
requirements are fulfilled:
R
A profile has been created (/ page 262).
R
A profile has been selected.
R
You have accepted data recording.
R
From the beginning of usage, the multimedia
system must analyze the user habits. When
sufficient data is collected then the sugges‐
tions are available.
If the requirements mentioned are not fulfilled, a
preview with a description of the function
appears in the SUGGESTIONS menu.
You can configure data recording (/ page 267)
or delete the suggestions recorded
(/ page 268).
Calling up suggestions
Requirements:
R
A profile has been created and is selected
(/ page 263).
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is
shown.
#
Select a navigation destination, a media
source, a radio station or a contact.
If route guidance is already active, you can‐
not start a new route guidance or set an
intermediate destination for the existing
route.
Configuring suggestions
Requirements:
R
To protect settings using a PIN: your pro‐
file is connected with Mercedes me and your
Mercedes me account is PIN protected.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
f Profiles
#
Select u for a profile.
#
Select Suggestion Settings.
#
To switch suggestions display on/off:
switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow
Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Sug-
gestions on or off.
If an option is switched on, suggestions for
navigation destinations, media sources, radio
stations or contacts are shown.
If the option is switched off, no suggestions
are shown.
#
To deactivate the learn function for one
day: activate 24h Learning Deact..
For 24 hours no new actions will be trained
and no data recorded for the active profile.
Suggestions will continue to be shown. The
remaining time is shown next to 24h Learn-
ing Deact..
Before the time runs out, a message is
shown that the multimedia system will con‐
tinue the learn function shortly.
Example: if the option is switched on and a
route to a new destination has been calcula‐
ted, this destination would not be taken into
account for the learn function.
#
To reset the suggestion history: select
Reset Suggestion History.
MBUX multimedia system
267
%
This process cannot be reversed.
#
Select Yes.
#
To protect settings with a PIN: switch on
PIN Protection.
If PIN protection is switched on, you must
enter the Mercedes me PIN to set the sug‐
gestions. This PIN will be set in the Mercedes
me portal for the personalization service to
protect your personal settings.
Renaming suggestions
Only navigation destinations can be renamed.
#
Tap on the © symbol in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is
shown.
#
Highlight a navigation destination and press
until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
#
Select Rename.
#
Enter the name.
#
To confirm the entry: select Yes.
Deleting a suggestion
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is
shown.
#
Highlight a suggestion and press until the
OPTIONS menu is shown.
#
Select Delete.
The query as to whether the suggestion is
deleted temporarily or permanently appears.
#
If the suggestion should be shown again
at a later time: select Not Now.
#
If the suggestion should not be shown
again: select Never.
Favorites
Overview of favorites
Favorites offer you quick access to frequently
used applications. It is possible to create 20
favorites in total.
You can select favorites from categories or you
add favorites directly from an application.
Calling up favorites
In the media display
#
Tap on ©.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
On the steering wheel or the touchpad
#
Press the ß rocker switch on the steering
wheel down.
or
#
Press the ß button next to the touchpad.
Adding favorites
Selecting favorites from categories
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
#
Select W Create Favorite.
The categories are displayed.
#
Select the category.
The favorites are displayed.
268
MBUX multimedia system
#
Select a favorite.
The favorite is stored at the next available
position.
#
All positions in the favorites are taken:
confirm the message shown with OK.
A list shows all the favorites.
#
Select a favorite which should be overwrit‐
ten.
Adding a favorite from an application
Examples of adding from an application are:
R
Saving a contact.
R
Storing a radio station.
R
Adding a media source.
R
Saving a navigation destination.
R
Adding an ENERGIZING comfort program (if
available).
#
To save a contact as a global favorite:
select a contact (/ page 340).
The details are displayed.
#
Press on a telephone number until the
OPTIONS menu is shown.
#
Select Save as Favorite.
The contact is added as a favorite.
#
To store a radio station as a global favor‐
ite: set a radio station (/ page 375).
#
Press on the radio station until the OPTIONS
menu is shown.
#
Select Save as Favorite.
The radio station is added as a favorite.
Renaming favorites
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
#
Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu
is shown.
#
Select Rename.
#
Enter the name.
#
Select OK.
Moving favorites
Moving favorites in the favorites menu
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
#
Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu
is shown.
#
Select Move.
#
Move the favorite to the new position.
#
Tap on ø.
Moving the favorites menu in the personali‐
zation
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until Set New Order is shown.
#
Select Set New Order.
#
Move Favorites to the new position.
#
Tap on ø.
Deleting favorites
#
Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown.
#
Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
#
Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu
is shown.
MBUX multimedia system
269
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Notifications Center
Overview of the Notifications Center
The following communications are collected in
the Notifications Center:
R
Communications which are generated by the
vehicle or from multimedia system.
R
Communications which are received through
the use of services.
The following notification types are available for
you:
R
Navigable destinations and routes
R
Messages (text messages)
R
System information, e.g. Important Software
Update Available
R
Other notifications, e.g. from additional
online services that can be subscribed to
The 3 Notifications Center can be found on
the home screen, in menus and at the top right
of the navigation map (/ page 249).
Newly received messages will be indicated with
a star in the 3 symbol.
Notifications are normally briefly shown as they
are received. This occurs for nearly every appli‐
cation that you are currently using. If you take
no action, these are stored for future access in
the Notifications Center.
The notifications are sorted chronologically. The
most recent notifications are at the top.
A notification shows the following information:
R
Symbol or image 1 for the application
R
Title 2, which contains the name, a tele‐
phone number or a navigation destination,
for example
R
The service and additional information 3
R
A time stamp 5
R
If several actions are available, symbol 4 to
open or close the notification.
Depending on the type of notification, up to four
different actions 6 are available.
Examples of actions include:
R
Read aloud
R
Placing a call
R
Reply
R
Calling up a web page
R
Navigation
Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination,
are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary
to carry out available actions directly on the
270
MBUX multimedia system
receipt of the notifications. A route guidance can
be started at a later time.
%
You can start a global search in the Notifica‐
tions Center (/ page 272).
Calling up notifications
Opening the Notifications Center
#
On the touchpad: swipe down with two fin‐
gers.
or
#
On the touchscreen: tap on the 3 sym‐
bol for the Notifications Center.
or
#
On the Touch Control and on the touch‐
pad: mark the 3 symbol for the Notifica‐
tions Center by swiping.
#
Press on the control element.
Selecting a notification
#
Swipe up or down.
#
Tap or press on the control element.
Calling up old notifications
If notifications have not been called up after four
hours, these are stored in the archive.
#
Swipe upwards and select Archive.
#
Select the notification.
Closing the Notifications Center
#
On the touchpad: swipe up with two fingers.
Selecting actions for a notification
The following options are available:
R
Select the action directly in an application
after a notification is received and shown.
R
Select the action later after calling up in the
Notifications Center.
#
An action is available: select the action.
#
Several actions are available: if the notifi‐
cation is not open, select the V symbol.
#
Select the action.
The notification is still available.
#
If Additional information is available, select
the action.
Additional information is shown in a window
as text, image or text and image.
#
To close the window: select OK.
Editing notifications
#
Call up the Notifications Center
(/ page 271).
#
To make settings: select Z.
%
If no settings can be made, a message
appears.
#
Select the service.
#
Switch the options on or off.
The following options are available:
R
Allow Notifications
R
Display in Notification Center
R
Show Notifications
R
Acoustic Notifications
When Allow Notifications is switched on, the
other options cannot be selected.
MBUX multimedia system
271
#
To delete: touch a message on the
touchscreen and slide to the left or right.
or
#
Select E.
#
Select Delete or Delete All.
Delete deletes a single notification.
Delete All deletes all notifications currently
shown.
#
With O you will exit delete mode.
Global search
Global search overview
You can use the global search in the home
screen and in the notifications.
The global search provides search results for the
following categories:
R
Navigation
R
Entertainment
R
Telephone, social media
R
User interface and Digital Operator's Manual
R
Internet
This enables you to search for cities, roads and
tourist attractions with the navigation system,
for example.
%
You can also search for 3 word addresses
(/ page 297).
When you enter a 3 word address in the
global search, separate each of the words
with a space or a full stop.
During the entry process the most likely sugges‐
tions are shown beneath the search field. When
you enter "S", "Stuttgart", "Steak" and "Sandra"
are shown, for example. If you select "Stuttgart",
you receive the suggestions "Starbucks", "Steak"
and "City railway", for example.
The search results in the list are shown, sorted
according to category. Next to the category is
the number of results. You will be shown the
best results from each category. Additional
results can be found after selecting the respec‐
tive category.
If you confirm an entry with OK, all categories
and the number of results will be shown in a
summary. After selecting a category you can
select the search results within the category.
When you select a search result the detailed
view opens. In the detailed view you can choose
whether and which actions you want to carry out
with the respective search result. For example,
you can start route guidance or place a call to
somebody. The actions are named correspond‐
ingly.
The search can be carried out with the following
input methods:
R
Entering characters using the on-screen key‐
pad
R
Entering characters with handwriting recog‐
nition
R
Dictation function
Using the global search
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
Select ª Search.
or
#
Call up the notifications (/ page 271).
#
Select Search.
272
MBUX multimedia system
#
Enter the search term into the search field.
During the entry process the three most
likely suggestions are offered beneath the
search field.
In the list on the right, the top two search
results are shown for each category.
%
Use the character input function
Alternatively, you can use the p dictation
function for the search.
#
To accept a suggestion: select the sugges‐
tion.
The three most likely suggestions are
offered.
#
Continue the search or accept a suggestion.
#
To accept the second search result: select
the search result.
An action starts or a list is shown.
#
Select a search result or an action in the list.
#
To show all categories: select OK.
#
To show search results for a category:
select a category.
#
To show details: select a search result.
#
To start an action: select an action.
After selection of an action, a track is played
back or the route to a destination is calcula‐
ted, for example.
Switching the sound on/off
On the multifunction steering wheel
On the multimedia system
#
To mute: press volume control 1.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line
of the media display.
You will also hear traffic announcements and
navigation announcements even when the
sound is muted.
MBUX multimedia system
273
#
To switch on: turn volume control 1 or
change the media source.
Adjusting the volume
Adjusting with the control knob
On the multifunction steering wheel
On the multimedia system
#
Turn volume control 1.
The volume of the current volume group (e.g.
entertainment) is set. The volume of other
groups can be adjusted separately.
Adjust the volume in the following situations:
R
during a traffic announcement
R
during a navigation announcement
R
during a telephone call
Setting in the menu
#
Press the © button on the Touch Control
or on the touchpad.
#
Select Settings.
#
Select System.
#
Select Audio.
#
Select a volume setting.
#
Set the volume.
Entering characters
Using the character input function
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
274
MBUX multimedia system
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Requirements:
R
For the handwriting recognition read-
aloud function: the multimedia system is
equipped with a voice control system.
R
The read-aloud function is available for the
selected system language.
R
The handwriting recognition read-aloud func‐
tion is activated.
Character entry can be carried out with these
control elements:
R
Touch Control
R
Touchscreen (media display)
R
Touchpad
Character input can be started with a control
element and resumed with another.
#
When the keypad is shown, enter the charac‐
ters on the control element by swiping and
pressing or by tapping (touchscreen).
or
#
Write the characters on the touchpad or the
touchscreen.
The touchpad supports character input with the
following functions:
R
Handwriting recognition offers character sug‐
gestions.
R
If the read aloud function is activated for
handwriting recognition then the entered
characters are read aloud.
Examples of character entry:
R
Renaming a favorite
R
Looking for search results in the global
search.
R
Entering a destination address in the naviga‐
tion system
R
Entering a web address
Entering characters on the touchpad
Requirements:
R
If you wish to have the character input read
aloud: the read aloud function of the hand‐
writing recognition is switched on
(/ page 253).
R
An online connection is required for some
functions.
MBUX multimedia system
275
Using the keyboard
1
Input line
2
Shows suggestions during input (if available)
3
Deletes an entry
4
Deletes
Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the last
character entered
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
5
Accepts an entry
6
Switches to handwriting input
7
Enters a space
8
Changes the keyboard language
9
Switches to special characters
A
Switches to digits and additional special
characters
ABC Switches to letters (level 2)
B
Pressing or pressing briefly switches
between upper-case and lower-case letters
Pressing and holding switches to upper-case
letters permanently
If available, the p symbol allows you to
change to voice input.
%
When Touchpad Tap is switched on D,
tapping is sufficient to select a character or
an option (/ page 253).
#
Call up the character entry to rename a
favorite, for example (/ page 269).
276
MBUX multimedia system
#
Select the character by swiping and pressing.
The character is entered in input line 1.
Suggestions are shown in 2.
#
To select a suggestion: select one of the
entries.
#
Resume character input.
#
To enter an alternative character: press
and hold a character.
#
Select the character.
#
To end character input: press the G but‐
ton.
%
The available editing functions depend on
the editing task, the language set and the
character level.
%
Entry using the keyboard can also be com‐
pleted using the Touch Control.
Using handwriting input
1
Input line
2
Shows suggestions during input
3
Deletes an entry
4
Deletes
Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the last
character entered
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
MBUX multimedia system
277
5
Enters a space
6
Switches to input using the keyboard
7
Accepts an entry
8
Writes characters on the drawing surface
If available, the p symbol allows you to
change to voice input.
%
When Touchpad Tap is switched on D,
tapping is sufficient to select an option
(/ page 253).
#
Call up the character entry to rename a
favorite, for example (/ page 269).
#
When the keyboard is displayed, select v.
#
Write the character on the touchpad with a
finger.
The character is entered in input line 1.
Suggestions are shown in 2.
#
To select a suggestion: select one of the
entries.
#
Resume character input. The letters can be
written next to each other or above each
other.
#
To end character input: press the G but‐
ton.
Entering characters on the touchscreen
Requirements:
R
If you wish to have the character input read
aloud: the read aloud function of the hand‐
writing recognition is switched on
(/ page 253).
R
An online connection is required for some
functions.
278
MBUX multimedia system
Using the keyboard
1
Input line
2
Shows suggestions during input (if available)
3
Deletes an entry
4
Deletes
Pressing briefly deletes the last character
entered
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
5
Accepts an entry
6
Switches to handwriting input
7
Enters a space
8
Changes the keyboard language
9
Switches to special characters
A
Switches to digits and additional special
characters
ABC Switches to letters (level 2)
B
Pressing or pressing briefly switches
between upper-case and lower-case letters
Pressing and holding switches to upper-case
letters permanently
If available, the p symbol allows you to
change to voice input.
#
Call up the character entry to rename a
favorite, for example (/ page 269).
The keyboard is shown.
MBUX multimedia system
279
#
Briefly press on a character.
The character is entered in input line 1.
Suggestions are shown in 2.
#
To select a suggestion: select one of the
entries.
#
If available, display additional suggestions
with q or r.
#
Resume character input.
#
To enter an alternative character: press
and hold a character.
#
Select the character.
#
To end character entry: press briefly on
G.
%
The available editing functions depend on
the editing task, the language set and the
character level.
Using handwriting input
1
Input line
2
Shows suggestions during input
3
Deletes an entry
4
Deletes
280
MBUX multimedia system
Pressing briefly deletes the last character
entered
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
5
Enters a space
6
Switches to input using the keyboard
7
Accepts an entry
8
Writes characters on the drawing surface
If available, the p symbol allows you to
change to voice input.
#
Call up the character entry to rename a
favorite, for example (/ page 269).
#
When the keyboard is displayed, select v.
#
Write the character with one finger on the
touchscreen.
The character is entered in input line 1.
Suggestions are shown in 2.
#
To select a suggestion: select one of the
entries.
#
If available, display additional suggestions
with q or r.
#
Resume character input. The letters can be
written next to each other or above each
other.
#
To end character entry: press briefly on
G.
Setting the keyboard for character entry
Multimedia system:
4
Settings
5
System
5
Controls
5
Keyboards and Handwriting
#
Confirm Select keyboards.
Select the keyboard language in the list.
System settings
Display
Configuring display settings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Designs & Display
Setting the design
#
Select Designs.
#
Select Classic, Sport or Progressive.
The multimedia system display changes
depending on the style selected. If you revert
to the factory settings, the Classic style is
set.
#
To adjust the ambient lighting to a style:
select Ambient Lighting Adjustment.
This function adjusts the ambient lighting for
the selected display style.
Setting the display brightness
#
Select Display Brightness.
#
Select a brightness value.
Switching the display off/on
#
Off: select Display Off.
#
On: press a button, %, for example.
Selecting the display design
#
Select Day/Night Design.
#
Select Automatic, Day Design or Night
Design.
MBUX multimedia system
281
Switching the temperature display on/off
#
Select Temperature Display.
#
Select Outside Temp. or Coolant Temp..
The selected temperature is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Time and date
Setting the time and date automatically
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Time and Date
#
Deactivate Manual Time Adjustment.
The time and date are set automatically for
the selected time zone and summer time
option.
%
The correct time is required for the following
functions:
R
Route guidance with time-dependent
traffic guidance.
R
Calculation of expected time of arrival.
Setting the time zone
Requirements:
R
For the manual time zone: Automatic Time
Zone is switched off.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Time and Date
Setting the time zone manually
#
Select Time Zone:.
The list of countries is displayed.
%
If there are several time zones available in a
country, these will be shown after the coun‐
try is selected.
#
Select a country and, if required, a time
zone.
The time zone set is displayed after Time
Zone:.
Setting the time zone automatically
#
Activate Automatic Time Zone.
Setting the time and date format
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Time and Date
5
Set Format
#
Set the date and time format #.
Setting the time and date manually
Requirements:
R
The Manual Time Adjustment function is
switched on.
R
For setting the date manually: no GPS is
installed in the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Time and Date
Setting the time (without time zone)
#
Select Set Time.
#
Set a time.
Setting the time (with time zone)
#
Select Set Time.
282
MBUX multimedia system
If a time zone is set the time is set automatically
using the time zone. The time can be adjusted by
a maximum of plus or minus 60 minutes.
#
Adjust the time using the slide control.
Setting the date
#
Select Set Date.
#
Set a date.
%
In vehicles with GPS, a date cannot be set
even with active manual time adjustments.
The date is then set automatically through
the selected time zone.
Bluetooth
®
Information about Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transfer up to approximately
32.8 ft (10 m).
You can use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system and use the fol‐
lowing functions, for example:
R
Hands-free system with access to the follow‐
ing options:
-
contacts (/ page 339)
-
call lists (/ page 342)
R
Internet connection (/ page 359)
R
Listening to music via Bluetooth
®
audio
(/ page 370)
R
Transferring business cards (vCards) into the
vehicle
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
%
Internet connection via Bluetooth
®
is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
®
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
#
Switch Bluetooth on or off.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with
a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or
other network devices.
The following connection options are available:
R
Wi-Fi connection
The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable
device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or
a tablet PC is established.
R
Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
can be connected, for example. The connec‐
ted device can use the data tariff of the vehi‐
cle. A maximum of three devices can be con‐
nected with the hotspot at the same time.
%
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external
devices is not available in all countries.
To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐
lowing methods:
R
WPS PIN
MBUX multimedia system
283
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a PIN.
R
WPS PBC
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made by pressing a button (push button).
R
Security key
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a security key.
Setting up Wi-Fi
Requirements:
R
To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul‐
timedia system with new devices: there is
no communication module installed.
R
The device to be connected supports one of
the three means of connection described.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
#
Select Wi-Fi.
If Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the
multimedia system with external hotspots. If
Wi-Fi is deactivated, communication via Wi-Fi
to all devices is interrupted. This also means
that a connection to the communication
module cannot be established. Then some
functions such as dynamic route guidance
with Live Traffic Information are not availa‐
ble.
Connecting the multimedia system with a
new device via Wi-Fi
This function is available if a communication
module is not installed.
The type of connection established must be
selected on the multimedia system and on the
device to be connected.
%
The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
tions that are shown in the display. Further
information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
#
Select Internet Settings.
#
Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
#
Select Add Hotspot.
Connecting using a security key
#
Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
#
Select Connect Using Security Key.
#
Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
#
Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
tem.
#
Confirm the entry with ¡.
%
All devices support a security key as a
means of connection.
Connecting using a WPS PIN
#
Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
284
MBUX multimedia system
#
Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.
The multimedia system generates an eight-
digit PIN.
#
Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
#
Confirm the entry.
Connecting using a button
#
Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
#
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
#
Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected (see the man‐
ufacturer's operating instructions).
#
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected.
#
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection
#
Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
#
Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network.
#
Activate Permanent Internet Connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi
#
Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
#
Select a Wi-Fi network.
The connection is established again.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-
Fi hotspot
The type of connection established depends on
the device to be connected. The function must
be supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of connec‐
tion established must be selected on the multi‐
media system and on the device to be connec‐
ted.
#
Select Vehicle Hotspot.
#
Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation
#
Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation.
#
Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry
#
Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.
#
Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button
#
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
#
Press the push button on the device to be
connected (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
#
Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key
#
Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
A security key is displayed.
#
Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MB
Hotspot XXXXX network name.
#
Enter the security key which is shown in the
media display on the device to be connected.
#
Confirm the entry.
MBUX multimedia system
285
Connecting using NFC
#
Select Connect via NFC.
#
Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
#
Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of
the vehicle (/ page 336).
#
Select Finished.
The mobile device is now connected to the
multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Generating a new security key
#
Select Vehicle Hotspot.
#
Select Generate Security Key.
A connection will be established with the
newly created security key.
#
To save a security key: select Save.
When a new security key is saved, all existing
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If
the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐
lished, the new security key must be entered.
System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language affects
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐
tion announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
® Language
#
Set the language.
%
If you are using Arabic map data, the text
information can also be shown in Arabic on
the navigation map. To do so, select  as
the language from the language list. Naviga‐
tion announcements are then also made in
Arabic.
Setting the distance unit
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Units
#
Select km or mi.
#
In the multifunction display of the Instrument
Display, switch the Additional Speedometer
display on.
Data import and export
Data import/export function
The following functions are possible:
R
Transferring data from one system or vehicle
to another system or vehicle.
R
Creating a backup copy of your personal data
and loading it again.
R
Protecting your personal data against unwan‐
ted export with PIN protection.
%
Please note that the NTFS file system is not
supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
mended.
286
MBUX multimedia system
Importing/exporting data
*
NOTE Loss of data due to premature
removal
#
Do not remove the data storage
medium when data is being exported.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is stationary.
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
A USB device is connected.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
System Backup
#
Select Import Data or Export Data.
Importing
#
Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to overwrite the current data. If data
originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐
nized during data reading.
#
Confirm the prompt.
The files are imported. The multimedia system is
restarted once the data has been imported.
%
Current vehicle settings can be edited after
the import.
Exporting
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
ted.
#
Enter the four-digit PIN.
#
Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to carry out the export.
#
Confirm the prompt.
The data is exported. The data export may
take several minutes.
%
After successful export, the data is saved in
the "MyMercedesBackup" directory which
can be found on the storage medium.
Activating/deactivating PIN protection
Requirements:
R
To unlock the PIN: there is an Internet con‐
nection.
R
A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
R
An individual user profile is active
(/ page 263).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
PIN Protection
Setting the PIN
#
Select Set PIN.
#
Enter a four-digit PIN.
#
Enter the four-digit PIN again.
If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.
Changing the PIN
#
Select Change Settings.
#
Enter the current PIN.
#
Select Change PIN.
MBUX multimedia system
287
#
Set a new PIN.
Activating PIN protection for data export
#
Select Protect Data Export.
Activate or deactivate the function.
Unblocking the PIN via the Mercedes me por‐
tal
If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three
times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a
single-use password sent to you via the
Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the
PIN protection.
#
Select Unlock PIN.
#
Enter the single-use password.
PIN protection is reset, and you can set a
new PIN.
Software update
Information on software updates
A software update consists of three steps:
R
Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation
R
Installation of the update
R
Activation of the update by restarting the
system
The multimedia system provides a message
when an update is available.
Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
ous updates:
Software updates
Source of the
update
Update type
InternetNavigation map, sys‐
tem updates, Digital
Operator's Manual
External storage
medium, e.g. USB
flash drive
Navigation maps
%
Installation can take several minutes and
cancellation is not possible. If you do not
install the software updates then the status
of your vehicle will not be up-to-date. During
the installation, individual functions or con‐
trol elements are not available or only availa‐
ble to a limited degree.
Advantages of updating software
Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐
ogy is up-to-date.
In order to improve the quality of our services
you will receive future updates for your multime‐
dia system, the Mercedes me connect services
and your vehicle's communication module.
These will conveniently be sent to you via the
mobile phone connection in your vehicle and, in
many cases, installed automatically. You can
monitor the status of your updates at any time
on the Mercedes me portal and find information
about potential innovations.
Your advantages at a glance:
R
Conveniently receive software updates via
the mobile phone network
R
Improves the quality and availability of
Mercedes me connect services
R
Keeps your multimedia system and communi‐
cation module up-to-date
288
MBUX multimedia system
Further information about software updates can
be found at https://me.mercedes-benz.com
Performing a software update
Requirements:
R
For online updates: an Internet connection
is established (/ page 359).
R
For automatic online updates: your vehicle
has a permanently installed communication
module.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Software Update
Automatically
#
Activate Automatic Online Update.
The updates will be downloaded and installed
automatically.
The current status of the updates is dis‐
played.
Manually
#
Switch off Automatic Online Update.
#
Select an update from the list and start the
update.
Activating the software update
#
Restart the system.
The modifications from the software update
will be active.
Function of important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for
the security of your multimedia system's data.
Install these updates, or else the security of your
multimedia system cannot be ensured.
%
If automatic software updates are activated,
the system updates will be downloaded auto‐
matically (/ page 289).
As soon as an update is available for download,
a corresponding message appears on the media
display.
You have the following selection options:
R
Accept and Install
The update will be downloaded in the back‐
ground.
R
Information
Information about the pending system
update is displayed.
R
Later
The update can be downloaded manually at a
later time (/ page 289).
Deep system updates
Deep system updates access vehicle or system
settings and can therefore only be carried out
when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is
switched off.
If the download of a deep system update is com‐
pleted and the update is ready for installation,
you will be informed of this after the next igni‐
tion cycle, for example.
%
Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location
before starting the installation.
Requirements for the installation:
R
The ignition is switched off.
R
Notes and warnings have been read and
accepted.
R
The electric parking brake is applied.
MBUX multimedia system
289
If all requirements are met, the update will be
installed. The multimedia system cannot be
operated while the update is being installed and
vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the
multimedia system automatically attempts to
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is not possible, a symbol
appears on the media display. Please consult a
qualified specialist workshop to resolve the
problem.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐
tion)
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Reset
Personal data is deleted, for example:
R
Station presets
R
Connected mobile phones
R
Individual user profiles
%
The guest profile is reset when the settings
are restored to the factory settings.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
#
Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings. If you have set a PIN for your sys‐
tem, this will also be reset.
Navigation
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation (Navigation)
#
Alternatively: press the z button.
The map appears. The current vehicle posi‐
tion is shown. The navigation menu is shown.
The navigation menu is hidden if route guid‐
ance is active.
Showing/hiding the navigation menu
4
©
5
Navigation
If route guidance is not active the map appears.
The navigation menu is shown.
The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance
is active.
#
To show: tap on the touchscreen.
or
#
Press the Touch Control or the touchpad.
#
To hide: the navigation menu is hidden auto‐
matically.
290
MBUX multimedia system
Navigation overview
Example: digital map with navigation menu
1
To enter a POI or address and additional des‐
tination entry options
2
To interrupt route guidance (if route guid‐
ance is active)
3
To repeat a navigation announcement and
switch navigation announcements on or off
4
To call up the ON THE WAY menu
• To show Route Overview
• To select Alternative Routes
• Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X)
• To call up the TRAFFIC menu
♢ To show Traffic Announcements
♢ To show Area Alerts
♢ To show Live Traffic Subscription Info
• To show Route List
• To call up the POSITION menu
♢ Save Position
♢ To show Compass
5
Quick-access and settings
• To show Traffic
• To show Parking
MBUX multimedia system
291
• To show Highway Information
• Via Advanced options to use View,
Announcements and Route
%
The options are not available in all countries.
%
You can enter 3 word addresses in the online
search (/ page 297). This option is not
available in all countries.
Destination entry
Notes on destination entry
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Entering a POI or address
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Requirements:
R
For the online search: Mercedes me con‐
nect is available.
R
You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me portal.
R
The vehicle has been activated for use of
Mercedes me connect and you have accep‐
ted the terms and conditions for the service.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
R
The service is available.
292
MBUX multimedia system
R
The service has been activated at an author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
On-board search with the keypad
Destination entry uses the on-board search of
the database stored in the multimedia system.
The federal state or province in which the vehicle
is located is set 1.
#
Enter the POI or the address using the key‐
board (in the image) or using handwriting
recognition 6 in input line 2. The entries
can be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
offered in 3 by the multimedia system. Des‐
tination selection takes place in list 3 or
with a 5.
If the multimedia system is equipped with a
small display, calling up list 3 is carried out
using a list symbol at the top right.
The following entries can be made, for exam‐
ple:
R
City, street, house number
R
Street, city
MBUX multimedia system
293
R
ZIP code
R
POI name
R
POI categories, e.g. Gas Station
R
City, POI name
R
Telephone number, if this is available for
the POI
R
Contact name
#
Alternatively, use voice input 8.
#
To switch to handwriting recognition:
select 6.
#
Write the character on the touchpad. The let‐
ters can be written next to each other or
above each other (/ page 275).
#
To return to entry using the keyboard:
select _.
or
#
Press the touchpad.
#
To delete an entry: select 4.
The characters are deleted individually.
or
#
If characters have been entered in 2, select
£ next to the input line.
The complete entry is deleted.
#
To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐
ters: select B.
#
To switch to digits, special characters
and symbols: select A.
123 changes to ABC.
Display B changes to #+=.
#
Select B and switch to additional special
characters.
#
To enter a space: select 7.
#
To set the language: select 9.
#
Select the language.
%
This function is useful for countries in which
several character sets are supported. An
example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and
Latin characters.
#
To change the state: select indicator for
federal state or province 1.
#
Select the state in 1.
#
Enter the country indicator, e.g. CA for Can‐
ada.
The list is filtered.
#
Select the country on list 3.
The destination can be entered.
#
To change the state or province: select the
state or the province in list 3.
#
To accept a destination: select the destina‐
tion in list 3.
#
If the destination is ambiguous, select the
destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
Using online search
%
Requirements: there is an Internet connec‐
tion.
Further information on Mercedes me:
http://www.mercedes.me
Online search is not available in all countries.
Destination entry uses online map services. If
the on-board search finds no suitable destina‐
tions or if you change countries, the online
search is available.
294
MBUX multimedia system
For the destination you can enter an address, a
POI or a 3 word address.
%
Enter a 3 word address (/ page 297).
#
Select country indicator 1.
#
Select the provider for the online service
from the countries list.
or
#
If the on-board search delivers no results,
enter the destination in the input line. The
entry order is not relevant, e.g. street and
city. Use the functions described for the on-
board search.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed.
Selecting previous destinations
Requirements:
R
Previous destinations are stored.
R
For destination suggestions: you have cre‐
ated a profile (/ page 262).
R
The Allow Destination Suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 267).
R
The multimedia system has already gathered
sufficient data in order to show destination
suggestions.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
PREV. DESTINATIONS
The following entries can be selected in the pre‐
vious destinations:
R
Destination suggestions (/ page 314)
R
Destinations
R
Routes
#
Select the destination or route
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
%
You can save a previous destination or a des‐
tination suggestion as a favorite
(/ page 314).
Using the favorites, you have quick access to
the destinations (/ page 298).
Selecting a POI
Requirements:
R
For use of personal POIs: a USB device is
connected with the multimedia system.
R
Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format
(.gpx) have been saved in the "PersonalPOI"
folder on the USB device.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
POIS
Searching using categories (no route guid‐
ance)
#
Select the category.
or
#
Select All Categories.
#
Select the category and the sub-category (if
available).
The search takes place in the vicinity of the
vehicle's current position. The search result
are sorted by distance in ascending order.
The POIs show the following information:
R
direction of the linear distance to the POI
(arrow)
R
name of POI
MBUX multimedia system
295
R
linear distance to the POI
#
To filter according to categories or in
search results: enter a search entry in the
ª Search text field.
#
Select a POI from the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
Searching using categories (route guidance
active)
#
Select the category.
or
#
Select All Categories.
#
Select the category and the sub-category (if
available).
#
To filter according to categories or in
search results: enter a search entry in the
ª Search text field.
#
Select the search positions In the Vicinity,
Near Destination or Along the Route.
#
If there are intermediate destinations for the
route and Near Destination has been selec‐
ted, select the search position in the route
overview.
#
Select a POI from the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
Searching for personal POIs
#
Select Personal POIs.
#
Select a category.
#
If route guidance is active, select a search
position In the Vicinity, Near Destination or
Along the Route.
#
Select a personal POI.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
or
#
Enter a search entry into the search field and
filter the list.
#
Select a personal POI.
Editing personal POI categories
#
Select a personal POI category from the list
s.
A menu opens.
#
To change a name: select Change Name.
#
Enter the name.
#
Select a.
#
To change a symbol: select Change Icon.
#
Select a symbol.
#
To delete a personal POI category: select
Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Configuring categories for quick-access
You can configure the categories for quick-
access.
If you calculate the route, for example, the first
three of these categories can be selected as
symbols.
#
Select All Categories.
#
Select the category and the sub-category (if
available).
#
Select f or ß.
f adds the category.
ß removes the category.
#
If all available quick-access positions are full,
select the category to be replaced.
296
MBUX multimedia system
Selecting a contact for destination entry
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system (/ page 334).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
CONTACTS
Using the contact list
#
Select a contact.
The contact details are displayed.
#
Select the address.
Using search entry
#
Enter a name or telephone number, for exam‐
ple, into the search field.
#
Select a.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select the address.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
%
Route guidance to a contact address is relia‐
ble in the following cases:
R
the contact address is complete.
R
the contact data matches the map data
in the digital map.
Entering geo-coordinates
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
GEO-COORDINATES
#
Select Latitude or Longitude.
#
Select geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and
seconds. To do this swipe up or down
respectively.
The map shows the position.
#
Confirm the entry with a.
#
To set the destination: select ¥ or
¦.
#
Calculate the route (/ page 299).
Entering the destination as a 3 word address
Requirements:
R
Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is possible in the online search
(/ page 292).
R
The media display shows an Internet connec‐
tion with a double-arrow symbol in the status
line.
%
Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is not possible in all countries and
in all languages.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
#
Select the country indicator.
#
Select the provider for the online service
from the countries list.
or
#
If the on-board search delivers no search
results, enter the destination address as a 3
word address. Separate each of the words
with a full stop.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
MBUX multimedia system
297
%
3 word addresses from what3words are an
alternative addressing system for multilin‐
gual georeferencing of global locations with
a resolution of three meters. Using this grid,
locations on the Earth's surface are included
which do not have a building address such
as street and house number, for example.
The Empire State Building has this language
dependent 3 word address:
R
English: parade.help.bleat
R
French: commun.verbe.bisquer
R
Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca
3 word addresses are unique, easy to
remember and suffice for most routine appli‐
cations.
You can convert addresses to 3 word
addresses and back again:
R
at the website http://what3words.com
R
in the what3words apps
Selecting a destination on the map
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
#
Move the map (/ page 320).
#
Using the touchscreen: press and hold on
the touchscreen.
The destination address is shown.
If several destinations are located at the
selected position, a list shows the available
roads and POIs.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
#
Using the touchpad: when the crosshair
marks the destination, press and hold on the
control element.
The destination address is shown.
If several destinations are located around the
crosshair, a list shows the available roads
and POIs.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map
If several destinations are located around the
crosshair, the function is available.
#
Select Ä.
#
Select POIs in the Vicinity.
The map appears.
#
Swipe left or right on the control element.
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the
map. The name or the address is shown.
#
Select the POI symbol.
or
#
To filter the display according to the POI
category: scroll on the control element.
#
Select the POI category.
Selecting a destination from favorites
Requirements:
R
Destinations are saved as favorites.
Save a previous destination or a destination
suggestion as a favorite (/ page 314).
298
MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
FAVORITES
#
Select a favorite.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
The following options are available in the favor‐
ites menu:
R
Saving addresses for home and work
R
Creating favorites
R
Deleting favorites
#
If no address has been saved for home
and work: select Home or Work.
#
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
#
Enter the favorite as a POI or address
(/ page 292).
#
To save a favorite: select Add Favorites.
#
Enter the favorite as a POI or address
(/ page 292).
or
#
If all the positions in the favorites are full,
first select a favorite which is to be overwrit‐
ten (/ page 268).
#
Follow the instructions provided.
#
To delete a favorite: select V for a desti‐
nation.
#
Select Delete.
or
#
Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu
is shown.
#
Select Delete.
Selecting received destinations
Requirements:
R
There is an Internet connection.
R
A destination has been sent to the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
REC. DESTINATIONS
The vehicle can receive destinations from serv‐
ices or apps.
#
Select a destination.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
%
You can save a received destination in the
favorites (/ page 314).
You have fast access to the destinations via
the favorites (/ page 298).
Deleting a received destination
#
To delete a destination: select V for a
destination.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
#
To delete all destinations: select Ä.
#
Select Delete All.
#
Select Yes.
Route
Calculating a route
Requirements:
R
The destination has been entered.
R
The destination address is shown.
MBUX multimedia system
299
1
¥ No route yet
¦ A route has been mapped
#
Select ¥.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#
Select ¦.
If a route is already mapped, a prompt is
shown.
#
Select Set as Way Point.
The selected destination address is set as
the next intermediate destination. Route
guidance begins.
If there are already four intermediate destina‐
tions, the multimedia system asks whether
intermediate destination 4 should be deleted.
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
or
#
Select Start New Route Guidance.
The selected destination address is set as a
new destination. The previous destination
and the intermediate destinations are
deleted. Route guidance to the new destina‐
tion begins.
Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the des‐
tination shown
%
The POI symbols to the right of POIs in the
Vicinity show the first three categories for
quick-access. You can configure these cate‐
gories (/ page 295).
#
Select a POI symbol.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select a POI.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
or
#
Select POIs in the Vicinity r.
#
Search using categories, enter a search entry
or search for a personal POI (/ page 295).
#
Select a POI.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
Other menu functions
#
To save the destination: select f.
#
Select an option.
The following options are available:
R
Save in "Previous Destinations"
R
Save as Favorite
R
Save as "Home"
R
Save as "Work"
#
To call the destination: if a telephone num‐
ber is available, select Call.
#
To share the destination using NFC or QR
code: select Share via NFC or QR Code.
#
Hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see
manufacturer's operating instructions) on the
300
MBUX multimedia system
mat or place the mobile phone on it
(/ page 336).
or
#
Hold the mobile phone near to the multime‐
dia system and scan the QR code.
#
To call up an Internet address: if a web
address is available, select www.
#
To show on the map: select Show on Map.
Selecting a route type
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Route
#
Select the route type.
If no route has been created, the next route
is calculated on the basis of the new route
type.
If a route has already been created, the route
is calculated on the basis of the new route
type.
The following route types are available:
R
Fast
A route with a quick journey time is calcula‐
ted.
R
Short
A route with a short driving distance is calcu‐
lated.
R
Eco
An economical route is calculated. The jour‐
ney time may be somewhat longer than for
quicker routes.
R
Trailer
The option is available if a trailer has been
coupled with the vehicle.
A prompt is shown in the multimedia system.
Confirm the prompt.
The route is optimized for trailer operation
with a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Traffic information can be taken into account
for the route types:
#
Select Dynamic Route Guidance r.
#
Select Automatic, On Request or Off.
Explanation of the options:
R
Automatic
The route is calculated with the currently set
route type.
Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are
taken into account (/ page 315).
Live Traffic Information is not available in all
countries.
R
On Request
A prompt appears when a new route is detec‐
ted with a shorter journey time based on traf‐
fic reports. You can continue to use the cur‐
rent route or use the dynamic route instead
(/ page 302).
R
Off
No traffic reports are taken into account for
the route.
Calculating alternative routes
#
Activate Suggest Alternative Route.
The display button is activated. Alternative
routes are calculated for every route.
#
Select an alternative route (/ page 305).
MBUX multimedia system
301
Accepting a detour recommendation after a
prompt
Requirements:
R
On Request is switched on (/ page 301) in
the DYNAMIC ROUTE GUIDANCE menu.
R
Route guidance is active.
R
There are traffic reports for the current
route.
If a new route with a shorter driving time is
determined, the current and new routes will be
shown.
The notification is shown in another application.
Confirm the notification.
#
To accept the new route: select Accept
Recommended Detour.
#
To maintain the current route: select Keep
to Current Route.
Selecting route options
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Route
Avoiding areas
#
Select Avoid Options.
#
Select Avoid Areas (/ page 323).
Avoiding or using highways, ferries, tunnels,
motorail trains, unpaved roads
#
Select Avoid Options.
#
Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
To avoid: the display button is activated. The
route avoids highways, for example.
To use: the display button is off. The route
takes highways into consideration, for exam‐
ple.
These route options are not available in every
country.
The selected route options cannot always be
taken into account. Therefore, a route may
include a ferry, for instance, even though the
Avoid Ferries avoid option is enabled. A mes‐
sage then appears and you will hear a corre‐
sponding message.
Avoiding or using toll roads
#
Select Avoid Options.
#
Select Toll Roads.
#
Switch Avoid All on or off.
To avoid: the display button is activated. The
route avoids all toll roads.
To use: the display button is off. The route
takes into account all roads that require the
payment of a usage fee (toll).
or
#
To avoid a type of payment: select Avoid.
The route avoids all toll roads with the selec‐
ted method of payment.
#
To use a type of payment: select Use.
The route takes into account all toll roads
with the selected method of payment.
These route options are not available in every
country.
302
MBUX multimedia system
Using carpool lanes
When using carpool lanes, observe the applica‐
ble legal requirements as well as any conditions
pertaining to when and where such lanes may be
used. Carpool lanes may only be used if certain
conditions are met.
Carpool lanes are not available in all countries.
#
Select Avoid Options.
#
Select Carpool Lanes.
#
Select For Two Occupants or For 3 Occu-
pants or More ·.
or
#
Select On Request ·.
When this option is selected and a carpool
lane is available, a prompt appears. You can
continue to use the current route or select a
route with the carpool lane.
%
If the Avoid option is selected, then no car‐
pool lanes will be used for the route.
Selecting notifications for the route
Requirements:
R
For an audible indication when approach‐
ing a personal POI: the USB device contains
personal POIs.
R
The USB device is connected with the multi‐
media system.
R
The category in which the personal POI
belongs is activated.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Announcements
#
Switch No Driving Recomm. on or off.
No navigation announcements are issued
when the display button is switched on.
#
To select a navigation announcement:
select an option # under the DRIVING REC-
OMMENDATION category.
The following options are available:
R
Tone Only
In place of the spoken navigation
announcement you hear a gong. The
gong signals an upcoming driving maneu‐
ver and also sounds during the driving
maneuver.
R
Reduced Driving Recomm.
If a navigation announcement is available,
you hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn
right".
R
Detailed Driving Recomm.
If a navigation announcement is available
and the Announce Street Names option is
switched on, you hear a complete
announcement, e.g. "In 600 ft (200 m) at
the end of the street turn right into Sta‐
tion Road".
#
To have street names announced during
a driving maneuver: switch on Announce
Street Names.
#
Select Reduced Driving Recomm. or
Detailed Driving Recomm..
The name of the street into which you should
turn is announced.
%
The options in the DRIVING RECOMMENDA-
TION category are not available in every
country and in all languages.
MBUX multimedia system
303
Selecting messages for TRAFFIC
#
Activate a message.
The display button is activated.
The following options are available:
R
Traffic Incidents
Traffic incidents are announced, e.g.
roadworks and road blocks.
This function is not available in all coun‐
tries and languages.
R
Announce Traffic Warnings
Warning messages are announced, e.g.
before tailbacks that pose a risk (if availa‐
ble).
This function is not available in all coun‐
tries and languages.
Audible indication when approaching a per‐
sonal POI
#
Select the Personal POIs option in the
ALERTS category.
#
Activate a category.
The display button is activated. When
approaching a personal POI in this category
an audible indication will be issued.
Showing destination information for the
route
Requirements:
R
A destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
#
Select Route Overview.
When route guidance is active, the destina‐
tion and intermediate destinations are
shown, if these have been entered and not
yet been passed.
The route can include up to four intermediate
destinations.
#
Select a destination or an intermediate desti‐
nation.
The following information is displayed:
R
Remaining driving distance
R
Time of arrival
R
Remaining journey time
R
Name, destination address
R
Phone number (if available)
R
Web address (if available)
Planning routes
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Route Overview
#
Select Set Way Point.
#
Enter the intermediate destination as a POI
or address, for example (/ page 292).
#
Select the intermediate destination.
After selection of an intermediate destina‐
tion, the route overview is shown again.
#
Calculate the route with intermediate desti‐
nations(/ page 305)
%
If there are already four intermediate desti‐
nations, delete an intermediate destination
(/ page 304).
Editing a route with intermediate destina‐
tions
Requirements:
304
MBUX multimedia system
R
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Route Overview
#
To change the sequence of destinations:
select V for a destination.
A menu opens.
#
Select Move.
ø is highlighted.
#
Move the intermediate destination or the
destination with 4 or s to the desired
position.
#
Tap on ø.
#
To delete a destination: select V for an
intermediate destination or destination.
#
Select Delete.
The destination is deleted.
Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
nations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Route Overview
#
Select Start Route Guidance.
or
#
If the route has been edited, select To Navi-
gation G.
#
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
The route is calculated. Route guidance
begins.
Displaying the route list
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
#
Select Route List.
The route sections are displayed. The current
vehicle position is marked on the map.
The current vehicle position is shown with
the following information:
R
The a symbol for the current vehicle
position is displayed.
R
The name of the road on which you are
currently driving is shown.
R
The road number of the road on which
you are currently driving is shown.
The route list is updated during the journey.
#
To show route sections: swipe up or down
on the control element.
The route section is shown on the map.
Selecting an alternative route
Requirements:
R
The Suggest Alternative Route option is
switched on (/ page 301).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
#
Select Alternative Routes.
The routes are displayed in accordance with
the setting made in the route settings.
The routes are numbered.
#
Select the alternative route.
#
To show the route on the map: select
Show on Map.
MBUX multimedia system
305
#
Move the map (/ page 320).
#
Set the map scale (/ page 319).
#
To avoid or use route options: select Ä.
#
Switch the route option, e.g. Highways, on or
off.
To avoid: the display button is activated. The
alternative route avoids highways.
To use: the display button is off. The alterna‐
tive route uses highways.
Activating a commuter route
Requirements:
R
You have created a profile (/ page 262).
R
The Allow Destination Suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 267).
R
The Activate Commuter Route option is
switched on.
R
The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐
cient data in order to show destination sug‐
gestions.
R
Routes have been learned for these destina‐
tion suggestions.
%
This commuter route is not available in all
countries.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Route
#
Activate Activate Commuter Route.
The display button is activated. The naviga‐
tion system automatically detects that the
vehicle is on a commuter route. It automati‐
cally starts a route guidance without voice
output.
For the daily commuter route, traffic inci‐
dents on the route are also reported when
driving without active route guidance.
Switching the automatic gas station search
on/off
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
Vehicle
#
Switch Gas Station Search on or off.
When the fuel reserve level is reached, and
the display button is switched on, a message
appears to start searching for gas stations.
Starting an automatic gas station search
Requirements:
R
The automatic gas station search is activated
(/ page 306) .
Driving situation
The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the
reserve fuel level.
The following notification is shown in the media
display Reserve Fuel Tap here to search for gas
stations.
#
Confirm the notification.
The automatic gas station search begins. The
available gas stations along the route or in
the vicinity of the vehicle's current position
are displayed.
#
Select a gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
#
Calculate the route (/ page 299).
The gas station is set as the destination or
the next intermediate destination.
306
MBUX multimedia system
#
If there are already four intermediate des‐
tinations: select Yes in the prompt.
The gas station is entered in the route over‐
view. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted.
Route guidance begins.
Starting the automatic service station
search
Requirements:
R
ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest Rest
Area function are activated (/ page 206).
R
There are service stations along the route
section ahead.
Driving situation
The following notification is shown in the media
display ATTENTION ASSIST Tap here to search
for rest areas.
#
Confirm the notification.
The service station search starts. The availa‐
ble service stations along the route or in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position are
displayed.
#
Select a service station.
The service station address is displayed.
#
Calculate the route (/ page 299).
The service station is set as the destination
or the next intermediate destination.
#
If there are already four intermediate des‐
tinations: select Yes in the prompt.
The service station is entered in the route
overview. Intermediate destination 4 is
deleted. Route guidance begins.
Showing a stored route on the map
Requirements:
R
A USB device with stored routes is connec‐
ted with the multimedia system
(/ page 370).
R
The route is stored in the "Routes" folder
with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
SAVED ROUTES
#
Select a route.
#
Select Show on Map.
#
Move the map (/ page 320).
Starting a saved route
Requirements:
R
A USB device with stored routes is connec‐
ted with the multimedia system
(/ page 370).
R
The route is stored in the "Routes" folder
with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
SAVED ROUTES
#
Select a route.
#
Select Start Route Guid. from Beginning of
Route or Start Route Guidance from Curr.
Position.
Route guidance starts.
%
The route can be saved with f in the
menu (/ page 299).
Recording a route
Requirements:
R
A USB device is connected with the multime‐
dia system (/ page 370).
MBUX multimedia system
307
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
SAVED ROUTES
#
To start recording: select Start Recording a
New Route.
A red recording symbol is shown.
The route is stored on the USB device.
#
To stop recording: select End Recording.
Saving a recorded route
Requirements:
R
A USB device is connected with the multime‐
dia system (/ page 370).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
SAVED ROUTES
#
Select a route.
#
Select f.
#
Select Save in "Previous Destinations".
The route is stored in the "Previous destina‐
tions" memory and can be called up from
there for route guidance.
Editing a stored route
Requirements:
R
A USB device with stored routes is connec‐
ted with the multimedia system
(/ page 370).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
SAVED ROUTES
#
Select a route with V.
#
To enter a name: select Change Name.
#
Enter the name.
#
Select OK.
or
#
When the name has been changed, press the
G button.
#
Select Yes.
#
To delete a route: select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Route guidance
Notes on route guidance
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated.
308
MBUX multimedia system
The road and traffic rules and regulations always
have priority over multimedia system driving
instructions.
Driving instructions are:
R
Navigation announcements
R
Route guidance displays
R
Lane recommendations
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if
you leave the calculated route, a new route is
calculated automatically.
Driving instructions may differ from the actual
road and traffic conditions if:
R
The route is diverted
R
The direction of a one-way street has been
changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi‐
tions.
The route may differ from the ideal route due to
the following:
R
Roadworks
R
Incomplete digital map data
Notes on GPS reception
The correct function of the navigation system
depends amongst other things on GPS recep‐
tion. In certain situations GPS reception can be
impaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. in
tunnels or in parking garages.
Changing direction overview
Changes of direction are shown in the following
displays:
R
Detailed image of the intersection
The display appears when you drive into an
intersection.
R
3D image
The display appears when driving on inter‐
section-free, multi-lane roads, for example on
freeway exits and freeway interchanges.
Example: 3D image of the upcoming change
of direction
1
Driving maneuver
2
Maneuver point, above this the current dis‐
tance to the change of direction
3
Current vehicle position
There are three phases when changing direction:
R
Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes
of direction, the multimedia system prepares
you for the upcoming change of direction. A
navigation announcement is issued depend‐
MBUX multimedia system
309
ing on the settings for driving recommenda‐
tions, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".
Select navigation announcements for driving
recommendations (/ page 303).
The map appears in full-screen mode.
The status line shows: the direction informa‐
tion or the name of the road which is to be
turned into and the distance to the change of
direction.
R
Announcement phase
The multimedia system announces the
upcoming change of direction depending on
the settings for driving recommendations,
e.g. by announcing "In 600 ft (200 m) at the
end of the street turn right into Station
Road".
The display is split into two parts. The map is
displayed on the left; on the right, there is a
detailed image of the intersection or a 3D
image of the upcoming change of direction.
R
Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
nent change of direction depending on the
settings for driving recommendations, e.g. by
announcing "Now turn right".
The display is split into two parts.
The change of direction takes place when the
distance to maneuver point 2 is shown with
0 ft (0 m) and the symbol for vehicle position
3 has reached maneuver point 2.
When the change of direction is complete,
the map appears in full-screen mode.
%
Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.
Lane recommendations overview
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
The multimedia system can show lane recom‐
mendations if the digital map contains the rele‐
vant data.
1
Lane not recommended (gray arrow)
2
Possible lane (white arrow)
3
Recommended lane (white arrow, blue back‐
ground)
Explanation of the displayed lanes:
R
Lane not recommended 1
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without chang‐
ing lane.
R
Possible lane 2
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction.
R
Recommended lane 3
310
MBUX multimedia system
In this lane, you will be able to complete both
the next change of direction and the one
after that.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
Bus lanes are also shown.
%
Lane recommendations can also be dis‐
played in the Instrument Display and in the
Head-up Display.
Using freeway information
Requirements:
R
The Highway Information option is switched
on (/ page 322).
When driving on the freeway, upcoming freeway
facilities 1 and available service facilities 2
are shown in the overview. These include park‐
ing lots, service stations and freeway exits, for
example.
#
To open the display: select r.
The entries are sorted according to increas‐
ing distance from the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
#
To close the display: tap on the map.
or
#
To use freeway information: select an
entry.
#
If several service facilities are available,
select a service facility from the list.
The destination address and the map posi‐
tion are shown.
#
Calculate the route (/ page 299).
or
#
Search for a POI in the vicinity.
or
#
Use other functions, e.g. save the destination
address of the service facility.
Using quick-access for a destination informa‐
tion, alternative route and POIs
Requirements:
R
The POI categories for quick-access are con‐
figured (/ page 295).
#
If route guidance is active, select the £
symbol with arrival time and distance to the
destination on the map.
The address of the destination or the next
intermediate destination is shown.
Using alternative routes
#
Select Alternative Route.
The routes are displayed in accordance with
the setting made in the route settings.
The routes are numbered.
#
Select the alternative route.
Setting a POI as an intermediate destination
#
Select a category symbol, e.g. B for a
parking lot.
MBUX multimedia system
311
#
Select a POI from the list.
The selection takes place on the route. The
destination address is shown. The route can
be calculated.
#
To use POI categories for quick-access:
select a search position In the Vicinity, Near
Destination or Along the Route.
#
Select a POI from the list.
or
#
Enter a search entry into the search field and
filter the list.
#
Select a POI from the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
Saving the current vehicle position
#
Select Save Position.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Previous destinations" memory.
Destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
Í checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.
The navigation menu is shown.
When an intermediate destination has been
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐
tion flag with the number of your Î inter‐
mediate destination. Route guidance is contin‐
ued.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
#
To switch off: turn the volume control on
the steering wheel or next to the touchpad
during a navigation announcement
(/ page 273).
The Voice Guidance has been deactivated.
message appears.
or
#
Show the navigation menu (/ page 290).
#
Select !.
The symbol changes to #.
#
To activate: select # .
The current navigation announcement is
played.
The symbol changes to !.
%
This function can be added and called up
from the favorites within the navigation cate‐
gory.
Switching navigation announcements on or
off during a phone call
#
Press the © button on the steering wheel
or on the touchpad.
or
#
Tap on © in the media display.
#
Select Settings.
#
Select System.
#
Select Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Voice Guidance During Call on or off.
When the option is switched on, the display
button is activated.
#
To leave the menu: select q.
Adjusting the volume of navigation
announcements
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Audio
5
Navigation and Traffic Announcements
#
Select Voice Guidance Volume.
312
MBUX multimedia system
#
Set the volume.
#
To leave the menu: select q.
Route guidance is active
#
Turn the volume control on the steering
wheel or next to the touchpad during a navi‐
gation announcement.
Switching audio fadeout on or off during nav‐
igation announcements
#
Press the © button on the steering wheel
or on the touchpad.
or
#
Tap on © in the media display.
#
Select Settings.
#
Select System.
#
Select Audio.
#
Switch Audio Fadeout on or off.
When the option is switched on, the display
button is activated.
#
To leave the menu: select q.
Repeating navigation announcements
Requirements:
R
A route has already been created.
R
Route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation (Navigation)
#
Select !.
#
Select #.
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.
%
This function can be added and called up
from the favorites within the navigation cate‐
gory.
Canceling route guidance
Requirements:
R
a route has already been created.
R
route guidance is active.
#
Show the navigation menu.
#
Select ¤ in the navigation menu
(/ page 291).
Overview of route guidance to an off-road
destination
An off-road destination is within the digital map.
The map contains no roads that lead to the des‐
tination.
You can enter geo-coordinates or a 3 word
address for off-road destinations on the map.
Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐
ble with navigation announcements and displays
on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
Shortly before you reach the last known position
on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement, for example.
The display shows a direction arrow and the lin‐
ear distance to the destination.
Overview of route guidance from an off-road
location to a destination
In an off-road position, the current vehicle posi‐
tion is located within the digital map on roads
that are not available.
MBUX multimedia system
313
The following displays appear when route guid‐
ance begins:
R
A message appears that the road is not on
the map.
R
A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐
tion to the POI.
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Overview of off-road status during route
guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of the road. In such cases,
the multimedia system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle's current position on
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.
When the vehicle is off-road, the following dis‐
plays are shown:
R
A message appears that the road is not on
the map.
R
A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐
tion to the POI.
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Destination
Saving the current vehicle position
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Position
#
Select Save Position.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Last destinations" memory.
Using quick-access
#
If route guidance is active, select the £
symbol with arrival time and distance to the
destination on the map.
The address of the destination or the next
intermediate destination is shown.
#
Select Save Position.
Editing the previous destinations
Requirements:
R
To edit destination suggestions: the Allow
Destination Suggestions option is activated
(/ page 267).
R
The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐
cient data in order to show destination sug‐
gestions.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
ª Where to?
5
PREV. DESTINATIONS
The following entries can be edited:
R
Destination suggestions
R
Destinations
R
Routes
#
To no longer display a destination sugges‐
tion: select V for a destination sugges‐
tion.
#
Select No Longer Suggest.
Saving the last destination as a favorite
%
After saving, the destination can be called
up via the favorites (/ page 268).
#
Select V for a destination.
314
MBUX multimedia system
#
Select f Save as Favorite.
#
To save as a favorite: select Save as Favor-
ite .
#
To save as "Home" address: select Save
as "Home" .
#
To save as "Work" address: select Save as
"Work" .
Deleting a previous destination
#
To delete a destination: select V for a
destination.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
#
To delete all destinations: select Ä.
#
Select Delete All.
#
Select Yes.
Using external destinations and routes
External destinations and routes can be received
from the following sources, for example:
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
R
door-to-door navigation with the Companion
app (USA)
R
a call with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center via the me button
(/ page 352)
A prompt appears on the media display.
Received destinations and routes are saved in
the previous destinations.
#
A destination has been received: select
Yes.
#
Calculate the route.
#
If route guidance is already active, select Set
as Way Point or Start New Route Guidance.
or
#
If a destination was received with photo
information, select Start Route Guidance.
#
Calculate the route.
or
#
If a destination has been received from an
app, select Details.
#
Calculate the route.
#
A route has been received: select Yes.
#
Select Start Route Guid. from Beginning of
Route or Start Route Guidance from Curr.
Position.
Route guidance starts from the selected
position.
Route guidance with current traffic reports
Traffic information overview
Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic
Information and are used for route guidance.
This service is unavailable in some countries.
%
There may be differences between the traffic
reports received and the actual road and
traffic conditions.
Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐
tion:
R
Current traffic reports are received via the
Internet connection.
R
The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
lar intervals.
R
Information from the service provider can be
shown (/ page 316).
MBUX multimedia system
315
Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are
sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the
quality of the traffic reports.
If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi‐
tion, you have the following options:
R
You deactivate the service in the Mercedes
me portal.
R
You have the service deactivated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Showing information from the service pro‐
vider for Live Traffic Information
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic
Information.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Traffic
#
Select Provider Information.
The logo of the service provider for Live Traf‐
fic Information is shown.
%
Further information on Live Traffic Informa‐
tion can be called up on the home screen
using Mercedes me & Apps (/ page 356).
%
You have the following options for extending
the subscription:
R
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
with a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐
tomer Assistance Center via the me but‐
ton
Showing traffic information
Requirements:
R
The Traffic display is switched on
(/ page 317).
R
The following traffic displays are switched on
(/ page 317):
Traffic Incidents
Free Flowing Traffic
Delay
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
Select Navigation.
The map shows the following traffic information:
R
traffic incidents, for example:
-
roadworks
-
road blocks
-
warning messages
When route guidance is active, the symbols
for traffic incidents will be shown in color on
the route. Off the route they are gray.
R
warning message symbols:
-
Symbol Ô
-
road safety notes, e.g. when approaching
the end of a traffic jam
If the vehicle approaches a danger area
on the route, a warning message is dis‐
played on the map. In addition, an audible
notification can follow a hazard warning.
R
traffic flow information:
316
MBUX multimedia system
-
traffic jam (red line)
-
slow-moving traffic (orange line)
-
heavy traffic (yellow line)
-
free-flowing traffic (green line)
R
display for traffic delays on the route lasting
at least one minute
Displaying traffic incidents
Requirements:
R
The Traffic Incidents display is switched on
(/ page 317).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Traffic
#
Select Traffic Announcements.
If there are traffic reports, you will see a list.
Traffic reports include accidents and other
traffic events, for example. The list is sorted
according to distance and shows the traffic
reports received both on and off the route.
A traffic report shows the following informa‐
tion:
R
Street number or street name
R
Traffic incident symbol
On the route: color
Off the route: gray
R
Cause
R
Street symbol for a traffic incident on the
route
R
Distance from current vehicle position
#
Select a traffic report r.
The detailed information is shown, for exam‐
ple the route section.
Showing traffic incidents in the vicinity of
the map
#
Select a traffic incident symbol on the map.
The details about the traffic incident are dis‐
played.
#
Select Ä.
#
Select Traffic Incidents in Vicinity.
The map shows the traffic incident symbols
in the vicinity.
Traffic incident information is displayed in
the status line:
R
Traffic incident symbol
R
Cause of the traffic incident, e.g. con‐
struction work
R
Warning message (highlighted red)
#
To select a traffic incident symbol: select
q or r.
#
To select a map section: tap on the
touchscreen.
or
#
Press the Touch Control or the touchpad.
#
Move the map.
#
To return to the navigation map: tap on
G.
or
#
Press the G button on the Touch Control
or on the touchpad.
Switching the traffic information display on
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
#
Activate Traffic.
The display button is activated.
MBUX multimedia system
317
Activating Incidents, Free Flow and Delay
#
Select Advanced.
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Elements.
#
In the TRAFFIC category, activate the Traffic
Incidents, Free Flowing Traffic and Delay
entries.
The display buttons are activated.
If traffic information has been received, then
traffic incidents such as roadworks, road
blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn‐
ing messages are displayed.
The traffic delay is displayed for the current
route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
longer are taken into consideration.
Showing local area messages
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Traffic
#
Select Area Alerts.
Local area messages are shown, for example
fog or heavy rain.
#
Select a local area message.
The details are displayed.
Car-to-X-Communication
Car-to-X-Communication overview
The following requirements apply for using Car-
to-X-Communication:
R
The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia
system featuring navigation and a communi‐
cation module with an activated, integrated
SIM card.
R
Car-to-X-Communication is activated.
%
Car-to-X-Communication is available in
selected countries.
The communication module automatically estab‐
lishes an Internet connection once the ignition is
switched on. If there are any hazard warnings,
they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depend‐
ing on the mobile phone connection, the provi‐
sion takes place from within a second up to
about a minute.
Benefits of Car-to-X-Communication:
R
Hazards are recognized automatically in the
background by the vehicle or may be repor‐
ted by the driver. These are then sent to vehi‐
cles with Car-to-X-Communication in the
immediate vicinity.
R
If available, current details relating to hazard
spots near the vehicle's current position are
received.
This gives you sufficient time to adapt your
driving style to the traffic conditions.
The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the
regular transmission of vehicle data to Daimler
AG. The data is then immediately pseudony‐
mized by Daimler AG. The vehicle data is deleted
after an appropriate amount of time has elapsed
(several weeks) and is not stored permanently.
%
Data which serves as identification is
replaced during the pseudonymization proc‐
ess. In this way, your identity is protected
against access by unauthorized third parties.
318
MBUX multimedia system
Displaying hazard warnings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation (Navigation)
If hazard warnings are available these can be
shown as symbols on the map. The display
depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf-
fic Incidents options.
#
Set the options (/ page 317).
The following displays are available:
R
Show all symbols.
The Traffic and Traffic Incidents options are
switched on.
R
Only show symbols on the expected route.
The Traffic option is switched off, the Traffic
Incidents option is switched on.
R
Show no symbols.
The Traffic Incidents option is switched off.
The following hazard warnings are shown on the
map:
R
Broken-down vehicles
R
Accidents
R
Hazardous weather
R
General hazards
R
Hazard warning lights, when switched on
R
Crosswind warning
%
If the vehicle is approaching a hazard spot
with a vehicle speed of at least 37 mph
(60 km/h) the voice output "Traffic incident
ahead" is issued.
The voice output is not issued for hazardous
weather.
Sending hazard warnings
Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent
by the vehicle.
#
To send a hazard warning yourself: tap on
the media display when the map is shown.
The navigation menu is shown.
#
Select ¡.
#
Select Report Traffic Incident.
A prompt is shown.
#
Select Yes.
The Thank You for Supporting Accident Pre-
vention message appears.
Map and compass
Setting the map scale
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
Zooming in
#
When the map is shown, tap twice quickly
with one finger on the media display or the
touchpad.
or
#
Move two fingers apart on the media display
or on the touchpad.
Zooming out
#
Tap with two fingers on the media display or
the touchpad.
or
#
Move two fingers together on the media dis‐
play or on the touchpad.
%
You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page 286).
MBUX multimedia system
319
Moving the map
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
#
On the touchscreen: move the finger in any
direction when the map is shown.
#
On the touchpad: call up the navigation
menu by pressing.
#
Swipe your finger up.
#
Press the touchpad.
Crosshair 1 appears. The map can be
moved.
#
Touch the touchpad and move your finger in
any direction.
The map moves in the opposite direction
under crosshair 1.
When the map has been moved the following
information appears in the status line, for exam‐
ple:
R
Distance 2 from the vehicle's current posi‐
tion is shown.
R
Information about the current map position
is shown, e.g. the name of the road.
The following functions are available:
R
Select a destination on the map
(/ page 298).
R
Select a POI (/ page 295).
R
Show traffic incidents on the map
(/ page 317).
#
To reset the map to the current vehicle
position: select 3.
Rotating the map
#
With two fingers, rotate counter-clockwise or
clockwise on the media display or the touch‐
pad.
Selecting the map orientation
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Orientation.
#
Select an option.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
The following options are available:
R
2D Heading Up option: the 2D map view
is aligned to the direction of travel.
R
2D North Up option: the 2D map view is
displayed so that north is always at the
top.
R
3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to
the direction of travel.
or
320
MBUX multimedia system
#
To use quick-access: repeatedly tap or
press on the Ä compass symbol on the
map.
The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D
Heading Up to 2D North Up.
If the map is moved, it can switch between
3D and 2D North Up.
Selecting POI symbols for the map display
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
POIs include restaurants and hotels, for exam‐
ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the
map. Not all POIs are available everywhere.
Personal POIs are destinations which you have
saved on a USB device, for example.
%
The display of POI symbols on the map can
be activated or deactivated as a favorite.
#
To switch on/off using quick-access: if
available, switch POI Symbols on or off.
The POI symbols for the selected categories
are shown on the map.
or
#
To switch on/off in the menu: select
Advanced.
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Elements.
#
Select POI Symbols r.
The POI SYMBOLS menu is shown.
#
Switch Display POIs on or off.
Selecting categories
#
Select r in the POI SYMBOLS All Catego-
ries menu.
#
Switch Show All on or off.
When the option is switched on, the POI sym‐
bols for all categories are shown on the map.
or
#
Select the categories and sub-categories (if
available) r.
#
Activate or deactivate the categories.
The POI symbols for the selected categories
are shown on the map.
Selecting personal POI categories
#
Select r in the POI SYMBOLS Personal
POIs menu.
#
Select a category r.
#
Switch Show on Map on or off.
When the display is switched on and the
vehicle approaches a personal POI in this
category, a visual and audible notification
can be issued.
#
To set a notification when approaching:
select a category or a personal POI V.
#
Switch Visual Notification and Acoustic Noti-
fication on or off.
Switching display of categories for quick-
access on/off
#
Switch a category on or off in the POI SYM-
BOLS menu.
Resetting the POI symbol display
#
Select POI SYMBOLS Reset POIs in the
menu.
The settings are reset to the standard set‐
tings.
MBUX multimedia system
321
Selecting the display of text information in
the map
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Text Information.
#
Select an option in the FOOTER category.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
The following options are available:
R
Current Street option
The street you are currently on is shown in
the bottom bar.
When the map is moved, the street name,
the POI name or the area name appears
under the crosshair.
R
The Geo-coordinates option shows the fol‐
lowing information in the bottom bar:
-
longitude and latitude
-
elevation
The elevation shown may deviate from
the actual elevation.
R
None option
The media display shows no text information
in the bottom bar.
Switching freeway information on/off
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
#
Using quick-access: switch Highway Infor-
mation on or off.
The display button is activated or off.
or
#
Using the menu: select Advanced.
#
Select View.
#
Select Text Information.
#
Switch Highway Information on or off.
When the display button is switched on, addi‐
tional information about the freeway facilities
ahead appears during the freeway journey.
These include parking lots, service stations
and freeway exits, for example.
Displaying the next intersecting street
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is not active.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Text Information.
#
Activate Next Intersecting Street.
The display button is activated. If the option
is switched on and the journey continues
without route guidance, the name of the next
intersecting street will be displayed at the
upper edge of the display.
Displaying the map version
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Version.
The detail information is displayed.
%
The online map update service from
Mercedes me connect can be used to
update the map data (/ page 324).
322
MBUX multimedia system
A message is shown in the media display
when a new map version is available.
%
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Overview of avoiding an area for the route
You can define areas along a route that you
would like to avoid.
Highways or multi-lane highways, which are
routed through an area to be avoided are taken
into account for the route.
Avoiding a new area for the route
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Route
5
Avoid Options
5
Avoid Areas
#
Select Avoid New Area.
#
To start in the map: select Using Map.
#
Move the map (/ page 320).
#
To start via destination search: select Via
Address Entry.
#
Enter the address (/ page 292).
#
Select the destination in the list or accept
with a.
The map appears.
#
To show an area: tap or press on the control
element.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided.
#
To change the map scale: move two fingers
apart or together on the media display or on
the touchpad.
The map is zoomed in or out.
#
To set an area: select a.
The Avoid area has been set. message
appears. The area is entered into the list.
Changing an area to be avoided
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Route
5
Avoid Options
5
Avoid Areas
#
Select an area in the list.
#
Select Edit.
#
To move an area on the map: swipe in any
direction on the control element.
#
To change the size of the area: tap or press
on the control element.
#
Swipe up or down on the control element.
#
Select a.
The Avoid area has been set. message
appears. The area is entered into the list.
#
To take account of an area for the route:
select an area from the list.
#
Activate Avoid Area.
The display button is activated.
If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐
culated.
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried
over to the next route guidance.
The route can include an area that is to be
avoided in the following cases:
R
the destination is located in an area that
is to be avoided.
R
the route includes highways or multi-lane
expressways which pass through an area
to be avoided.
MBUX multimedia system
323
R
there is no sensible alternative route.
Deleting an area
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
5
Route
5
Avoid Options
5
Avoid Areas
#
To delete an area: select an area in the list.
#
Select Delete.
#
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
#
To delete all areas: if at least two areas to
avoid are set, select Delete All.
#
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
Map data update overview
Updating at the authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven‐
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map data.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You can have updates to the digital map imple‐
mented there.
%
Additional costs can be incurred in this con‐
nection.
Online map update
The online map update service from Mercedes
me connect can be used to update the map
data.
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connect is available.
R
You have a user account for the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The service has been activated.
%
The online map update service is not availa‐
ble in all countries.
The following options are available for the
update:
R
For one region (automatic map update)
If the Automatic Online Update system set‐
ting is switched off (/ page 289), you
receive a message that a map update is avail‐
able. You can confirm the message and
download the map update.
R
For several or all regions (manual map
update)
The map data will first be downloaded onto a
storage medium and then updated on the
multimedia system.
Further information on online map updates is
available here:
R
At an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
Under: https://www.mercedes.me
Further information on updates can be found at:
https://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/
connectme/en_US/index.html.
Overview of map data
Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐
tory. Depending on the country, map data for
your region is either pre-installed or the map
data is supplied on a data storage medium.
324
MBUX multimedia system
If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐
led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you
do not need to enter the activation code.
For map data that you have purchased in the
form of a data storage medium, you must enter
the accompanying activation code.
%
If you save the map data on a data storage
medium with the online map update service,
no entry is required. The activation code is
stored on the data storage medium during
the downloading process.
Observe the following when entering the activa‐
tion code:
R
The activation code can be used for one vehi‐
cle
R
The activation code is not transferable
R
The activation code has six digits
In the event of the following problems, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
The multimedia system does not accept the
activation code
R
You have lost the activation code
Displaying the compass
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
¡
5
Position
#
Select Compass.
The compass display shows the following
information:
R
The current direction of travel with bear‐
ing (360° format) and compass direction
R
Longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
Height (rounded)
R
Number of satellites from which a signal
can be received
Setting the map scale automatically
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Orientation.
#
Activate Auto Zoom.
The display button is activated. The map
scale is set automatically depending on your
driving speed and the type of road.
%
The automatically selected map scale can be
changed manually. After a few seconds, this
is automatically reset.
Displaying the satellite map
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Elements.
#
Switch Satellite Map on or off.
If the display button is activated, satellite
maps are displayed in map scales from 2 mi
(2 km).
If the display button is deactivated, satellite
maps are not displayed in map scales from
2 mi (2 km) to 20 mi (20 km).
%
The satellite maps for these map scales are
not available in all countries.
MBUX multimedia system
325
Displaying the range
Requirements:
R
The multimedia system supports the func‐
tion.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Elements.
#
Activate Range.
The display button is activated.
The range is shown on the map with the follow‐
ing displays:
R
For gasoline and diesel vehicles: green dis‐
play
When the lower reserve capacity is reached then
the range display on the map is switched off.
%
The range display on the map is not available
in all countries.
Displaying weather information and other
map contents
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connect is available.
R
You have a user account for the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The service has been activated at an author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Elements.
#
Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-
TENT category.
The available services are displayed. The
services are provided by Mercedes me con‐
nect.
#
Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or
cloud cover. The service information is not
shown in all map scales, e.g. weather sym‐
bols.
Further information about available services and
about displaying information in the map scales
can be found in the Mercedes me Portal:
https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Showing map view in the multifunction dis‐
play of the instrument cluster
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
5
Advanced
#
Select View.
#
Select Map Orientation.
#
Scroll up and show the INSTRUMENT CLUS-
TER VIEW category.
#
To set the map scale automatically: switch
on Auto Zoom.
The display button is activated. The map
scale is set automatically depending on your
driving speed and the type of road.
326
MBUX multimedia system
#
To select map orientation: select an option.
The # dot indicates the current selection.
The following options are available:
R
2D Heading Up option: the 2D map view
is aligned to the direction of travel.
R
2D North Up option: the 2D map view is
displayed so that north is always at the
top.
R
3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to
the direction of travel.
Parking service
Notes on the parking service
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to not observing the maximum per‐
mitted access height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum
permitted access height for parking garages
and underground parking lots, the vehicle
roof as well as other vehicle parts could be
damaged.
There could be a risk of injury to the vehicle
occupants.
#
Before driving into a parking garage or
underground parking lot observe the
locally signposted access height.
#
If the vehicle height, including any addi‐
tional equipment, exceeds the maxi‐
mum permitted access height, do not
drive into the parking garage or under‐
ground parking lot.
This service is not available in all countries.
Selecting parking options
*
NOTE Before selecting the parking
option
The data is based on information provided by
the respective service provider.
Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the
accuracy of the information provided relating
to the parking garage/parking lot.
#
Always observe the local Information
and conditions.
Requirements:
R
The navigation services option is available,
subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The parking service is within the scope of the
navigation service.
R
Parking is activated (/ page 328).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
#
Tap on j in the map.
#
Select a parking option.
The map shows the parking options in the
vicinity.
The following information is displayed (if
available):
R
Destination address, distance from cur‐
rent vehicle position and arrival time
R
Information on the parking garage/park‐
ing lot
For example, opening times, parking
charges, current occupancy, maximum
parking time, maximum access height.
MBUX multimedia system
327
The maximum access height shown by
the parking service does not replace the
need for observation of the actual cir‐
cumstances.
R
Available payment options (Mercedes
pay, coins, bank notes, cards)
R
Details on parking tariffs
R
Number of available parking spaces
R
Payment method (e.g. at the parking
machine)
R
Services/facilities at the parking option
R
Telephone number
#
Calculate the route (/ page 299).
The following functions can also be selected (if
available):
R
Search for POIs in the vicinity.
R
Save the destination.
R
Place a call at the destination.
R
Share the destination using NFC or QR code.
R
Call up the web address.
R
Show the destination on the map.
Displaying parking options on the map
Requirements:
R
The navigation services option is available,
subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The parking service is within the scope of the
navigation service.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Navigation
5
Z
#
Activate Parking.
The display button is activated. The parking
options within the vicinity of the current vehi‐
cle position are shown.
Dashcam
Notes on the dashcam
*
NOTE Before using the dashcam
Before using any or all functions of the Dash‐
cam, please read this Disclaimer carefully. If
you do not accept, agree to or understand
this Disclaimer, please do not use the Dash‐
cam. By using the Dashcam, you are deemed
to have accepted and agreed to the contents
of this Disclaimer.
As manufacturer of the vehicle, we provide
you with the device and associated software
system of the Dashcam to provide you with
the functionalities that we consider you may
wish to have while using the Dashcam. We
are unable to predict or verify whether any
image(s) or geographic information captured
or recorded during your use of the Dashcam
is legitimate. As such, we are unable to take
responsibility for any adverse consequences
that may arise from the actual image(s) or
geographic information captured or recorded
during use of the Dashcam.
Warning: please comply with all applicable
laws and regulations when you use the Dash‐
cam. For example, please do not capture or
record image(s) or geographic information
which may be considered as state secret
sensitive information (e.g. military areas). In
case of any violations of the relevant laws
and regulations, the actual user will be liable
328
MBUX multimedia system
for the corresponding responsibilities and we
will not take responsibility for any misuse of
the Dashcam.
#
Observe the country-specific regula‐
tions.
The dashcam is available in the navigation sys‐
tem in combination with the augmented reality
function.
Selecting a USB device for a video recording
with the dashcam
Requirements:
R
The dashcam is available in the navigation
system in combination with the augmented
reality function.
R
At least one USB device is connected with
the multimedia system (/ page 370).
%
You are legally responsible for operation and
use of the dashcam functions. The legal
requirements relating to operation and use
of the dashcam can vary depending on the
country in which the dashcam is operated.
Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in
particular the data protection regulations, in
your country.
For this reason, before using the dashcam
inform yourself about the regulation details
for the respective country.
This function is not permitted in all countries.
Observe the country-specific regulations.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Dashcam
#
Select the USB device.
Starting/stopping video recording with the
dashcam
Requirements:
R
A USB device is connected with the multime‐
dia system (/ page 370).
R
The ignition is switched on.
%
You are legally responsible for operation and
use of the dashcam functions. The legal
requirements relating to operation and use
of the dashcam can vary depending on the
country in which the dashcam is operated.
Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in
particular the data protection regulations, in
your country.
For this reason, before using the dashcam
inform yourself about the regulation details
for the respective country.
This function is not permitted in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Dashcam
#
If several USB devices are connected with
the multimedia system, select the USB
device (/ page 329).
#
To select a recording mode: select Individ-
ual Recording or Loop Recording.
If Individual Recording is selected and the
memory is full the recording stops. An indi‐
vidual recording is automatically protected
against being overwritten.
If Loop Recording has been selected, several
short video files are recorded. When the
memory limit is reached, the oldest video file
is deleted and recording is continued auto‐
matically.
MBUX multimedia system
329
#
To start: select Start Recording.
The length of the recording is shown. The
Please do not remove the storage medium.
message appears. The video file is stored on
the USB device.
#
To end: select End Recording .
A report may appear in the following cases:
R
For the Individual Recording recording mode:
the memory is full or there are only a few
minutes recording time available. The video
recording stops or will be stopped immi‐
nently.
Change the USB device or delete a video file.
R
If a video recording has started and a
national border is detected, the National Bor-
der Crossed. Please observe the country-
specific regulations on video recording. mes‐
sage appears.
This function is not available in all countries.
R
The camera is not functional, the Camera
Unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Deleting a dashcam video recording
Requirements:
R
A USB device with video recordings is con‐
nected with the multimedia system
(/ page 370).
%
You are legally responsible for operation and
use of the dashcam functions. The legal
requirements relating to operation and use
of the dashcam can vary depending on the
country in which the dashcam is operated.
Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in
particular the data protection regulations, in
your country.
For this reason, before using the dashcam
inform yourself about the regulation details
for the respective country.
This function is not permitted in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Dashcam
#
Select the p symbol.
The RECORDINGS menu appears.
#
Select V for a video file.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Configuring dashcam settings
Requirements:
R
A USB device is connected with the multime‐
dia system (/ page 370).
%
You are legally responsible for operation and
use of the dashcam functions. The legal
requirements relating to operation and use
of the dashcam can vary depending on the
country in which the dashcam is operated.
Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in
particular the data protection regulations, in
your country.
For this reason, before using the dashcam
inform yourself about the regulation details
for the respective country.
This function is not permitted in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Dashcam
#
Select Z.
330
MBUX multimedia system
#
To show messages after passing a
national border: switch on National Bor-
ders Alert.
The display button is activated.
A message appears under the following con‐
ditions:
R
A video is being recorded.
R
The vehicle has passed a national border.
%
This function is not available in all countries.
#
To start automatic video recording: select
Automatic Video Recording.
#
Activate Automatic Video Recording.
The display button is activated. When the
vehicle is started, video recording starts
automatically.
%
This function is not available in all countries.
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system
331
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/load compartment.
Observe the additional information on stowing
mobile communications devices correctly:
R
Loading the vehicle (/ page 99)
R
Stowing and securing the mobile phone
(/ page 110)
Further information can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
332
MBUX multimedia system
Telephone menu overview
1
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone/of the mobile
phone
2
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone/of the mobile
phone (two phone mode)
3
Battery status of the connected mobile
phone
4
Signal strength of the mobile phone network
5
Options
6
Device manager
7
Messages
8
Numerical pad
9
Contact search
Bluetooth
®
profile overview
Bluetooth
®
profile
of the mobile phone
Function
PBAP (Phone Book
Access Profile)
Contacts are auto‐
matically displayed in
the multimedia sys‐
tem
MBUX multimedia system
333
Bluetooth
®
profile
of the mobile phone
Function
MAP (Message
Access Profile)
Message functions
can be used
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐
ephony operating modes are available:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 334).
R
Two mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(two
phone mode) (/ page 335).
-
You can use all the functions of the multi‐
media system with the mobile phone in
the foreground.
-
You can receive incoming calls and mes‐
sages with the mobile phone in the back‐
ground.
You can interchange the mobile phone in
the foreground and background any time
(/ page 335).
%
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth
®
audio func‐
tionality can by used with any mobile phone
(/ page 370).
Information on telephony
The following situations can lead to the call
being disconnected while the vehicle is in
motion:
R
there is insufficient network coverage in the
area
R
you move from one transmission/reception
station to another and no communication
channels are free
R
the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
R
a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
the network with the second SIM card at the
same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice
®
for improved speech quality. A require‐
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person
you are calling support HD Voice
®
.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements:
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the multimedia
system (/ page 283).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
Searching for a mobile phone
#
Select í.
#
Select Connect New Device.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization
using Secure Simple Pairing)
#
Select a mobile phone.
#
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
#
If the codes match: confirm the code on
the mobile phone.
334
MBUX multimedia system
%
For older mobile phone models, enter a one
to sixteen-digit number code on the mobile
phone and on the multimedia system for
authorization.
%
Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized
on the multimedia system.
Authorized mobile phones are reconnected
automatically.
%
The connected mobile phone can also be
used as Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
(/ page 370).
Connecting a second mobile phone (two
phone mode)
Requirements:
R
At least one mobile phone is already connec‐
ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select í.
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Select the mobile phone.
#
Select Device name 1 + Device name 2.
The selected mobile phone is connected to
the multimedia system.
Interchanging mobile phones (two phone
mode)
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
Both mobile phones are shown individually in
separate tabs.
#
Select the tab with the desired mobile
phone.
The mobile phone in the selected tab is the
mobile phone in the foreground.
With the exception of telephone settings, the
submenus in the telephone menu relate to
the mobile phone in the foreground. In the
telephone settings, settings can be made for
both mobile phones.
Changing the function of a mobile phone
Requirements:
R
At least one mobile phone is connected to
the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 334).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
Activating a function
#
Select the í device manager.
#
Select a gray symbol in the line of a mobile
phone.
The corresponding function is activated.
Deactivating a function
#
Select the í device manager.
#
One function is active: select the color
symbol in the line of a mobile phone.
The mobile phone is disconnected from the
multimedia system.
#
Several functions are active: select a color
symbol in the line of a mobile phone.
The corresponding function is deactivated.
Replacing mobile phones
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select í.
MBUX multimedia system
335
#
No authorized mobile phone available:
select Connect New Device.
#
Select a mobile phone.
#
Newly authorized mobile phone: confirm
the number code on the mobile phone.
Using in single telephone mode
#
Select Device name.
A newly authorized mobile phone is connec‐
ted in single telephone mode.
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ized and connected in single telephone
mode, it is connected again in single tele‐
phone mode.
If a mobile phone has already been author‐
ized and connected in two phone mode with
another mobile phone, it will be connected in
future in single telephone mode.
Using in two phone mode
#
Select Device name 1 + Device name 2.
A newly authorized mobile phone is connec‐
ted with the selected mobile phone in two
phone mode.
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ized and connected in single telephone
mode, it will be connected in future with the
selected mobile phone in two phone mode.
If the mobile phone was previously connec‐
ted with another mobile phone, this connec‐
tion is canceled.
Disconnecting/de-authorizing a mobile
phone
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select í.
#
Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
#
To disconnect: select Disconnect.
If applicable, the mobile phone will be auto‐
matically reconnected when the vehicle is
next started.
#
To de-authorize: select Deauthorize.
Information on Near Field Communication
(NFC)
NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer
or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the
multimedia system.
The following functions are available without
having authorized a mobile phone:
R
Transferring a URL or a contact to be viewed
in the multimedia system (see the manufac‐
turer's operating instructions).
R
Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via
the system settings (/ page 285).
Further information can be obtained at: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐
munication (NFC)
Requirements:
R
NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions)
R
The mobile phone's screen is switched on
and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions)
336
MBUX multimedia system
#
To connect a mobile phone: hold the NFC
area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐
er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or
place the mobile phone on it.
#
Follow the additional prompts on the media
display to connect the mobile phone. Con‐
nect the mobile phone in single telephone
mode (/ page 334). Connect the mobile
phone in two phone mode (/ page 335).
#
To replace a mobile phone: hold the NFC
area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐
er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or
place the mobile phone on it.
#
Follow the additional prompts on the media
display to replace the mobile phone in one or
two phone mode (/ page 335).
#
If required, confirm the prompts on your
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
%
If your mobile phone supports wireless
charging, it will be automatically charged via
NFC when it is connected or replaced. A
requirement for this is that the mobile phone
is on the mat (/ page 110).
If you want to charge a mobile phone without
connecting it to the multimedia system, lay it on
the mat without beforehand unblocking the
screen.
Further information can be found at: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Setting the reception and transmission vol‐
ume
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is connected (/ page 334).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
Z
This function ensures optimal language quality.
%
Please note that the respective mobile
phone must be selected for adjustment of
the reception and transmission volume.
#
Select Volume.
#
Set the reception and transmission volume
using Reception and Transmission.
Further information on the recommended recep‐
tion and transmission volume: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Setting the ringtone
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
Z
#
Select Ringtones.
#
Set the ringtone.
MBUX multimedia system
337
%
If the mobile phone supports the transfer of
the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of
the mobile phone instead of that of the vehi‐
cle audio system.
Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐
nition
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone in the foreground is con‐
nected with the multimedia system
(/ page 334).
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
#
Press and hold the £ button on the multi‐
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition
#
Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐
function steering wheel.
%
If a mobile phone is connected via Smart‐
phone Integration, the voice recognition of
this mobile phone is started or stopped.
Calls
Using the telephone
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
Making a call by entering the numbers
#
Select _.
#
Enter a number.
#
Select R.
The call is made.
Accepting a call
#
Select R Accept.
Rejecting a call
#
Select k Reject.
Ending a call
#
Select k.
Activating functions during a call
The following functions are available during a
call:
k
End Call
m
Microphone Off
_
Numeric Keypad (show to send DTMF
tones)
W
Add Call
h
Transfer to Phone (an active call in hands-
free mode is transferred over to the tele‐
phone)
#
Select a function.
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements:
R
There is an active call (/ page 338).
R
Another call is being made.
Switching between calls
#
Select the contact.
The selected call is active. The other call is
on hold.
Activating a call on hold
#
Select the contact of the call on hold.
338
MBUX multimedia system
Conducting a conference call
#
Select i Create Confer. Call.
The new participant is included in the confer‐
ence call.
Ending an active call
#
Select k End Call.
%
On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Accepting/rejecting a waiting call
Requirements:
R
There is an active call (/ page 338).
If you receive a call while already in a call, a
message is displayed.
Depending on the mobile phone and mobile net‐
work operator you will hear a call-waiting sound.
In addition, in two phone mode you will hear an
acoustic signal when the call goes through to the
other (not yet active) mobile phone.
#
Select R Accept.
The incoming call is active.
If only one mobile phone is connected with
the multimedia system, the previous call will
be put on hold.
If during a call you accept a call with the
other mobile phone when in two phone mode
then the existing call is ended.
#
Select k Reject.
%
This function and behavior depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu
The contacts menu contains all contacts from
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or data
storage medium.
Depending on the data source, it is possible to
save/load the following number of contacts:
R
Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
R
Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:
5,000 entries per mobile phone
From the contacts menu, you can perform the
following actions:
R
Make a call, for example call a contact
(/ page 341)
R
Navigation (/ page 297)
R
Compose messages (/ page 344)
R
Additional options (/ page 341)
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system (/ page 334) and automatic calling up
(/ page 339) is activated, the mobile phone's
contacts are displayed in the address book.
The multimedia system can show suggestions
based on frequently used contacts as well as
incoming and outgoing calls (/ page 267).
These are shown at the top of the contact list.
Downloading mobile phone contacts
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
Z
#
Select Contacts & Recent Calls.
MBUX multimedia system
339
Automatically
#
If the Synchronize Contacts Automatically
function is not active: activate the function
by pressing once.
Manually
#
If the Synchronize Contacts Automatically
function is active: deactivate the function by
pressing once.
#
Select Synchronize Contacts.
You can see from the status of controller to the
right of the Synchronize Contacts Automatically
display text whether the function is active.
Calling up contacts
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
g
The following options can be used to search for
contacts:
R
searching by initials
R
searching by name
R
searching by phone number
#
Enter characters into the search field.
#
Select the contact.
A contact can contain the following details:
R
phone numbers
R
navigation addresses
R
geo-coordinates
R
Internet address
R
e-mail addresses
R
voice tag (if set)
R
relation (if set)
Editing the format of a contact's name
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
Z
#
Select General.
#
Select Name Format.
The following options are available:
R
Last Name, First Name
R
Last Name First Name
R
First Name Last Name
#
Select an option.
Overview of importing contacts
Contacts from various sources
Source Requirements
ò USB device The USB device is
connected with the
USB port.
ñ Bluetooth
®
con‐
nection
If the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth
®
is supported, vCards
can be received on
mobile phones or net‐
books, for example.
Bluetooth
®
is activa‐
ted in the multimedia
system and on the
respective device
(see the manufactur‐
er's operating instruc‐
tions).
340
MBUX multimedia system
Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
Z
5
General
5
Import Contacts
#
Select a mobile phone <device name>, from
which the contacts should be imported.
#
Select an option.
Saving a mobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
g
#
Select ó r in the line of the mobile
phone contact.
#
Select Ä.
#
Select Save to Vehicle.
#
Select Yes.
The contact saved in the multimedia system
is identified by the q symbol.
Calling a contact
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
g
#
Select ª Search for Contacts.
#
Enter characters into the search field.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select the telephone number.
The number is dialed.
Selecting further options in the contacts
menu
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
g
#
Select r in the line of the contact.
#
Select Ä.
Depending on the stored data, the following
options are available:
R
Add Voice Tag/Delete Voice Tag
R
Set Relationship/Delete Relationship
R
Send DTMF Tones (for a number with DTMF
tones)
The function is available when a call is active.
#
Select an option.
Selecting options for suggestions in the con‐
tacts menu
Requirements:
R
A profile has been created (/ page 262).
R
The Allow Contact Suggestions setting is
switched on (/ page 267).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select + Recent Calls.
#
Select V in the line of a suggested con‐
tact.
The following options are available:
R
Save as Favorite
The suggestions are saved as global
favorites and do not appear on the home
screen.
R
No Longer Suggest
#
Select an option.
Deleting contacts
Requirements:
R
The contacts are saved in the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system
341
R
To delete an individual contact, this has been
imported manually into the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
Deleting all contacts
#
Select Z.
#
Select General.
#
Select Delete Contacts.
#
Select an option.
Deleting a contact
#
Select g.
#
Select r in the line of the contact.
#
Select Ä.
#
Select Delete Contact.
#
Select Yes.
Saving a contact as a favorite
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
f Add Favorites
#
Select a contact.
#
Select r in the line of the contact.
#
Select the telephone number.
The contact is stored as a favorite in the tele‐
phone menu overview.
Deleting favorites in the telephone menu
overview
Multimedia system:
4
©
#
Select a favorite in the telephone menu over‐
view (/ page 342).
#
Press and hold the favorite.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Deleting all favorites
#
Tap on © in the media display.
#
Select Phone.
#
Select Z.
#
Select the connected telephone.
#
Select Contacts & Recent Calls.
#
Select Delete All Favorites.
A pop-up window appears: Do you want to
delete all favorites?
#
Select Yes.
Call list
Overview of the call list
Depending on whether your mobile phone sup‐
ports the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile or not, this
can have different effects on the presentation
and functions of the call list.
If the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile is supported, the
effects are as follows:
R
The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐
played in the multimedia system.
R
When connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection for the PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
342
MBUX multimedia system
If the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile is not supported,
the effects are as follows:
R
The multimedia system generates a call list
independently as soon as calls are made in
the vehicle.
R
The call list is not synchronized with the call
lists in the mobile phone.
The multimedia system can show suggestions
based on frequently used contacts as well as
incoming and outgoing calls (/ page 267).
These are shown at the top of the call list.
Making a call from the call list
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select + Recent Calls.
#
Select an entry.
The call is made.
Calling up additional options in the call list
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select + Recent Calls.
#
For previously stored contacts: select r
in the line of an entry.
The search results are displayed.
#
For contacts who have not been stored:
select i.
Selecting options for suggestions in the call
list
Requirements:
R
A profile has been created (/ page 262).
R
The Allow Contact Suggestions setting is
switched on (/ page 267).
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
#
Select + Recent Calls.
#
Select V in the line of a suggested entry.
The following options are available:
R
Save as Favorite
R
No Longer Suggest
#
Select an option.
Deleting the call list
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
Z
#
Select Contacts & Recent Calls.
#
Select Delete Recent Calls.
#
Select Yes.
%
This function is only available if your mobile
does not support the PBAP Bluetooth
®
pro‐
file.
Text messages
Overview of message functions
In the messages menu you can receive and send
text messages.
If the connected mobile phone supports the
Bluetooth
®
MAP profile, the message function
can be used on the multimedia system.
You can obtain further information about set‐
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth
®
-
capable mobile phones from an authorized
MBUX multimedia system
343
Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Some mobile phones require further settings
after being connected to the multimedia system
(see manufacturer's operating instructions).
Setting message displays
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
Z
#
Select Message Display.
The following options are available:
R
All Messages
R
New and Unread Messages
R
Messages While Driving
R
Off (the message function is no longer
available.)
#
Select a setting.
Reading messages
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
Using the read-aloud function
#
Select a contact.
#
Select ¬ to read aloud.
The message is read aloud.
Dictating and sending a new message
Requirements:
R
There is an Internet connection.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
#
Select a new message using r.
Adding a recipient
#
Select f.
#
Select a contact.
Dictating text
#
Select p.
The dictating function is started.
#
Say the message.
After the voice message has been processed,
it is shown as text.
Sending a message
#
Select Send.
%
When the vehicle is stationary you can use
the keyboard to write a message. No Inter‐
net connection is required to use the key‐
board.
Replying to a message in the messaging his‐
tory
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
A message list is shown.
#
Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown.
344
MBUX multimedia system
#
Select p.
The dictating function is started.
#
Say the message.
After the voice message has been processed,
it is shown as text.
#
Select Send.
Using message templates
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
Using a template as a new message
#
Select r to write a new message.
#
Add a recipient using f.
#
Select a 0 template.
Answering a message with a template
#
Select a message sequence with a contact.
#
Select a ª template.
#
Select a 0 template.
Forwarding a message
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
A message list is shown.
#
Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown.
#
Press and hold on a message.
#
To forward a message: select Forward.
Calling a message sender
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
A message list is shown.
#
Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown.
#
Select Ä.
#
Select Call.
Using telephone numbers or URLs from a
text message
Requirements:
R
An Internet connection is available to call up
a URL.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
A message list is shown.
#
Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown.
#
Select a telephone number or a URL in the
message.
If a URL is selected the web browser opens.
If a telephone number is selected the follow‐
ing options are available:
R
Call
R
New Message
#
Select an option.
MBUX multimedia system
345
Deleting a message
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
<device name>
5
l
#
Select a contact.
#
Press and hold on a message.
#
To delete the message: select Delete.
Mercedes-Benz link
Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
With Mercedes-Benz Link you can use mobile
phone functions via the multimedia system. It is
operated using the touchscreen or the voice-
operated control system. You can activate the
voice-operated control system by pressing and
holding the £ button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
When using Mercedes-Benz Link via the voice-
operated control system, the multimedia system
can still be operated via the Voice Control Sys‐
tem (/ page 229).
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen‐
tary equipment is required for this. This is availa‐
ble at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Mercedes-Benz Link to the multimedia
system.
When a mobile phone is connected with
Mercedes-Benz Link, only one additional mobile
phone can be connected using Bluetooth
®
with
the multimedia system when in two phone
mode.
%
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses
the Android operating system.
%
The service provider is responsible for these
apps and the services and content connec‐
ted to it.
Notes on Mercedes-Benz Link
If a mobile phone is used with Mercedes-Benz
Link, USB access using the media menu is possi‐
ble for this mobile phone.
%
Only one route guidance can be active at a
time. If route guidance is active on the multi‐
media system, it is closed when route guid‐
ance is started on the mobile phone.
346
MBUX multimedia system
Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the
multimedia system
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-
Benz Link control box.
R
The Mercedes-Benz Link app is installed on
the mobile phone.
R
The mobile phone is switched on.
R
Mercedes-Benz Link is connected to the mul‐
timedia system via the ç USB port using
a suitable cable (/ page 370).
%
The first activation of Mercedes-Benz Link
on the multimedia system must be carried
out when the vehicle is stationary for safety
reasons.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Mercedes-Benz Link
5
Start Mercedes-Benz Link
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
For the initial start of the application: a message
with the data protection provisions appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
Quitting Mercedes-Benz Link
#
Press the ò button.
%
Mercedes-Benz Link starts automatically
when it is connected with the system using a
cable. If Mercedes-Benz Link was not dis‐
played in the foreground before disconnect‐
ing, the application starts in the background
when reconnected. You can call up
Mercedes-Benz Link using the main menu.
You can find more information in the Mercedes-
Benz Link control box operating instructions.
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Link sound set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Mercedes-Benz Link
5
Z
#
Select sound settings.
Ending Mercedes-Benz Link
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
Mercedes-Benz Link and the multimedia sys‐
tem.
%
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle
is stationary.
MBUX multimedia system
347
Apple CarPlay
®
Overview of Apple CarPlay
®
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
iPhone
®
functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay
®
. They are oper‐
ated using the touchscreen, touchpad, Touch
Control or the Siri
®
voice-operated control sys‐
tem. You can activate the voice-operated control
system by pressing and holding the £ button
on the multifunction steering wheel.
When using Apple CarPlay
®
via the voice-oper‐
ated control system, the multimedia system can
still be operated via the Voice Control System
(/ page 229).
Only one iPhone
®
at a time can be connected via
Apple CarPlay
®
with the multimedia system.
Also for use of Apple CarPlay
®
with two phone
mode, only one additional mobile phone can be
connected using Bluetooth
®
with the multimedia
system.
The availability of Apple CarPlay
®
may vary
according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Apple CarPlay
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
Information on Apple CarPlay
®
When Apple CarPlay
®
is being used, the iPod
®
media source is not available for the respective
iPhone
®
.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting an iPhone
®
via Apple CarPlay
®
(cable)
Requirements:
R
The current version of your device's operat‐
ing system is being used (see the manufac‐
turer's operating instructions).
R
There is an Internet connection for the full
range of functions for Apple CarPlay
®
.
R
The iPhone
®
is connected to the multimedia
system via the USB port ç using a suita‐
ble cable (/ page 370).
348
MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Apple CarPlay
5
Start Apple CarPlay
#
Alternative: If an Apple CarPlay
®
application
is active (e.g. when music is being played or
route guidance is active), you can call up the
active application using the |, z or
% application buttons (/ page 260).
%
Control using the application buttons can be
switched on or off (/ page 349).
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
For the initial start of the application: a message
with the data protection provisions appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
Exiting Apple CarPlay
®
#
Press the ò button.
%
Apple CarPlay
®
starts automatically when
the iPhone
®
is connected with the system
using a cable. If Apple CarPlay
®
was not dis‐
played in the foreground before disconnect‐
ing, the application starts in the background
when reconnected. You can call up Apple
CarPlay
®
in the main menu.
Calling up Apple CarPlay
®
sound settings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Apple CarPlay
5
Z
#
Select sound settings.
Setting control of the application buttons
(Apple CarPlay
®
)
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Apple CarPlay
5
Z
5
General
#
To switch on Control via Application Buttons:
activate the display button.
#
To switch off Control via Application Buttons:
deactivate the display button.
Ending Apple CarPlay
®
#
To end the connection of Apple Car‐
Play
®
(with cable): disconnect the connec‐
tion via the connecting cable between the
mobile phone and multimedia system.
%
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle
is stationary.
Android Auto
Android Auto overview
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
MBUX multimedia system
349
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Mobile phone functions can be used with
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated
using the touchscreen or the voice-operated
control system. You can activate the voice-oper‐
ated control system by pressing and holding the
£ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
When using Android Auto via the voice-operated
control system, the multimedia system can still
be operated via the Voice Control System
(/ page 229).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Android Auto with the multimedia sys‐
tem.
Also for use of Android Auto with two phone
mode, only one additional mobile phone can be
connected using Bluetooth
®
with the multimedia
system.
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto
apps may vary according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Information on Android Auto
If a mobile phone is used with Android Auto,
USB access using the media menu is not possi‐
ble for this mobile phone.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
(wired)
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone supports Android Auto
from Android 5.0.
R
The Android Auto app is installed on the
mobile phone.
R
In order to use the telephone functions, the
mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 334).
If there was no prior Internet connection, this
is established with the use of the mobile
phone with Android Auto.
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system via the USB port ç using a
suitable cable (/ page 370).
R
There is an Internet connection for the full
range of functions for Android Auto.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Android Auto
5
Start Android Auto
#
Alternative: If an Android Auto application is
active (e.g. when music is being played or
route guidance is active), you can call up the
active application using the |, z or
% application buttons (/ page 260).
%
Control using the application buttons can be
switched on or off (/ page 351).
%
The first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out
when the vehicle is stationary for safety rea‐
sons.
350
MBUX multimedia system
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
For the initial start of the application: a message
with the data protection provisions appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
Exiting Android Auto
#
Press the ò button.
%
Android Auto starts automatically when the
mobile phone is connected with the system
using a cable. If Android Auto was not dis‐
played in the foreground before disconnect‐
ing, the application starts in the background
when reconnected. You can call up Android
Auto in the main menu.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Android Auto
5
Z
#
Select sound settings.
Setting control of the application buttons
(Android Auto)
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Smartphone
5
Android Auto
5
Z
5
General
#
To switch on Control via Application Buttons:
activate the display button.
#
To switch off Control via Application Buttons:
deactivate the display button.
Ending Android Auto
#
To end the connection of Android Auto
(with cable): disconnect the connection via
the connecting cable between the mobile
phone and multimedia system.
%
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle
is stationary.
Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto
and Apple CarPlay
®
Overview of transferred vehicle data
When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay
®
, cer‐
tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile
phone. This enables you to get the best out of
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is
not directly accessible.
The following system information is transmitted:
R
Software release of the multimedia system
R
System ID (anonymized)
The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐
munication between the vehicle and the mobile
phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly
generated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
media system is reset (/ page 290).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R
Transmission position engaged
MBUX multimedia system
351
R
Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
R
Day/night mode of the instrument cluster
The transfer of this data is used to alter how
content is displayed to correspond to the driving
situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R
Coordinates
R
Speed
R
Compass direction
R
Acceleration direction
This data is only transferred while the navigation
system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it
can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
1
me button for service, concierge or informa‐
tion calls
2
SOS button cover
3
SOS button (emergency call system)
#
To make a Mercedes me call: press me
button 1.
#
To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover 2 briefly to open.
#
Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least
one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency
call can still be triggered. This has priority over
all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call
using the me button
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
has been initiated via the me button in the over‐
head control panel or the multimedia system
(/ page 352).
Using the voice dialog system you access the
desired service:
R
Concierge Service (if the service is activated)
R
Accident and breakdown management
(/ page 355)
R
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general
information about the vehicle
352
MBUX multimedia system
You can find information on the following topics:
R
Activation of Mercedes me connect
R
Operating the vehicle
R
Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 353).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
using the multimedia system
Requirements:
R
Access to a GSM network is available.
R
The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in the respective region.
R
The ignition must be switched on so that
vehicle data can be transferred automati‐
cally.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Phone
5
g
#
Call Mercedes me connect.
After confirmation, the multimedia system
sends the required vehicle data. The data
transfer is shown in the media display.
Then, you can select a service and be connected
to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center.
Further information on Mercedes me connect,
the provided service scope and operation are
available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/
cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html
Arranging a service appointment via a
Mercedes me call
If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center. You will then receive individual recom‐
mendations regarding the maintenance of your
vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to
the maintenance management service, the multi‐
media system reminds you after a certain
amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
appears asking if you would like to make an
appointment.
#
To arrange a service appointment: select
Call.
After your agreement the vehicle data is sent
and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
employee deals with your appointment. The
information is then sent to your desired
service outlet.
This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐
ment and if necessary consult about the
details.
%
If you select Later after the service message
appears, the message is hidden and reap‐
pears after a certain period of time.
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call
The data transferred during a Mercedes me call
depends on which service is selected in the
voice control system and whether Mercedes me
connect services are activated.
MBUX multimedia system
353
If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐
ted and the data protection prompt has been
confirmed the following data is transmitted:
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Mercedes me customer identification num‐
ber
R
Reason for the initiation of the call
R
Language set in the multimedia system
R
Confirmation of the data protection prompt
If a call is made for a service appointment via
the service reminder, the following data may be
transmitted:
R
Current mileage and maintenance data
Transfer is possible assuming the required
data transfer technology is supported by the
mobile service operator and the quality of
the mobile connection is sufficient.
If Accident and Breakdown Management is
called via the voice control system and no
service has been activated, but the data protec‐
tion query has been confirmed, the following
data can also be called up from the vehicle by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center:
R
Current vehicle location
%
At the time of going to press, this function is
technically not yet available but can be sup‐
ported in the future.
If the data protection prompt has been rejected
the following data is transmitted:
R
Reason for the initiation of the call
R
Rejection of the data protection prompt
Mercedes me connect
Notes on Mercedes me connect
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐
ices.
Depending on whether the services are activated
and on the vehicle equipment, you can use the
following services via the multimedia system and
the overhead control panel, for example:
R
Accident and breakdown management (me
button)
R
If the service is activated: Concierge Service
(me button)
R
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐
matic emergency call or SOS button)
Mercedes me connect accident and breakdown
management, the Mercedes me connect Con‐
cierge Service (if service is activated) and the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa‐
ble for you around the clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found
on the vehicle's overhead control panel
(/ page 352).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center using the multimedia system
(/ page 353).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always
354
MBUX multimedia system
call the national emergency services first using
the standard national emergency service phone
numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 357).
Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me
connect and other services. These can be
obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Further information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐
dent and breakdown management
The accident and breakdown management can
include the following functions:
R
Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system (/ page 357)
If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐
wards the call to Mercedes me connect
breakdown and accident management. For‐
warding the call is however not possible in all
countries.
R
Breakdown assistance by a mechanic on
location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐
cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
You may be charged for these services.
More information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐
nect call services
The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐
nect call depends on the reason the call was ini‐
tiated, which service is selected in the voice
control system and which Mercedes me connect
services are activated.
Which data is transferred for the services can be
taken from the currently valid terms of use.
These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Mercedes me and apps
Information about Mercedes me
When you log in with a user account to the
Mercedes me portal, then services and offers
from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.
Availability is country-dependent.
For more information consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me
portal: http://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
%
Make sure you always keep the Mercedes
me apps updated.
Calling up the Mercedes me user account
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
Your vehicle is connected with a user
account
#
Select Mercedes me.
Information about the connected user
account appears.
MBUX multimedia system
355
Your vehicle is not yet connected with a user
account
#
Select Mercedes me.
#
The instructions for creating a user account
and connecting the vehicle with this follow
on the media display.
%
If the Mercedes me app is available on a
mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be
accomplished using the QR code shown.
Calling up the Mercedes me services
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is connected with the user
account.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
#
Select Services.
Within the various categories you can see the
Mercedes me services you have already pur‐
chased and also those still available to pur‐
chase.
To activate or deactivate the services, log in
to your user account in the Mercedes me
portal.
Deleting a connection between a user
account and the vehicle
Requirements:
R
The (vehicle) profile of the user account that
was first connected with the vehicle is selec‐
ted.
R
The profile is synchronized (/ page 263).
R
A PIN has been set.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
Mercedes me
#
Select Delete Vehicle Assignment.
#
Enter the PIN of the connected user account.
%
Only the user, whose user account was first
connected with the vehicle can delete the
connection between all user accounts and
the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can
help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall
in no way replaces assistance provided from
dialing 911.
Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas
where mobile phone coverage is available from
the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐
work coverage from the wireless service provid‐
ers may result in an emergency call not being
transmitted.
eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-
Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended,
the system relies on the transmission of data
detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system data transmission" section that follows
(/ page 358).
To disable eCall, a customer must visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department
to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐
ule.
356
MBUX multimedia system
Deactivation of this module prevents the
activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐
nect services. After the deactivation of
eCall, automatic emergency call and manual
emergency call will not be available.
The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐
matic emergency call can be made.
%
eCall is activated at the factory.
%
eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in
the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐
ferred to another owner in its deactivated
state, eCall will remain deactivated unless
the new owner visits an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the
system.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system
eCall can help to reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services
at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
accident site in places that are difficult to
access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped
with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON.
As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the
event of an accident.
An emergency call can be made automatically
(/ page 357) or manually (/ page 358). Only
make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue.
Only make emergency calls if you or others are
in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency
call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐
uation.
Notification in the multimedia system dis‐
play:
SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall
not available.
During an active emergency call, G appears
in the display.
You can find more information on the regional
availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes-
benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/
%
If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system (e.g. a malfunc‐
tion with the speaker, microphone, airbag,
SOS button), a corresponding message
appears in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic Mercedes‑Benz
emergency call
Requirements
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system trig‐
gers an emergency call automatically in the fol‐
lowing cases:
R
After activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
after an accident.
R
After an automatically initiated emergency
stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist.
The emergency call has been made:
R
A voice connection is made to the
Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center.
R
A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center.
MBUX multimedia system
357
The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the emergency call centers.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel
flashes until the emergency call is finished.
It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐
matic emergency call.
If no connection can be made to the emergency
services either, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#
Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
R
Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call center operator.
R
Based on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
and/or the police to the accident site.
R
If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call
#
To use the SOS button in the overhead
control panel: press the SOS button at least
one second long .
#
To use voice control: use the Voice Control
System voice commands (/ page 237).
The emergency call has been made:
R
A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
R
A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the emergency call center.
R
Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call center service provider.
R
On the basis of the call, the service provider
decides whether it is necessary to call res‐
cue teams and/or the police to the accident
site.
If no connection can be made to the emergency
services either, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#
Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentionally triggered manual
Mercedes-Benz emergency call
#
Select ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress the button for several sec‐
onds.
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐
gency call the following data is transmitted, for
example:
R
Vehicle's GPS position data
R
GPS position data on the route (a few
(hundred meters )before the incident)
R
Direction of travel
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Vehicle drive type
358
MBUX multimedia system
R
Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle
R
Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not
R
Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically
R
Time of the accident
R
Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any
questions about the collection, use and sharing
of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐
SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-
MERC.
For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.
Customer requests for covered information
should be submitted via the same channels.
For accident clarification purposes, the following
measures can be taken up to an hour after the
emergency call has been initiated:
R
The current vehicle position can be called up.
R
A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection
Information on connecting to the Internet
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐
ted degree whilst driving.
MBUX multimedia system
359
Function of the communication module
On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐
ule, the Internet connection is established via an
integrated SIM card.
To use Internet access via the communication
module the following conditions must be met:
R
Mercedes me connect is active and ready for
operation.
R
Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter‐
net access.
R
In some countries: data volume via Mercedes
me connect is available.
In some countries: if the data volume limit is
reached, the availability of Mercedes me con‐
nect services is limited. The data volume must
be purchased via Mercedes me connect.
%
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter to find out whether it is possible to pur‐
chase data volume in your country.
Establishing an Internet connection
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
#
For example, select z Browser.
%
The multimedia system usually establishes
the Internet connection automatically. If the
multimedia system is not connected to the
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.
%
The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Connection status
Connection status overview
1
Display of existing connection (double arrow)
and reception field strength of the communi‐
cation module
360
MBUX multimedia system
Displaying the connection status
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Settings
5
System
5
Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
#
Select Internet Status.
%
In the case of a connection via the communi‐
cation module the following status informa‐
tion is shown:
R
Type of network
R
Status online/offline
Web browser
Calling up a web page
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
z Browser
Calling up a new web page
#
Select ä.
#
Entering a web address
#
Select ¬.
%
The function is country-dependent.
%
Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle
is in motion.
Calling up a website from the browser his‐
tory
#
To call up the previous or next page from the
history: select X or Y.
MBUX multimedia system
361
Web browser overview
1
URL entry
2
Bookmarks
3
Web page, back
4
Web page, forwards
5
To refresh/stop
6
Options
Calling up web browser options
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
z Browser
5
Z
The following functions are available:
R
Bookmarks
R
Options with the settings:
-
Browser Settings
-
Delete Browser Data
#
Select an option.
#
Change the settings.
362
MBUX multimedia system
Calling up the web browser settings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
z Browser
5
Z
5
Browser Settings
The following functions are available:
R
Block Pop-ups
R
Activate Javascript
R
Allow Cookies
#
To switch a function on: activate the dis‐
play button.
#
To switch a function off: deactivate the dis‐
play button.
Deleting Internet history
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
z Browser
5
Z
5
Delete Browser Data
The following options are available:
R
All
R
Cache
R
Cookies
R
History
R
Entered URLs
R
Form Data
#
Select an option.
#
Select Yes.
Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
z Browser
#
Select ?.
Selecting a bookmark
#
Select an entry.
Creating a bookmark
#
Select Add Current Page to Bookmarks.
The bookmark is created.
Editing a bookmark
#
Select r after a bookmark.
#
Select Edit.
#
Enter the name.
#
Select a.
Deleting a bookmark
#
Select r after a bookmark.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Closing the browser
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Mercedes me & Apps
5
z Browser
#
Select ©.
TuneIn radio
Calling up TuneIn radio
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes
me account.
R
The TuneIn radio service is activated in the
Mercedes me portal.
R
The data volume is available.
MBUX multimedia system
363
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
R
A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
sion free of interference.
%
New data volumes can be purchased in the
Mercedes me portal
%
The functions and services are country-
dependent. For more information, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
#
Select TuneIn Radio.
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station
set starts playing.
%
The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.
364
MBUX multimedia system
Overview of TuneIn radio
1
Additional information on the current station
2
Display (if connected to private user
account)
3
Data transfer rate
4
Options
5
Favorites
6
To start/end
7
To browse
8
Search
9
Selected category
A
Internet Radio provider
Selecting and connecting to a TuneIn radio
station
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
TuneIn Radio
#
Select =.
#
Select a category.
MBUX multimedia system
365
#
Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
or
#
Select the search field.
#
Enter a station name.
%
A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn radio.
Saving/deleting a TuneIn radio station as a
favorite
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
TuneIn Radio
#
Select a station.
#
Select ß.
The list of saved favorite stations appears.
#
Select Add to Favorites.
or
#
Create an account for the online provider
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
media system.
Your favorites are imported to the multimedia
system.
Deleting favorites
#
Select a station.
#
Select ß.
#
Select Delete Favorite.
Setting the TuneIn radio options
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
TuneIn Radio
5
Z
5
TuneIn Radio
The following options are available:
R
Select Stream: select the stream quality.
R
Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your
TuneIn user account.
R
Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn
user account.
#
Select an option.
Showing the station list for the last category
selected
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
TuneIn Radio
#
Press the cover of the current station.
Depending on how the station was selected,
a station list is shown.
Media
Information about media mode
Information about supported formats and
data storage media
&
WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐
dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the
traffic conditions. This could also cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
366
MBUX multimedia system
The multimedia system supports the follow‐
ing formats and data media:
Permissible
file systems
FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Permissible
data carriers
USB devices, iPod
®
/iPhone
®
,
MTP devices, Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
Supported
audio formats
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC,
ALAC
%
Observe the following notes:
R
The multimedia system supports a total
of up to 50,000 files.
R
Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐
ported (32‑bit address space).
R
Due to the large variety of available
music and video files regarding encod‐
ers, sampling rates and data transfer
rates, playback cannot be guaranteed.
R
Due to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all USB devices.
R
Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are
supported.
R
Copy-protected music and video files or
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
encrypted files cannot be played back.
R
MP3 players must support Media Trans‐
fer Protocol (MTP).
Information on copyright protection and
trademarks
Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies
of data storage media you make yourself) are
generally subject to copyright protection. In
many countries, reproductions are not permitted
without the prior consent of the copyright
holder, even for private use. Make sure that you
know about the applicable copyright regulations
and that you comply with these.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora‐
tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
MBUX multimedia system
367
TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark
of Aspiro AB in the European Union and other
countries.
368
MBUX multimedia system
Overview of the media menu
1
Previous track or fast rewind
2
Next track or fast forward
3
Album cover
4
Active media source
5
Track and artist
6
Current track number/track in playback list
and active data storage medium
7
Repeat
8
Settings
9
Additional options
A
Controls playback
B
Timeline
C
Categories
D
Music search
E
Random playback
MBUX multimedia system
369
Connecting the data storage medium to the
multimedia system
Connecting USB devices
*
NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
#
Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of the vehicle.
The multimedia connection unit is found in the
stowage compartment under the armrest and
has two type C USB ports. Depending on the
vehicle's equipment, additional USB ports can
be found in the stowage compartment of the
center console or rear folding compartment.
#
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
%
USB hubs cannot be connected with the
multimedia system.
%
When connecting several Apple
®
devices
simultaneously, pay attention to the order in
which the devices are connected. The multi‐
media system only connects with the device
that is connected first. Additional Apple
®
devices that are connected at the same time
are only supplied with power.
Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth
®
audio device
Requirements:
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment.
R
The audio equipment supports the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
R
The audio equipment is "visible" for other
devices.
370
MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Bluetooth
5
ª
Authorizing a new Bluetooth
®
audio device
#
Select Connect New Device.
Detected equipment is displayed in the
device list.
#
Select an audio device.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
phone.
#
If the codes are identical, confirm on the
audio equipment.
#
Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device.
The Bluetooth
®
audio equipment is connec‐
ted with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
#
Select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
list.
The connection is established.
Starting media playback
Requirements:
R
A data storage medium is connected to the
multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
#
Select USB or Bluetooth as the media
source.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
#
To pause playback: select 8.
#
To continue playback: select 6.
#
To repeat a track: select :.
For the repeat function there are the follow‐
ing settings:
R
Select once: the active playlist is repea‐
ted.
R
Select twice: the current track is repea‐
ted.
R
Select three times: the repeat function
is deactivated.
#
To play back tracks in random order:
select 9.
#
To wind a track forwards or backwards:
tap on the desired point on the timeline.
#
To select the next track: select ü.
#
To select the previous track: select û.
#
To scroll through tracks quickly: press and
hold û or ü.
#
To show the current track list: select the
track image shown.
MBUX multimedia system
371
Additional options for setting media play‐
back
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
Calling up additional options
#
Select ß.
The additional options are shown.
The following options are available:
R
Surprise Mix
A playlist with randomly selected tracks is
created.
R
Add to Favorite Songs
The current track is added to the favorite
songs.
R
Remove from Favorite Songs
The current track is removed from the favor‐
ite songs.
#
Select an option.
Media search
Notes about the search function in catego‐
ries
Under 5 you can search through all available
media files. There are several categories availa‐
ble for selection. The categories shown depend
on the connected device and data format.
Available categories with Bluetooth
®
audio:
R
Current Tracklist
The folders and categories of the connected
device are shown.
Available categories with audio files:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Playlists
R
Folder
R
Albums
R
Artists
R
Tracks
R
Favorite Songs
R
Often Played
R
Most Recently Added
R
Music Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Select By Cover
R
Podcasts (Apple
®
devices)
R
Audiobooks (Apple
®
devices)
%
The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read in and
analyzed.
Starting a search in categories
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
5
#
Select a category.
#
Select ª and enter a search term.
Sorting results shown or playing back all
media found
#
Select Ä.
372
MBUX multimedia system
#
To play back all results found in the cate‐
gory: select Play All.
If, for example, the Albums category is
active, all albums found by the desired artist
will be played back.
#
To sort results alphabetically: select Sort
from A-Z.
#
To sort results in reverse alphabetical
order: select Sort from Z-A.
%
The available options depend on the selec‐
ted category and the connected device.
Using the keyword search
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
You can look for content using the keyword
search with free text input.
#
Select ª.
A keyboard for character entry appears.
#
Enter the term searched for.
%
The search begins with the first character
entered. The more characters entered the
more concrete the search results become.
#
Select the desired entry from the result list.
If the selected result is an album, song or a
playback list then playback is started. If the
selected result is a new category then this is
opened in the search.
Radio
Switching on the radio
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
#
Alternatively: press the | button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last frequency
band selected.
MBUX multimedia system
373
Radio overview
1
Selects an active frequency band
2
Station logo
3
Station name or set frequency
4
Artist, title, album and radio text
5
HD Radio logo
6
Options
7
Switches the HD Radio function on or off
8
Mute function
9
Calls up the station list
A
Search
374
MBUX multimedia system
Switching the HD Radio function on/off
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
HD FM
#
Switch HD on or off.
%
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.
U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see
DTS website. HD Radio and the HD, HD
Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trade‐
marks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Cor‐
poration in the United States and/or other
countries.
Setting the waveband
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
The following frequency bands are available:
R
SiriusXM
R
HD FM
R
HD AM
#
Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
#
Swipe to the left or right on the control ele‐
ment.
Calling up the radio station list
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
#
Select 4.
The station list appears.
#
Select a station.
Searching for radio stations using station
names or frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
#
Select è.
#
Enter a station name or frequency.
#
Select a station.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
#
Select a radio station.
MBUX multimedia system
375
Memory slots are available in station presets
#
Select f.
or
#
Press and hold on the radio station.
Replacing an entry in the station presets
#
Press and hold on an entry in the station pre‐
sets.
#
Select Yes.
Editing station presets
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
Moving stations
#
Press and hold a stored station.
#
Select Move.
#
Move the station to the new position.
Deleting stations
#
Press and hold a station.
#
Select Delete.
Replacing a station
#
Press and hold a station.
#
Select Replace Radio Station.
Showing accident reports
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
Z
%
The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
#
Switch Display Emergency Warnings on or
off.
Displaying radio text
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
Z
5
General
#
Switch Radio Text Information on or off.
Satellite radio
Information on the satellite radio
SIRIUS XM
®
satellite radio offers more than 175
digital-quality radio channels providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐
tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio
employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to
broadcast around the clock throughout the USA
and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail‐
able for a monthly fee. Information about this
can be obtained from a Sirius XM
®
Service Cen‐
ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
%
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and
its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel
names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
Satellite radio restrictions
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail‐
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz
376
MBUX multimedia system
USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations
may not be possible.
Registering satellite radio
Requirements:
R
Satellite radio equipment is available.
R
Registration with a satellite radio provider
has been completed.
R
If registration is not included when purchas‐
ing the system, your credit card details will
be required to activate your account
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z Options
#
Select Service Information.
The service information screen appears
showing the radio ID and the current sub‐
scription status.
#
Establish a telephone connection.
#
Follow the service staff's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
%
You can also have the satellite service acti‐
vated online. To do so, please visit http://
www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Switching on satellite radio
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
#
Select SiriusXM.
MBUX multimedia system
377
Overview of the satellite radio
1
Active frequency band
2
Logo or album art (if available)
3
Channel name
4
Track information
5
Traffic & Weather Now and Sports Flash
6
Options
7
Shows or hides playback controls
8
Stops playback controls
9
Station list
A
Search
Selecting a satellite radio category
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
#
Select .
#
Select Category.
#
Select a category.
378
MBUX multimedia system
Selecting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
#
Select .
#
Select a channel.
Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
SiriusXM
Storing the current channel
#
Press and hold the logo of the current station
until the Options menu appears.
#
Select Add to Presets.
Moving a channel
#
Press and hold a channel in the presets until
the Options menu appears.
#
Select Move Highlighted Station.
#
Move the channel to a new position.
Deleting a channel
#
Press and hold a channel in the presets until
the Options menu appears.
#
Select Delete Highlighted Station.
Displaying EPG information for the current
channel
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z
#
Select Electr. Program Guide.
Setting parental control for radio
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z
#
Select Parental Control.
#
Determine a four-digit character sequence
and select ¡.
All channels with adult content are locked.
Unlocking a channel
#
Enter the four-digit character sequence and
select ¡.
All channels with adult content are unlocked.
Music and sport alerts function
This function enables you to program an alert for
your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events.
Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being
played and sport alerts can be saved during a
live game. You can also specify sport alerts via
the menu option. The system then continuously
searches through all the channels. If a match is
found with a stored alert, you will be informed.
Setting music and sport alerts
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z
5
Alerts
Activating the music information function
#
Activate Music Alerts O.
Setting a music alert
#
Select Add Alert.
MBUX multimedia system
379
#
Select Artists or Song in the dialog window.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
If a match is found, a prompt appears asking
whether you wish to change to the station.
Activating sports information
#
Activate O Activate Sports Alerts.
Setting a sport alert
#
Select Add Alert.
#
Select the team name or league in the dialog
window.
Deleting individual sports and music alerts
#
Select Manage Music Alerts.
or
#
Select Manage Sports Alerts.
#
Select an artist or track.
or
#
Select a team.
#
Select Delete Selected Entries.
All highlighted alerts are deleted.
Deleting all sports and music alerts
#
Select Manage Music Alerts.
or
#
Select Manage Sports Alerts.
#
Select Delete All Entries.
All alerts are deleted.
Information about Smart Favorites and
TuneStart
From the station presets you can set up to eight
stations as Smart Favorites. Smart Favorites sta‐
tions are automatically saved to temporary stor‐
age in the background. If you change to a Smart
Favorites station, you can replay, pause or
actively skip forward or back to broadcasts
which you have missed. If Tune Start is activated
and you change to another Smart Favorites sta‐
tion, the music track currently playing on the
station is automatically restarted from the begin‐
ning of the track.
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
SiriusXM
#
Press and hold on the station logo until the
Options menu appears.
#
To add a channel: select Add to Smart
Favorites in the menu.
#
To remove a channel: select Delete from
Smart Favorites in the menu.
Creating a TuneMix list
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z
5
TuneMix Lists
In order to listen to seamless music, you can put
together a TuneMix list from various stations.
#
Select Create TuneMix List.
#
If necessary, limit the number of stations
shown using the Category entry.
#
Select the station shown O.
#
Press q to confirm.
A TuneMix station logo is created in the radio
menu.
380
MBUX multimedia system
Activating/deactivating TuneStart
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z
#
Switch TuneStart on or off.
Switching on satellite radio playback control
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Radio
5
SiriusXM
You can pause the playback of the current sta‐
tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline.
This leaves live mode to access the internal tem‐
porary storage.
#
To show the timeline: press 5.
#
To fast forward/rewind: tap anywhere on
the timeline.
#
To pause playback: select Ë.
#
To return to live mode: navigate to the end
of the timeline.
Displaying satellite radio service information
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Þ Radio
5
SiriusXM
5
Z
#
Select Service Information.
Sound
Tone settings
Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 100 W
and is equipped with six speakers. It is available
for all functions in the radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Volume
#
Select a function.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume
adjustment
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
5
Volume
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources and within an audio source.
#
Switch Automatic Adjustment on or off.
MBUX multimedia system
381
Adjusting the balance/fader
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
5
Balance and Fader
Adjusting the balance
#
Move the volume distribution between the
right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak‐
ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.
Adjusting the fader
#
Move the volume distribution between the
front and rear of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak‐
ers in the front and rear of the vehicle.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Information about the Burmester
®
surround
sound system
The Burmester
®
surround sound system has a
total output of 590 W and is equipped with 12
speakers. It is available for all functions in the
radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Burmester
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Sound Focus
R
Sound Profiles
R
Volume
#
Select a function.
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings
on the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Burmester
5
Equalizer
#
Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.
Activating/deactivating volume adjustment
in the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Burmester
5
Volume
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources and within an audio source.
#
Switch Automatic Adjustment on or off.
Adjusting the balance/fader in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Burmester
5
Balance and Fader
Adjusting the balance
#
Move the volume distribution between the
right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak‐
ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.
382
MBUX multimedia system
Adjusting the fader
#
Move the volume distribution between the
front and rear of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak‐
ers in the front and rear of the vehicle.
Selecting a sound profile in the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Burmester
5
Sound Profiles
The following profiles are available:
R
Pure
R
Surround
#
Select a sound profile.
Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Burmester
5
Sound Focus
#
Select a position for the sound focus or All
Seats.
Advanced sound system
Information about the Advanced sound sys‐
tem
The Advanced sound system has a total output
of 225 W and is equipped with ten speakers. It is
available for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the Advanced
sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Volume
#
Select a function.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings in the Advanced sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.
Switching volume adjustment in the
Advanced sound system on/off
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
5
Volume
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources and within an audio source.
#
Switch Automatic Adjustment on or off.
MBUX multimedia system
383
Setting the balance/fader in the Advanced
sound system
Multimedia system:
4
©
5
Media
5
Z
5
Sound
5
Balance and Fader
Adjusting the balance
#
Move the volume distribution between the
right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak‐
ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.
Adjusting the fader
#
Move the volume distribution between the
front and rear of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak‐
ers in the front and rear of the vehicle.
384
MBUX multimedia system
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
Instrument Display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back
button on the left-hand side of the steering
wheel.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may
shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following
cases:
R
Mainly short-distance driving
R
When the engine is often left idling for long
periods
R
In the event of frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such
operating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the serv‐
icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
ASSYST PLUS
The next service due date is displayed.
#
To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following
related topic:
R
Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 216).
Information on regular maintenance work
*
NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
#
Always observe the prescribed service
intervals.
#
Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work
will need to be performed more often if the vehi‐
cle is operated under arduous conditions or
increased loads.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐
bility as regards to whether maintenance work
needs to be performed more often than speci‐
fied based on the actual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
ate stops
R
mainly short-distance driving
Maintenance and care
385
R
frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
R
when the engine is often left idling for long
periods
R
operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The
tires must be checked more frequently if the
vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐
ther information can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when
the battery is connected.
#
Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting
the battery (/ page 385).
Engine compartment
Opening/closing the hood
&
WARNING Risk of accident if the engine
hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
#
Never unlatch the engine hood while
driving.
#
Before every trip, ensure that the
engine hood is latched.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the engine
hood
When opening or closing the engine hood, it
may suddenly drop into the end position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine hood's range of movement.
#
Only open or close the engine hood
when there are no persons in the
engine hood's range of movement.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment may continue to move or suddenly
move again even after the ignition has been
switched off, e.g. the cooler fan.
Make sure of the following before performing
tasks in the engine compartment:
#
Switch the ignition off.
386
Maintenance and care
#
Never touch the danger zone surround‐
ing moving component parts, e.g. the
rotation area of the fan.
#
Remove jewelry and watches.
#
Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from touching
component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
component parts which are under voltage,
you could receive an electric shock.
#
Never touch component parts of the
ignition system or the fuel injection sys‐
tem when the ignition is switched on.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.
#
To open: pull lever 1 to release the hood.
Maintenance and care
387
#
Push yellow handle 1 on the hood catch to
the left as far as it will go (palm downwards).
Lift the hood until it is automatically raised
by the pneumatic strut.
#
To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a
height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
#
If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open
the hood again and close it with a little force
until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the on-
board computer
Requirements:
R
The engine has warmed up.
R
The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
R
The engine is running at idle speed.
The engine oil level is determined during driving.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to
30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
longer with an active driving style.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Engine Oil Level
You will see one of the following messages on
the multifunction display:
R
Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement
of the oil level is not yet possible.
#
Repeat the request after a maximum of
30 minutes driving.
R
Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the multifunction
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the oil level is correct.
R
Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis‐
play for indicating the oil level on the multi‐
function display is orange and is below "min":
#
Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
R
Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐
tion display is orange and is above "max":
#
Drain off any excess engine oil that has been
added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
R
For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On:
#
Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil
level.
R
Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: sensor
faulty or not inserted.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R
Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail.:
#
Close the hood.
388
Maintenance and care
Refilling engine oil
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#
Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening.
#
Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
cations explicitly prescribed for the
service intervals.
#
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#
Do not use additives.
#
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil
change.
*
NOTE Damage caused by refilling too
much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter.
#
Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
#
Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove
it.
#
Add engine oil.
#
Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
#
Check the oil level again (/ page 388).
Maintenance and care
389
Checking the coolant level
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of scalding from hot
coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. If you
open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
#
Let the engine cool down before open‐
ing the cap.
#
When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses.
#
Open the cap slowly to release pres‐
sure.
#
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
#
Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be in the bot‐
tom quarter of the temperature display.
#
Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to
relieve overpressure.
#
Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following
cases:
R
If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2.
R
If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar 2.
#
If necessary, add coolant that has been
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Further information on coolant
(/ page 464).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
390
Maintenance and care
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
#
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
#
Remove cap 1 by the tab.
#
Add washer fluid.
Keeping the air-water duct free
#
Keep the area between the hood and the
windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow
and leaves.
Cleaning and care
Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
reduced braking effect after washing the
vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing
the vehicle.
#
After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until the braking
effect has been fully restored.
Maintenance and care
391
*
NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car
wash
#
Before driving into a car wash make
sure that the car wash is suitable for
the vehicle dimensions.
#
Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#
Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function are deactivated.
R
The 360° Camera or the rear view camera is
switched off.
R
The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
R
The blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off.
R
The windshield wiper switch is in position
g.
R
In car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐
tral i is engaged.
R
The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise
the trunk lid could open unintentionally.
%
If you would like to leave the vehicle while it
is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is
located in the vehicle. The park position j
is otherwise automatically engaged.
%
If, after the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise.
Information on using a power washer
&
WARNING Risk of accident when using
high-pressure cleaning equipment with
round-spray nozzles
The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt
grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus‐
pension components that is not visible.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly.
#
Do not use high-pressure cleaning
equipment with round-spray nozzles to
clean your vehicle.
#
Damaged tires or suspension compo‐
nents must be replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐
lowing when using a power washer:
R
keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the trunk lid
could open unintentionally.
R
maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in
(30 cm) to the vehicle.
392
Maintenance and care
R
vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in
(70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.
Move the power washer nozzle around whilst
cleaning. The water temperature of the
power washer must not exceed 140 °F
(60 °C).
R
observe the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions.
R
do not point the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts such as tires, slits,
electrical components, batteries, light bulbs
and ventilation slots.
Washing the vehicle by hand
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted
in specially designated wash bays.
#
Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
#
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
#
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and
dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
the water jet directly towards the air inlet
grille below the hood.
Maintenance and care
393
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Paintwork
R
Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the
treated areas afterwards.
R
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R
Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐
tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
R
Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and
clean water.
R
Tar stains: use tar remover.
R
Wax: use silicone remover.
R
Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
R
Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
394
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Matte finish
Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels.
R
Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐
neering standards.
R
Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treat‐
ment.
R
Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products,
gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
R
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matte finish care in the
chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐
work care" (/ page 394). They also apply to
matte decorative foils.
Maintenance and care
395
Observe the following information:
Cleaning Avoiding damage to the decorative foil
R
For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without
additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
R
Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing
too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil
irreparably.
R
If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the
Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated
areas afterwards.
R
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R
To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft,
absorbent cloth after every car wash.
R
The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by:
-
Sunlight
-
Temperature, e.g. hot air blower
-
Weather conditions
-
Stone chippings and dirt
-
Chemical cleaning agents
-
Oily products
R
Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect
of shining the foil-wrapped surface.
R
Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
cannot always be completely repaired. In such
cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and
cleaning products from the manufacturer.
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐
ferences may occur between the surfaces that
were not protected by a decorative foil after
removing a decorative foil.
%
Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
396
Maintenance and care
Notes on care of vehicle parts
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windshield wipers are switched on while
the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the
wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself.
#
Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closely in
this area.
#
Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
Observe the following information:
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Wheels/rims
Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners.
R
Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R
To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive
the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking
it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows
Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with
a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning
agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades
Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth.Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Maintenance and care
397
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Exterior lighting
Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent,
e.g. car shampoo.
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
for plastic lenses.
Sensors
Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the
radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of
11.8 in (30 cm).
Rear view camera
and 360° Camera
R
Open the camera cover with the multimedia system
(/ page 198) .
R
Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
Do not use a power washer.
Tailpipes
Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-
Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Notes on care of the interior
&
WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐
vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous.
When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts
may break away.
#
Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
ucts containing solvents to clean the
cockpit.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to
tear or fail in an accident.
#
Never bleach or dye seat belts.
398
Maintenance and care
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Seat belts
Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
R
Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R
Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F
(80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display
Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suit‐
able display care product (TFT/LCD).
R
Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R
Do not use any other agents.
Plastic trim
R
Clean with a damp microfiber cloth.
R
For heavy soiling: use a care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
R
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
come in contact with the plastic trim.
Real wood/trim ele‐
ments
R
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
R
Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soapy water.
R
For heavy soiling: use a care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Headliner
Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet
Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Maintenance and care
399
Cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Genuine leather
seat covers
R
Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R
Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been rec‐
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R
Do not use a microfiber cloth.
DINAMICA seat cov‐
ers
Clean with a damp cloth.Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Imitation leather
seat covers
Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Cloth seat covers
Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soapy water and
allow to dry.
400
Maintenance and care
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the safety vest
compartments in the driver's and front
passenger door stowage compartments.
#
To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by
loop 2.
#
Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the
safety vest.
%
There are also safety vest compartments in
the rear door stowage compartments in
which safety vests can be stored.
1
Maximum number of washes
2
Maximum wash temperature
3
Do not bleach
4
Do not iron
5
Do not tumble dry
6
Do not dry clean
7
Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard
are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
The safety vest must be replaced in the following
situations:
R
the reflective strips are damaged or dirty
R
the maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
R
the fluorescence has faded
Flat tire
Notes on flat tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat
tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐
teristics as well as the steering and braking
of the vehicle.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
#
Do not drive on with a flat tire.
#
Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Breakdown assistance
401
Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
#
Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat
tires).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐
ment:
R
Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐
sible to continue the journey for a short
period of time. Make sure you observe the
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
(/ page 402).
R
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tire so that it is possible to continue the
journey for a short period of time. To do this,
use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 403).
R
Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you
can make a call for breakdown assistance via
the overhead control panel in the case of a
breakdown (/ page 352).
R
All vehicles: change the wheel
(/ page 447).
%
The emergency spare wheel is only available
in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire)
&
WARNING Risk of accident when driving
in emergency mode
When driving in emergency mode, the han‐
dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when
cornering, when accelerating strongly and
when braking.
#
Do not exceed the permissible maxi‐
mum speed for MOExtended tires.
#
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over
obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
#
Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:
R
banging noise
R
vehicle vibration
R
smoke which smells like rubber
R
continuous ESP
®
intervention
R
cracks in tire side walls
#
After driving in emergency mode have
the rims checked by a qualified special‐
ist workshop with regard to their further
use.
#
The defective tire must be replaced in
every case.
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tire), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐
ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tire.
Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys‐
tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐
402
Breakdown assistance
junction with an activated tire pressure loss
warning system.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐
junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐
ing system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in
the multifunction display, proceed as follows:
R
Check the tire for damage.
R
If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency
mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance pos‐
sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)
The driving distance possible in emergency
mode may vary depending on the driving style.
Observe the maximum permissible speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐
ard tire as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk floor.
1
Tire sealant bottle
2
Tire inflation compressor
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements
Required tools:
R
Tire sealant bottle
R
TIREFIT sticker
R
Sticker with details of the maximum permis‐
sible speed
R
Tire inflation compressor
R
Gloves
TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 403)
You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐
tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
those in the tire contact surface. You can use
TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F
(-20 °C).
&
WARNING Risk of accident when using
tire sealant
In the following situations in particular, the
tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient
breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal
the tire properly:
Breakdown assistance
403
R
There are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those previously mentioned.
R
The wheel rim is damaged.
R
You have driven at very low tire pressure
or on a flat tire.
#
Do not drive on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐
tion. Do not allow it to come into contact
with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes.
Keep the tire sealant away from children.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
#
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water.
#
If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean
water.
#
If tire sealant has been swallowed,
immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐
oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
#
Change out of any clothes contamina‐
ted with tire sealant immediately.
#
If allergic reactions occur, seek medical
attention immediately.
*
NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#
Do not run the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes without
interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tire sealant bottle.
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop every five years.
#
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tire.
#
Remove sticker 1 from the tire inflation
compressor housing and affix it to the instru‐
ment cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
404
Breakdown assistance
#
Remove sticker 2 from the tire sealant bot‐
tle and affix it near the valve on the wheel
with the faulty tire.
#
Pull plug 7 with the cable and filler hose 3
out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
#
Insert tire sealant bottle 9 in socket 6 of
the tire inflation compressor in such a way
that the red arrow on tire sealant bottle 9
matches the red arrow on the tire inflation
compressor.
#
Then turn tire sealant bottle 9 a quarter
turn clockwise.
#
Insert the plug of filler hose 3 in socket 5
of tire sealant bottle 9.
#
Then turn filler hose 3 a quarter turn clock‐
wise.
#
Remove the valve cap from valve A on the
faulty tire.
#
Screw union nut 4 of filler hose 3 onto
valve A.
#
Insert plug 7 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
#
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni‐
tion lock.
Breakdown assistance
405
#
Press on and off switch 8 on the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐
ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly
rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐
sor during this phase.
#
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tire should then have attained a tire
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐
ble to use clean water.
If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐
lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach‐
ieved:
#
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
#
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose.
#
Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
#
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance.
Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair braking and han‐
dling characteristics.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*
NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire
sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out
from the filling hose.
#
Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:
#
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
#
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose.
406
Breakdown assistance
&
WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds.
#
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#
Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tire that has been repaired
using tire sealant.
#
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph
(80 km/h).
#
The sticker with details of the maximum per‐
missible speed must be affixed to the instru‐
ment cluster where it can be easily seen by
the driver.
*
NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire
sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out
from the filling hose.
#
Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants.
#
Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
#
Pull away immediately.
#
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tire pressure using the tire
inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam‐
aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire
in this instance.
Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair the braking prop‐
erties and the handling characteristics.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
#
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar
on the driver's side or the tire pressure table
in the fuel filler flap for values.
#
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
Breakdown assistance
407
#
To reduce the tire pressure: remove the
tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation com‐
pressor.
#
Insert the filler hose in the socket of the tire
inflation compressor and turn it a quarter
turn clockwise.
#
Press pressure release button C next to
manometer B.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filling hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
#
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
sealed tire.
#
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
#
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle
and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐
evant systems, for example the lighting sys‐
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#
In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐
lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop immediately.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R
Further information on ABS (/ page 161)
R
Further information on ESP
®
(/ page 161)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz. These batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐
aged in the event of an accident.
408
Breakdown assistance
&
WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which
may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture
in the battery.
#
To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance.
&
WARNING Danger of chemical burns
from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
#
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#
Do not lean over the battery.
#
Do not inhale battery gases.
#
Keep children away from the battery.
#
Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
or clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an
apron and a face mask. Immediately
rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
with clean water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear safety glasses.
Breakdown assistance
409
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an
extended period of time:
R
activate standby mode, or
R
connect the battery to a battery charger
approved by Mercedes-Benz, or
R
consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery
Notes on starting assistance and on charg‐
ing the 12 V battery
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
*
NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.
#
Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
gen gas igniting
A battery generates hydrogen gas during the
charging process. If there is a short circuit or
sparks start to form, there is a danger of the
hydrogen gas igniting.
#
Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
into contact with vehicle parts.
#
Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
#
When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, you must observe the descri‐
bed order for the battery clamps.
#
When giving starting assistance, always
make sure that you only connect bat‐
tery terminals with identical polarity.
#
During starting assistance, you must
observe the described order for con‐
necting and disconnecting the jumper
cables.
#
Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion during
charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
sive gas mixture.
#
Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking.
#
Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
lation during the charging process and
during starting assistance.
#
Do not lean over a battery.
410
Breakdown assistance
&
WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charg‐
ing, battery gas can be released.
#
Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis‐
tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐
zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be dramatically shortened. The
starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐
cially at low temperatures.
It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐
tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
*
NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
#
Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting
assistance and when charging the battery:
R
Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐
ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps.
R
Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jumper cable/charging cable
is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐
nection point.
R
The jumper cable/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may
move when the engine is running.
R
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged.
R
Keep away from fire and open flames.
R
Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when
charging the battery:
R
Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
R
For starting assistance, only use batteries
with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
R
The vehicles must not touch.
R
Gasoline engines: Only accept starting
assistance if the engine and exhaust system
are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V
battery
Requirements
Breakdown assistance
411
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
R
Automatic transmission: The transmission
is in position j.
R
The ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off.
R
The hood is open.
#
Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the
jump-starting connection point in the direc‐
tion of the arrow.
#
Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to
the positive pole of the donor battery using
the jumper cable/charging cable. Always
begin with positive clamp 2 on your own
vehicle first.
#
During starting assistance: start the
engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle
speed.
#
Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐
tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle
by using the jumper cable/charging cable.
Begin with the donor battery first.
#
During starting assistance: start the
engine of your own vehicle.
#
During the charging process: start the
charging process.
#
During starting assistance: let the engines
run for several minutes.
#
During starting assistance: before discon‐
necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐
trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the
rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process
is complete:
#
First, remove the jumper cable/charging
cable from ground point 3 and the negative
pole of the donor battery, then from positive
clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor
battery. Begin each time with the contacts
on your own vehicle first.
#
After removing the jumper cable/charging
cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
#
Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 408).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
412
Breakdown assistance
Observe the following notes if you want to
replace the battery yourself:
R
Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require‐
ments.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐
ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat). Full vehi‐
cle functionality is only guaranteed with an
AGM battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you only use batter‐
ies which have been tested and approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R
Carry over detachable parts, such as vent
hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from
the battery being replaced.
R
Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐
nected to the original opening on the side of
the battery.
Install any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
escape.
R
Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐
nected in the same way.
Tow starting or towing away
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐
tems.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when towing
with steering wheel lock
You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle
if the steering wheel lock is engaged.
#
Always switch on the ignition when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow
bar.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐
ing away incorrectly
#
Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Breakdown assistance
413
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing
method
Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
No No
To tow with a raised axle: towing should be
performed by a towing company.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the
ground
#
Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods (/ page 413).
#
Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is
discharged:
R
The engine cannot be started
R
The electric parking brake cannot be
released or applied
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i or j.
%
Vehicles with automatic transmission: If
the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐
play in the instrument cluster does not show
anything, have the vehicle transported away
(/ page 416). A towing vehicle with lifting
equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐
tion.
414
Breakdown assistance
*
NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐
ing at excessively high speeds or over long
distances.
#
A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded.
#
A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when towing
a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow-started or towed
away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass of your vehicle, the following situations
can occur:
R
The towing eye may become detached.
R
The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even overturn.
#
If another vehicle is tow-started or
towed away, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own
vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away,
its permissible gross weight must not exceed the
permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle.
#
Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐
tification plate (/ page 458).
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do
not open the driver's door or front passenger
door, otherwise the automatic transmission
automatically shifts to position j.
#
Install the towing eye (/ page 417).
#
Fasten the tow bar.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
tion of the tow bar
#
Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
#
Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/ page 72).
#
Do not activate the HOLD function.
#
Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 88).
#
Deactivate Active Brake Assist
(/ page 170).
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
#
Release the electric parking brake.
#
Switch on the ignition, otherwise the steering
wheel lock may engage.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations:
R
the ignition is switched off.
R
the brake system or power steering sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
R
the energy supply or the on-board electri‐
cal system is malfunctioning.
Breakdown assistance
415
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
#
Use a tow bar.
#
Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely, before towing the vehicle
away.
*
NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
#
Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
#
Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 414).
#
Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in
order to load the vehicle.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
%
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission may be locked
in position j in the event of damage to the
electrical system. To shift to i, provide the
on-board electrical system with power
(/ page 411).
#
Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
#
Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
#
Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
System PLUS)
&
WARNING Risk of an accident when
transporting vehicles with Adaptive
Damping System PLUS
The reduced damping forces on the vehicle
being transported can cause the vehicle/
trailer combination to start to swing.
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the
vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid.
Consequently, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#
When transporting, ensure that:
R
The vehicle has been loaded onto
the transporter correctly
R
The vehicle is secured at all four
wheels with suitable tensioning
straps
R
The maximum permissible speed of
35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded
when transporting
416
Breakdown assistance
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐
ing it incorrectly
#
After loading, the vehicle must be
secured on all four wheels. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
#
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm)
upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards
must be kept to the transport platform.
#
Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after
loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic
transmission
#
Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
incorrect positioning
#
Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi‐
cle.
Towing eye storage location
Towing eye 1 is located in the stowage space
under the trunk floor.
Installing the towing eye
#
Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and
remove.
#
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
%
Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.
Breakdown assistance
417
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to
incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
#
Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine
start)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
*
NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐
ded.
This could result in a fire.
#
Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐
fied new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be
damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐
tionality may be significantly impaired.
#
Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the
correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐
ther information to be observed can be found in
the fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in
the engine compartment (/ page 419).
*
NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#
When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse
box.
#
When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
R
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
418
Breakdown assistance
R
All electrical consumers are switched off.
R
The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel (/ page 419)
R
Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 420)
R
Fuse box in the center of the trunk
(/ page 421)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
engine compartment
Requirements:
R
A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 418).
Opens
&
WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.
#
Open the hood.
#
Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
box using a dry cloth.
#
Loosen screws 1.
#
Press clamps 2 and lift the fuse box lid up
and out.
The fuse allocation chart is in a recess on the
side of the fuse box.
Breakdown assistance
419
Closing
#
Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
rectly in the lid.
#
Place the lid on the fuse box.
#
Make sure that clamps 2 engage.
#
Tighten screws 1.
#
Close the hood.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 418).
Opening
#
Lift carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow.
#
Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box
lid from the top.
Closing
#
Place the lid on the fuse box.
#
Tighten screws 2.
#
Fold back the carpet.
420
Breakdown assistance
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
trunk
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 418).
#
Open the trunk floor (/ page 105).
Fuse box 1 is located in the center underneath
the trunk floor.
Breakdown assistance
421
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐
teristics
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or
tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible to check the
wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics. If you find no signs of damage,
have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐
aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.
As a result, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#
Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately.
&
WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced
tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to
dissipate water.
This means that in heavy rain or slush the
risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu‐
lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the
conditions.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low,
tires may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire contact sur‐
face.
#
Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tire
contact surface across the entire width
of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
#
For safety reasons, replace the tires
before the legally prescribed limit for
the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐
ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
R
Check the tire pressure (/ page 424).
R
Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage.
R
Check the valve caps.
The valves must be protected against mois‐
ture and dirt by the valve caps approved
especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R
Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tires is
â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in
(4 mm).
422
Wheels and tires
Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators
(arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They
are visible once a tread depth of approximately
á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Notes on snow chains
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect snow chain fitting
If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, the
snow chains may grind against the vehicle
body or chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or
the tires.
#
Never fit snow chains to the rear
wheels.
#
Always fit snow chains to the front
wheels in pairs.
*
NOTE Damage to components of the
vehicle body or chassis due to mounted
snow chains
If you mount snow chains to the front wheels
of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐
nents of the vehicle body or chassis.
#
Only mount snow chains to the rear
wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.
*
NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from
mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels,
the wheel trims can be damaged.
#
Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
R
Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain
information about this from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
R
For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
with the same quality standard.
R
If snow chains are mounted, the maximum
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
R
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do
not use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are mounted.
%
You can deactivate ESP
®
to pull away
(/ page 163). This allows the wheels to
spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Wheels and tires
423
Tire pressure
Notes on tire pressure
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
#
Comply with the recommended tire
pressure and check the tire pressure of
all tires including the spare wheel regu‐
larly:
R
at least once a month
R
when the load changes
R
before embarking on a longer journey
R
if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving
#
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can:
R
Shorten the service life of the tires.
R
Cause increased tire damage.
R
Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐
heat and burst as a result.
In addition, they also suffer from excessive
and/or irregular wear, which can significantly
impair the braking properties and the han‐
dling characteristics.
#
Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause:
R
Tire defects as a result of overheating.
R
Impaired handling characteristics.
R
Irregular wear.
R
Increased fuel consumption.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐
sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can
burst because they are damaged more easily
by highway fill, pot holes etc.
In addition, they also suffer from irregular
wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐
ing properties and the handling characteris‐
tics.
#
Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too high can cause:
R
Increased braking distance.
R
Impaired handling characteristics.
R
Irregular wear.
424
Wheels and tires
R
Impaired driving comfort.
R
Susceptibility to damage.
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires
to burst.
#
Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects.
#
Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak.
#
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on tire pressure for the
vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following
labels:
R
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 431).
R
Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (/ page 425).
Observe the maximum tire pressure
(/ page 437).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: You can also check the tire pressure using
the on-board computer.
Only correct tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Conditions for cold tires:
R
The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R
The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C)
increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa
(0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the tire pressure of warm tires.
The tire pressure recommended for increased
load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect
the ride comfort.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable accessories on tire valve
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire
pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor‐
ing systems will cause the tire valve to
remain open, depending on the design. This
can also result in a loss of tire pressure.
#
Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto
the tire valve.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
%
The data shown in the images is example
data.
Wheels and tires
425
The tire pressure table shows the recommended
tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehi‐
cle. The recommended tire pressures apply for
cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e.
loading and/or speed of the vehicle.
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure,
the tire pressure information following is only
valid for those tire sizes.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ from this.
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim
diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and
can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 438).
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 431)
R
Maximum tire pressure (/ page 437)
Checking tire pressures manually
#
Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing conditions from the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
#
Remove the valve cap of the tire to be
checked.
#
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
#
Read the tire pressure.
#
If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐
mended value, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value.
#
If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐
mended value, release air. To do so, press
down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using
the tip of a pen for example. Then check the
tire pressure again using the tire pressure
gauge.
#
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
426
Wheels and tires
Further related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 425)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 431)
Tire pressure monitoring system
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
&
DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect tire pressure
Each tire, including the spare tire (if present),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and then inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
(see the Tire and Loading Information plac‐
ard on the driver's side B‑pillar or the tire
pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler
flap of your vehicle). If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the Tire and Loading Information placard or
the tire pressure table, you must find out the
correct tire pressures for these tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure indicator lamp when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, if the low tire pressure indicator
lamp lights up, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the correct pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also increases fuel consump‐
tion, reduces the life expectancy of the tire
and may adversely affect the handling and
braking characteristics of the vehicle. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres‐
sure, even if underinflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure indicator lamp.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When
the system detects a malfunction, the indica‐
tor lamp will flash for approximately a minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐
ted, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐
sons, including the installation of incompati‐
ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction warning
lamp after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Wheels and tires
427
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop‐
erly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire
temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle
by means of a tire pressure sensor.
New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires,
are automatically taught-in during the first jour‐
ney they are used.
The tire pressure and the tire temperature
appear in the multifunction display
(/ page 428).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned
in the following ways:
R
Via display messages (/ page 508)
R
Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster (/ page 528)
The tire pressure monitoring system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure
suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire
pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the
current operating situation must first be taught-
in to the tire pressure monitoring system.
In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem will automatically update the new reference
values after you have changed the tire pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val‐
ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system manually (/ page 429).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
The tire pressure has been set incorrectly
R
There is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the
tire
R
There is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source
Be sure to also pay attention to the following
related topic:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
One of the following displays appears:
R
Current tire pressure and tire temperature of
the individual wheels:
R
Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a
few minutes
R
Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete.
428
Wheels and tires
The tire pressures are already being moni‐
tored.
#
Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐
mended tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing condition (/ page 425). Observe the
notes on tire temperature (/ page 424).
%
The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐
sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by
a pressure gauge are higher than those
shown by the on-board computer. In this
case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
Requirements:
R
The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on
each of the four wheels (/ page 424).
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in
the following situations:
R
The tire pressure has changed.
R
The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
#
Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Use Current Pressures as New Refer-
ence Values message is shown in the multi‐
function display.
#
To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Current warning messages are deleted and
the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
After you have been driving for a few
minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐
rent tire pressures are within the specified
range. The current tire pressures are then
accepted as reference values and monitored.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio type approval number
Canada IC: 4008C-TSSRE4A
USAFCC ID: YGOTSSRE4A
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(/ page 26).
Tire pressure loss warning system
Function of the tire pressure loss warning
system
The tire pressure loss warning system warns the
driver by means of display messages when there
is a severe tire pressure loss.
Wheels and tires
429
After a change in tire pressure, a wheel rotation
or a tire change, or if you have re-installed
wheels or tires, the tire pressure loss warning
system has to be restarted (/ page 430).
The tire pressure loss warning system does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire pres‐
sure.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in the following situations:
R
Incorrectly set tire pressure
R
Sudden pressure loss caused, for example,
by a foreign object penetrating the tire
R
Steady pressure loss in several tires
The system has a restricted or delayed function
particularly in the following situations:
R
Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
R
Driving with snow chains
R
When adopting a very sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐
eration
R
Driving with a high load
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
R
Display messages about the tires
(/ page 508)
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
system
Requirements:
R
The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on
each of the four wheels (/ page 424).
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in
the following situations:
R
The tire pressure has changed.
R
The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
#
Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Tire Pressure Control System Active
Restart message is shown in the multifunc‐
tion display.
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in
the following situations:
R
The tire pressure has changed.
R
The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
#
To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is
shown in the multifunction display.
#
Select Yes.
#
To confirm restart, press Touch Control on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is
shown in the multifunction display.
430
Wheels and tires
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
tire pressure loss warning system monitors
the set tire pressure of all the tires.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
Loading the vehicle
Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐
ard
&
WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐
ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a
consequence. Overloaded tires can also
impair the steering and handling characteris‐
tics and lead to brake failure.
#
Observe the load-bearing capacity of
the tires.
#
The load-bearing capacity must be at
least half the gross axle weight rating of
the vehicle.
#
Never overload the tires by exceeding
the maximum load.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1
Tire and Loading Information placard
%
The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows:
R
Maximum number of seats 2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to
travel in the vehicle.
R
Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage.
Wheels and tires
431
R
Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are
valid for the maximum permissible load and
up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Please also note:
R
Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate
(/ page 458).
R
Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐
sure table (/ page 425).
Further related subjects:
R
Determining the maximum permissible load
(/ page 432)
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424).
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
#
(1): Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
#
(2): Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
#
(3): Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
#
(4): The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
#
(5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
The weight may not safely exceed the availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐
ted in Step 4.
#
(6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐
mine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
%
Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a
trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a
trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have
any questions about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Even if you have calculated the total load care‐
fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐
mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐
mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are
not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐
cle identification plate.
#
Have your loaded vehicle – including driver,
occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle
weighbridge.
The measured values may not exceed the
maximum permissible values stated on the
vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects:
R
Calculation example for determining the max‐
imum load (/ page 433)
432
Wheels and tires
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 431)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 425)
R
Vehicle identification plate
Calculation example for determining the
maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to
calculate total and load capacities with varying
seating configurations and different numbers
and sizes of occupants. The following examples
use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐
cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (/ page 431).
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1
Example 1Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and
load (data from the Tire and Loading Information
placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg)1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
51
Distribution of the occupantsFront: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Wheels and tires
433
Example 1Example 2
Weight of occupantsOccupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Total weight of all occupants750 lbs (340 kg)200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight
rating from the Tire and Loading Information
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs
(589 kg)
434
Wheels and tires
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
1
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(/ page 435)
2
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(/ page 436)
3
Maximum tire load (/ page 437)
4
Maximum tire pressure (/ page 437)
5
Manufacturer
6
Characteristics of the tire (/ page 438)
7
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 438)
8
Tire name
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Tire Quality Grading
In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐
portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐
ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade
their tires on the basis of the following three per‐
formance factors:
1
Tread wear grade
2
Traction grade
3
Temperature grade
%
The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
%
The classification is not legally stipulated for
Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified test
track of the US Department of Transportation.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
Wheels and tires
435
and one-half times as well on the government
test track as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate
conditions.
Traction grade
&
DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐
quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include either accelera‐
tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
#
Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
traffic and weather conditions.
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from
wheelspin
#
Avoid wheelspin.
The traction classes, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified govern‐
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A
tire marked C may have poor traction perform‐
ance.
Temperature grade
&
WARNING Risk of accident from tire
overheating and tire failure
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
#
Observe the recommended tire pres‐
sures and regularly check the tire pres‐
sure of all tires including the spare
wheel.
#
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐
formance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or
on the side wall of each tire produced.
436
Wheels and tires
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to
identify tires and comprises the following:
R
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire
complies with the requirements of the US
Department of Transportation.
R
Manufacturer identification code: manu‐
facturer identification code 2 contains
details of the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Further
information on retreaded tires (/ page 443).
R
Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire
size.
R
Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to
describe specific characteristics of the tire.
R
Manufacturing date: manufacturing date
5 provides information about the age of a
tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the
calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions
state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208"
represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐
fied load limit. The maximum permissible load
can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐
er's side (/ page 431).
Specifications for maximum tire pressure
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Wheels and tires
437
Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐
fied for the tire.
Information on tire characteristics
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in side wall 1 and
under tire tread 2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
#
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#
Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
1
Preceding letter
2
Nominal tire width in millimeters
3
Aspect ratio in %
4
Tire code
5
Rim diameter
6
Load-bearing index
7
Speed rating
8
Load index
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Information about reading tire data can be
obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
438
Wheels and tires
Preceding letter 11:
R
Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
R
"P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards.
R
"LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐
facturing standards.
R
"T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for
temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio 3
3:
Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐
cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code 44 (tire type):
R
"R" radial tire
R
"D": bias ply tire
R
"B": bias belted tires
R
"ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter 55:
The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter
of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified
in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6
6:
Numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐
sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)).
The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at
least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐
cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit.
See also:
R
Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 431)
R
Maximum tire load (/ page 437)
R
Load index
Speed rating 7
7:
Specifies the approved maximum speed of the
tire.
%
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating. You can obtain information on the
required speed rating from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
IndexSpeed rating
Qup to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Rup to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Sup to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tup to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Hup to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Vup to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Wup to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Yup to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Wheels and tires
439
IndexSpeed rating
ZR...Y
1
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
1
over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
1
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index
in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there
is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐
imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
R
If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of
your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To
find out the maximum speed, ask the tire
manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
IndexSpeed rating
Q M+S
2
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
2
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
2
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
2
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol
and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐
facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire
traction on snow.
Load index 88:
R
No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire
R
"XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐
forced tire
R
"Light Load": light load tire
R
"C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on
the maximum load that the tire can carry at a
certain pressure
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire structure and characteristics: describes
the number of layers or the number of rubber-
coated belts in the tire contact surface and the
tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐
ester and other materials.
Bar: metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-
marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
US Department of Transportation.
Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the
number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐
cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
1
"ZR" stated in the tire code.
2
Or "M+S i" for winter tires
440
Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a
uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regard to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grading
assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐
ing specifications from the U.S. government. The
quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side
wall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐
ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified
for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐
tory.
The tire and information table contains the rec‐
ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐
imum permissible load and the maximum per‐
missible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐
ded tire pressures for cold tires under various
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed
of the vehicle.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment: the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is
installed.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR
is the maximum permissible axle load. The
actual load on an axle must never exceed the
gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight
rating can be found on the vehicle identification
plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which a tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle
weight comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐
ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer
drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's
side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the
GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle
including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐
gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐
cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the
maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight
of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the
maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐
ment installed at the factory.
Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure.
6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for
tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals
1 bar.
Load index: in addition to the load-bearing
index, the load index may also be imprinted on
the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-
bearing capacity of the tire more precisely.
Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐
ard equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air
conditioning system and optional equipment if
Wheels and tires
441
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is
the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or
lbs for which a tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐
mum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on
one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐
mum axle load of one axle by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of
measurement for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying
an outward force to every square inch of the tire.
The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle
has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to
ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel
rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead
to prevent the tire from changing length on the
wheel rim.
Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread
and the tire bead.
Weight of optional equipment: the combined
weight of the optional equipment weighing more
than the replaced standard parts and more than
5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as
high-performance brakes, level control system, a
roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries,
is not included in the curb weight and the weight
of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique
identification number which can be used by a
tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example,
in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a
code that contains the maximum load-bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐
tion between the tires and the road surface.
Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars)
that are distributed over the tire contact surface.
If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear
limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution
of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐
tions in a vehicle.
Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐
nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg)
multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
442
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Notes on selecting, installing and replacing
tires
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are
installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐
sion components may be damaged.
#
Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of
the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct:
R
Designation
R
Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the
correct:
R
Designation
R
Manufacturer
R
Model
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
#
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#
Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
*
NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through
tire types and sizes that have not been
approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels
and accessories which have been specially
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tires are specially adapted to the con‐
trol systems, such as ABS, ESP
®
and
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tire only for certain wheels)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, such as handling,
vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption,
etc. may otherwise be adversely affected.
Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in
the tires rubbing against the body and axle
components when loaded. This could result
in damage to the tire or the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
443
Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been checked and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*
NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐
ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐
anteed.
#
Do not use used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
*
NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires
when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width.
The lower the tire section width, the greater
is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when
driving over obstacles.
#
Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
*
NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Electronic component parts are
located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools
should not be used in the area of the valve.
This could otherwise damage the electronic
component parts.
#
Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
*
NOTE Damage to summer tires at low
ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could
form when driving with summer tires, caus‐
ing permanent damage to the tires.
#
At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C),
use M+S tires .
Accessory parts that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used
correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and inquire about:
R
Suitability
R
Legal stipulations
R
Factory recommendations
&
WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the
optimized tire compound means that the risk
of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is
increased.
In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tire running
temperature.
#
Switch on the ESP
®
and adapt your
driving style accordingly.
#
Use M+S tire at outside temperatures
of less than 10 °C (50 °F).
444
Wheels and tires
Observe the following when selecting, installing
and replacing tires:
R
Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires) and the same make.
R
Only install wheels of the same size on one
axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to install a different
wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order
to drive to the specialist workshop.
R
Only install tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: All installed wheels must be equip‐
ped with functioning sensors for the tire
pressure monitoring system.
R
At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win‐
ter tires or all-season tire marked M+S for all
wheels.
Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐
tions.
R
For M+S tires, only use tires with the same
tread.
R
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tires installed.
If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,
this must be indicated by an appropriate
label in the driver's field of vision.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
R
When replacing with tires that do not fea‐
ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with
MOExtended tires are not equipped with a
TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires
that do not feature run-flat characteristics,
e.g. winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 431)
R
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 438)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 425)
R
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 452)
Notes on rotating wheels
&
WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tires have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐
ponents may also be damaged.
#
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐
sions.
Wheels and tires
445
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
differ:
R
Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tire
R
Rear wheels wear more at the center of the
tire
Do not drive with tires that have too little tread
depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet
roads (hydroplaning).
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
available, rotate the tires every
3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km),
depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction
of rotation is maintained.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Changing a wheel" when doing so
(/ page 447).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following
notes:
R
After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
R
Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.
For more information on which tire-changing
tools are required and approved for performing a
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
You require the following tools, for instance, to
change a wheel:
R
Jack
R
Chock
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1
in the trunk.
Tool bag contains:
R
Jack
R
Gloves
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
R
Folding chock
R
Ratchet for jack
446
Wheels and tires
Setting up the folding chock
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements:
R
The required tire-change tool is available. If
your vehicle is not equipped with the tire-
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist
workshop to find out about suitable tools.
R
The vehicle is not on a slope.
R
The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
#
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
#
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift into position j.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
#
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
#
Remove the hub caps if necessary
(/ page 447).
#
Raise the vehicle (/ page 448).
Removing and installing hub caps
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 447).
Vehicles with steel wheels
The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts. Before
unscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel
trim.
#
To remove: using both hands, carefully reach
into two wheel trim openings and remove the
wheel trim.
Plastic hub cap
#
To remove: turn the center cover of the hub
cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub
cap.
#
To install: make sure that the center cover
of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.
Wheels and tires
447
#
Position the hub cap and turn the center
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages
physically and audibly.
Aluminum hub cap
#
To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap
1.
%
The socket can be found in the tire-change
tool kit.
#
Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2.
#
Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it.
#
To install: position hub cap 1 and turn until
it is completely flush with the wheel.
#
Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
#
Attach wheel wrench 3 to socket 2 and
tighten the hub cap clockwise.
Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm).
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
R
There are no persons in the vehicle.
R
The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 447).
R
The hub caps have been removed
(/ page 447).
Important notes on using the jack:
R
Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise
the vehicle.
R
The jack is only designed for raising and
holding the vehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐
nance work under the vehicle.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R
The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
R
Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle.
R
Never lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake.
448
Wheels and tires
R
Do not open or close any doors or the trunk
lid.
#
Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts
on the wheel you wish to change by about
one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐
pletely.
Position of jack support points
&
WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
#
Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned
vertically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐
cle raised.
#
The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.
#
Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
Wheels and tires
449
#
Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.
%
If there is a total loss of pressure in a tire, it
may be possible that the jack cannot be
positioned at jack support point 1. In this
case, unload the vehicle.
#
Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits
completely on jack support point 1 and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
#
Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maxi‐
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
#
Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 450).
Removing a wheel
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is raised (/ page 448).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.
*
NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
a dirty surface.
#
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐
pletely.
#
Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
#
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐
pletely.
#
Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store it
in the trunk.
#
Notes on removing an emergency spare
wheel (/ page 452).
#
Install the new wheel (/ page 450).
Mounting a new wheel
Requirements:
R
The wheel is removed (/ page 450).
450
Wheels and tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/
wheel nuts to come loose.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐
ing.
#
Never oil or grease the threads.
#
In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
#
Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐
aged hub threads replaced.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Observe the information on the choice of
tires (/ page 443).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an
arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐
tion of rotation when installing.
#
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
#
Notes on installing an emergency spare
wheel (/ page 452).
&
WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
#
Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
#
Be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
(/ page 443).
#
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts
which have been approved by Mercedes-
Benz and for the wheel in question.
*
NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel
rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw‐
ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint
can be damaged.
#
Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first
wheel bolt.
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated until they are
finger-tight.
#
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
#
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
#
Lower the vehicle (/ page 451).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements:
R
The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 450).
Wheels and tires
451
#
Place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters "AB" are visible.
#
To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet of the
jack counter-clockwise.
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
a maximum of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to
the specified tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
&
WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
#
Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
#
If you are not sure, do not move the
vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop and have the tightening tor‐
que checked immediately.
#
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐
ted wheel and adjust accordingly.
#
Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning
system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn‐
ing system (/ page 430).
Exception: the new wheel is an emergency
spare wheel.
#
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring
system (/ page 429).
Exception: the new wheel is an emergency
spare wheel.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tire dimensions
The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and
the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mount‐
ing an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
To prevent hazardous situations:
452
Wheels and tires
#
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#
Never mount more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs
in size.
#
Only use an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size briefly.
#
Do not switch off ESP
®
.
#
>Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced
at the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop. The new wheel must have the
correct dimensions.
Observe the following notes on removing an
emergency spare wheel:
R
Before stowing the emergency spare wheel,
make sure there is no air left in the tire.
If necessary, allow the air to escape.
R
To release air from the tire: remove the
valve cap of the tire.
R
Press down the metal insert in the valve
using a pointed object, e.g. a pen.
R
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
R
Stow the deflated emergency spare wheel in
the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk
(/ page 453).
Observe the following notes on installing an
emergency spare wheel:
R
Install the emergency spare wheel when it is
deflated (/ page 450).
R
Inflate the emergency spare wheel after
installing it (/ page 454).
The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐
gency spare wheel installed is 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Do not equip the emergency spare wheel with
snow chains.
Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
%
Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn‐
ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is
installed the tire pressure loss warning sys‐
tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the
system again when the emergency spare
wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: If an emergency spare wheel is
installed the tire pressure monitoring system
cannot function reliably. For a few minutes
after an emergency spare wheel is installed,
the system may still display the tire pressure
of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys‐
tem again when the emergency spare wheel
has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 431)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 425)
Removing the emergency spare wheel
The deflated emergency spare wheel is secured
in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.
#
Observe the information on mounting tires
(/ page 443).
#
Open the trunk.
Wheels and tires
453
#
Detach the securing straps.
#
Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the
securing straps from the brackets.
#
Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the emergency spare wheel.
#
Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the emergency spare wheel.
Inflating the emergency spare wheel
*
NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#
Do not run the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes without
interruption.
Requirements:
R
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes
on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel
and on the tire inflation compressor.
R
Remove the tire inflation compressor from
the stowage well under the trunk floor
(/ page 403).
#
Remove sticker 1 from the tire inflation
compressor housing and affix it to the instru‐
ment cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
#
Pull filler hose 2 and plug 4 out of the tire
inflation compressor housing.
#
Insert plug 8 of filler hose 2 in the socket
on the tire inflation compressor and then
turn it until plug 8 engages.
#
Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer‐
gency spare wheel.
#
Screw union nut 3 of filler hose 2 onto the
valve.
#
Make sure on and off switch 5 of the tire
inflation compressor is set to 0.
#
Insert plug 4 in a socket in your vehicle.
R
12 V socket (/ page 108).
R
Observe the notes on sockets (/ page 108).
#
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni‐
tion lock.
#
Press on and off switch 5 on the tire infla‐
tion compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
shown on pressure gauge 6.
454
Wheels and tires
#
Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is stated on the
label of the emergency spare wheel.
#
When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on and off switch 5 on the
tire inflation compressor to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
#
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni‐
tion lock.
#
If the tire pressure is higher than the speci‐
fied pressure, press pressure release valve
button 7 until the correct tire pressure has
been reached.
#
Unscrew union nut 3 of filler hose 2 from
the valve.
#
Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare
wheel onto the valve again.
#
Stow filler hose 2 and plug 4 in the lower
section of the compressor housing.
#
Stow the tire inflation compressor in the
vehicle.
Wheels and tires
455
Notes on technical data
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
The data stated only applies to vehicles with
standard equipment. You can obtain further
information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Vehicle electronics
Two-way radios
Notes on installing two-way radios
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the on-board elec‐
tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or
retrofitted incorrectly.
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle.
#
You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐
rect operation of two-way radios
If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
could interfere with the on-board electronics,
e.g.:
R
if the two-way radio is not connected to
an exterior antenna
R
if the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not of low reflection
This could jeopardies the operating safety of
the vehicle.
#
Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
#
When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the
low-reflection exterior antenna.
*
NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐
mit due to failure to comply with the
instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
#
Only use approved frequency bands.
#
Observe the maximum permissible out‐
put power in these frequency bands.
#
Only use approved antenna positions.
456
Technical data
1
Front roof area
2
Rear roof area
3
Rear fenders
4
Trunk lid
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof,
installing an antenna to the front or rear roof
area is not permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you
install the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the
legal requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply and antenna
connectors provided in the pre-installation. Be
sure to observe the manufacturer's supplements
when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the values
in the following table.
Frequency band and maximum transmission
output
Frequency band Maximum transmis‐
sion output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
(100 W)
4 m frequency band
74 - 88 MHz
(30 W)
2 m frequency band
144 - 174 MHz
(50 W)
trunked radio sys‐
tem/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
(10 W)
70 cm frequency
band
420 - 450 MHz
(35 W)
Two-way radio
(2G/3G/4G)
(10 W)
Technical data
457
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R
Two-way radios with a maximum transmis‐
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for some
wavebands.
This applies to the following wavebands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm frequency band
R
2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
number overview
Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate (USA only)
1
Permissible gross weight
2
Maximum permissible front axle load
3
Maximum permissible rear axle load
4
Paint code
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
458
Technical data
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
1
Permissible gross weight
2
Maximum permissible front axle load
3
Maximum permissible rear axle load
4
Paint code
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum
gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight
that can be carried on one axle (front or rear
axle).
Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross
vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle
weight rating for the front or rear axle.
VIN, engine number and other signs
1
Engine number stamped into the crankcase
2
VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped
into the crossmember
3
Plate with information about emissions test‐
ing, including confirmation of emissions
guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as
for California
4
VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind‐
shield
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from operating
fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
#
Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
#
Always store operating fluids sealed in
their original containers.
Technical data
459
#
Always keep children away from operat‐
ing fluids.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
#
Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
You can identify operating fluids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids
is available at the following locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#
Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided.
#
Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while
refueling the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
#
Keep children away from fuel.
#
Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#
Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
460
Technical data
#
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel
Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas‐
oline engine
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
*
NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#
Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with
E10 fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the
wrong fuel:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐
fur, this can produce unpleasant odors.
Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane
number specified in the instruction label in the
fuel filler flap (/ page 147).
If you want maximum engine output: only
refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline
with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/
95 RON.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also refuel with
unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/
91 RON. This may reduce engine output and
increase fuel consumption.
Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower
RON.
*
NOTE Premature wear through unleaded
regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the
engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐
gevity and performance.
If unleaded premium grade gasoline is
unavailable and you have to refuel using
unleaded regular gasoline:
#
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and fill up as
soon as possible with unleaded pre‐
mium grade gasoline.
#
Do not drive at the maximum design
speed.
#
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3000 rpm.
Technical data
461
Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
R
At a gas station
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
R
On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Information on additives in gasoline
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
*
NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive
may lead to malfunctions occurring.
#
Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel
brands that have additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not
have sufficient additives. Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as a result. In this
case, in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Tank content and fuel reserve
Capacity
Model Total capacity
All models 13.5 gal (51.0 liters)
Model of which reserve
fuel
All models1.3 gal (5.0 liters)
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do not use engine oils or oil filters other
than those which meet the specifica‐
tions necessary for the prescribed
service intervals.
#
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#
Do not use additives.
#
Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
462
Technical data
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Further information on engine oil and oil filters is
available at the following locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
Quality and capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Gasoline enginesEngine oil specifica‐
tions
All models 229.51, 229.52,
229.61
229.71*
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐
sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each
case; observe possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes).
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,
it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐
cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE
viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes must be
observed.
The following values refer to an oil change,
including the oil filter.
Capacity
Model Capacity
All models 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters)
Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐
tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low,
vapor pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard.
This causes the braking effect to be
impaired.
#
Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
You can obtain further information on brake fluid
in the following places:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
Technical data
463
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#
Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze.
#
Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening.
#
Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting
the vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
ant
#
Only add coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐
tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1:
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
*
NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
tected against overheating and corrosion at
high outside temperatures.
#
Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
#
Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐
ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
concentrate in the engine cooling system should
be:
R
A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C))
R
A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 °F (-45 °C))
Coolant capacity
Capacity
ModelCapacity
All models 9.4 US qt (8.9 liters)
Notes on windshield washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
464
Technical data
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
#
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
*
NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting
due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐
age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐
ing.
#
Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐
Fit.
*
NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windshield washer fluids
#
Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
terFit with other windshield washer flu‐
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill
level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
Recommended windshield washer fluid:
R
Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R
Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer
fluid all year round.
Refrigerant
Notes on refrigerant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 459).
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐
ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐
mate control system may be damaged.
#
Only use the refrigerant R‑134a
*
NOTE Damage to the climate control
system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐
pressor oil
#
Only use refrigerant compressor oil that
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
#
Do not mix the approved refrigerant
compressor oil with a different refriger‐
ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may be car‐
ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop.
All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐
ard J639, must be adhered to.
The instruction label on the climate control sys‐
tem for the refrigerant type and the refrigerant
compressor oil is located on the inside of the
hood.
Technical data
465
1
Hazard and service warning symbols
2
Refrigerant filling capacity
3
Applicable standards
4
PAG oil part number
5
GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig‐
erant used
6
Refrigerant type
Symbols 1 warn of the following:
R
Possible dangers
R
The need to have service work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop only
Refrigerant filling capacity
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model Refrigerant
All models24.3 ± 0.4 oz
(690 ± 10 g)
Model PAG oil
All models2.8 ± 0.4 oz
(80 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the
following factors:
R
Tires
R
Load
R
Condition of the suspension
R
Optional equipment
Height when opened
Model
11 Height
when
opened
All models 68.1 in
(1729 mm)
466
Technical data
Vehicle dimensions
All models
Vehicle length179.1 in
(4549 mm)
Vehicle width including out‐
side mirrors
78.4 in
(1992 mm)
Vehicle height 57.1 in
(1451 mm)
Wheelbase 107. 4 in
(2729 mm)
Turning radius 36.1 ft
(11.0 m)
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci‐
fied vehicle data:
R
Items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the payload.
Roof load
Model Maximum roof load
All models 165 lb (75 kg)
Technical data
467
Display messages
Introduction
Notes on display messages
Display messages appear on the multifunction
display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐
plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ
from the symbols on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages
are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display mes‐
sages and follow the additional notes in the
Operator's Manual.
For some display messages, a symbol will also
be shown:
R
Õ Further information
R
¨ Hide display message
You can select the desired symbol by swiping
left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the Õ symbol to show further information
on the multifunction display. Press the ¨
symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the P button or the left-hand Touch
Control. The display messages will then be
stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as
quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐
play messages continuously until the cause of
the display message has been rectified.
Calling up stored display messages
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
1 Message
If there are no display messages, No Messages
will appear on the multifunction display.
#
Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
To exit the message memory: press the
P button.
468
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
6
SRS Malfunction Service
Required
*The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 35).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front Left Malfunction
Service Required (example)
*The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 35).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
469
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side Curtain Airbag
Malfunction Service
Required (example)
*The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 35).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag
If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with high deceleration.
#
Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag Dis-
abled See Operator's Man-
ual
*The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a per‐
son with an adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the
system detects may be too low.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent and cannot perform its intended protective function.
470
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior,
especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
#
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45).
#
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator's
Manual
*The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag are enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the
following situations:
R
even when a child, a person of small stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is
located on the front passenger seat
R
even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if a child restraint system is used while the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
471
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45).
#
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
*
The PRE‑SAFE
®
functions are malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Á
Obtain a New Key
*The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
472
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Á
Replace Key Battery
*The SmartKey battery is discharged.
#
Replace the battery (/ page 67).
Á
Key Not Detected (white
display message)
*The SmartKey is currently undetected.
#
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
#
If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey
(/ page 132).
Á
Key Not Detected (red dis‐
play message)
*The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R
You can no longer start the engine.
R
You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
#
Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 132).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
473
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Place the Key in the
Marked Space See Opera-
tor's Manual
*SmartKey detection is malfunctioning.
#
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
#
Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 132).
Á
Don't Forget Your Key
*Awarning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Left Low
Beam (example)
*The corresponding light source is faulty.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
%
LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp are faulty.
474
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Malfunction See Opera-
tor’s Manual
*The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Automatic Headlamp Mode
Inoperative
*The light sensor is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Headlamps Inopera-
tive
*The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch On Headlamps
*You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
#
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
475
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Switch Off Lights
*You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
#
Turn the light switch to the à position.
b
Intell. Light System Inoper-
ative
*The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of
the Intelligent Light System.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 116).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Now Available display message will appear.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Inoperative
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Malfunctioning
*The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
476
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
d
Vehicle Ready to Drive
Switch the Ignition Off
Before Exiting
*You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
#
When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐
Key with you.
#
If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery
(starting assistance).
Ù
Steering Malfunction
Increased Physical Effort
See Operator's Manual
*The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
#
If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
#
If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
477
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Steering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Ù
Steering Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
*The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
478
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
û
Before Starting the Engine,
Turn Steering Wheel
*The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering.
#
Switch off the ignition.
#
To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right.
#
Switch the ignition back on.
C
*At least one door is open.
#
Close all doors.
M
*The hood is open.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
#
Never unlatch the engine hood while driving.
#
Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
479
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Close the hood.
N
*The trunk lid is open.
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid.
#
Never drive with the trunk lid open.
#
Close the trunk lid.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
*The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
#
Refill washer fluid (/ page 390).
480
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
+
Check Coolant Level See
Operator's Manual
*The coolant level is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
#
Add coolant (/ page 390).
#
Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ÿ
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi-
cle Turn Engine Off
*The coolant is too hot.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
#
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
481
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
ÿ
*The fan motor is faulty.
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
To switch engine off, press
and hold Start/Stop but-
ton for at least 3 seconds
or press 3 times.
*You have pressed the start/stop button while driving.
#
Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 131).
æ
Fuel Level Low
*The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#
Refuel.
æ
Gas Cap Loose
*The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
#
Close the fuel filler cap.
#
If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
482
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Transmission
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Apply Brake to Shift from
'P'
*
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and Start
Engine
*
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission
position.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Change the transmission position.
#
Start the engine.
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi-
cle is Stationary
*
Park position j can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary.
#
To stop, depress the brake pedal.
#
Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.
Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'
*
You have attempted to select transmission position k.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Select transmission position k.
Driver's Door Open &
Transmission Not in P Risk
of Vehicle Rolling Away
*
The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
#
Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
483
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
N Permanently Active Risk
of Rolling Away
*
While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged.
#
To stop, depress the brake pedal.
#
Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.
#
To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
Service Required Do Not
Shift Gears Visit Dealer
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed.
#
When transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐
mission position.
#
For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possible
Service Required
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction
Stop
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Engage park position j.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc-
tion
*The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
484
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine.
#
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Transmission Malfunction
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears.
#
Let the transmission cool down.
#
If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
d
Trans. Oil Overheated
Drive on with Care
*The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be
temporarily impaired.
#
Drive at low engine speeds.
#
Avoid sporty driving.
#
Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
Parking Lock Inoperative
Apply Parking Brake
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The park position j cannot be selected.
#
Park the vehicle safely.
#
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Teaching in Transmission
Operate Selector Lever
Apply Brake for XX s Risk
of Vehicle Rolling Away
*The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away.
#
Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in process.
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Select park position j, transmission position k or neutral i.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
485
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Apply Parking Brake Risk
of Rolling Away See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The transmission position cannot be reliably identified.
#
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Teaching in Transmission
Complete
*The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.
Transmission Malfunction
Service Required
*The transmission is malfunctioning.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
486
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Parking Brake See Opera-
tor's Manual
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
#
Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐
tric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
#
Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157).
or
#
Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 157).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
487
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
To apply:
#
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157).
To release:
#
Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can‐
ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It
then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the battery charge level is too low:
#
Charge the battery.
488
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
To apply:
#
Switch off the ignition.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If the electric parking brake is not to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed,
leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
#
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release:
#
If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
489
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Please Release Parking
Brake
*
The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R
A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 157).
R
You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 158).
#
Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
#
Release the electric parking brake manually.
490
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Turn On the Ignition to
Release the Parking Brake
*
The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
#
Switch on the ignition.
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid Level
*There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
491
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Check Brake Pads See
Operator's Manual
*The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power
When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
492
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
é
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper-
ative
*ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break!
*ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 204).
#
If necessary, take a break.
ä
Malfunction Drive at Max.
50 mph
*The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
#
Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h).
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 179).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
493
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#
If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision.
#
Check the tire pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist Inop-
erative
*Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Ø
*Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 179).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
#
Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Beginning Emergency Stop
*Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is initiated (/ page 182).
#
Put your hands back on the steering wheel.
You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:
R
Steering
R
Braking or accelerating
R
Pressing a steering-wheel button
R
Operating Touch Control
R
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
494
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Steering Asst. Cur-
rently Unavailable Due to
Multiple Emergency Stops
*Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
#
Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 211).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative
*Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's
Manual
*Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 208).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
or
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Blind Spot Assist Inopera-
tive
*Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
495
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 208).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
or
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
*Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC Inoperative
See Operator's Manual
*Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
#
If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Traffic Sign Assist Inopera-
tive
*Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
#
If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
496
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ç
ð
Ä
¸
Currently Unavailable
Radar Sensors Dirty
*The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
R
Dirt on the sensors
R
Heavy rain or snow
R
Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Clean all sensors (/ page 397).
#
Restart the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
497
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
_
ð
Ä
à
á
Currently Unavailable Cam-
era View Restricted
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:
R
Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
R
Condensation on the windshield in front of the camera
%
Condensation detected on the windshield will be automatically removed using a built-in heater within approx‐
imately 12 minutes.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield if necessary.
ë
Off
*The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.
#
Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 185).
498
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ç
- - - mph
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
#
Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 174).
ç
Suspended
*If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be put
into passive mode (/ page 183).
ç
Off
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 174).
Active Distance Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 172).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Distance Assist Inop-
erative
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
499
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist Now
Available
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 174).
¯
- - - mph
*Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
#
Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 171).
Cruise Control Inoperative
*Cruise control is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Off
*Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 170).
500
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
!
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*
ABS and ESP
®
are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ABS and ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
501
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ABS and ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
502
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
503
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
T
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Currently Limited See
Operator's Manual
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially
available.
504
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 164).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Limited See Opera-
tor's Manual
* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS is malfunctioning.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes me connect
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Mercedes me connect
Services Limited See Oper-
ator's Manual
*Service limited.
At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
#
Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 27).
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
505
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
G
Inoperative
*At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is
malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
12 V Battery See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The engine is off and the charge level is too low.
#
Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the battery:
#
Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.
*If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
See Operator's Manual
*The battery is not being charged.
*
NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
506
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.
*
NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
Running
*The battery charge level is too low.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Leave the engine running.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
507
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure monitor
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur-
rently Unavailable
*There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are
being received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable.
#
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
Tire Press. Monitor Inopera-
tive
*The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inop-
erative No Wheel Sensors
*The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
#
Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
508
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
*There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐
ted tire.
#
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Check Tires
*The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure (/ page 424) and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
509
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Please Correct Tire Pres-
sure
*The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
#
Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 429).
h
Warning Tire Malfunction
*The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire
Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways:
R
The tires can overheat and cause a fire.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Do not drive with a flat tire.
#
Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes on flat tires (/ page 401).
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tires.
510
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tires Overheated
*At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
#
Drive more slowly.
Decrease Speed
*At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds.
#
Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
#
Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Tire pressure loss warning system
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Check Tire Pressure Soon
*Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
511
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure (/ page 424) and the tires.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 429).
Check Tire Pressure Then
Restart Run Flat Indicator
*Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 429).
Run Flat Indicator Inopera-
tive
*Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
512
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine oil
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Check Engine Oil Level
(Add 1 quart)
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#
When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 389).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 462).
5
Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
513
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Engine Oil Level Low Stop
Vehicle Turn Engine Off
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 389).
#
Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 462).
5
Engine Oil Pressure Stop
Switch Off Engine
*Display message only for certain engines:
The oil pressure is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure
#
Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
514
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
5
Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured
*The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
ignition is switched on. Some indicator and
warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This
behavior is non-critical. These indicator and
warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they
light up or flash after the engine has been star‐
ted or during a journey.
Instrument Display (standard) Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display
Depending on the display setting, the positions
of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display
may differ from the example shown.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
515
Indicator and warning lamps:
L
Low beam (/ page 113)
T
Parking lamps (/ page 113)
K
High beam (/ page 114)
#!
Turn signal light (/ page 114)
R
Rear fog light (/ page 113)
6
Restraint system (/ page 517)
ü
Seat belt not fastened (/ page 517)
$
USA: brakes (red) (/ page 522)
J
Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 522)
!
Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 522)
F
USA: electric parking brake applied
(red) (/ page 522)
!
Canada: electric parking brake
applied (red) (/ page 522)
!
ABS malfunction (/ page 525)
÷
ESP
®
(/ page 525)
å
ESP
®
OFF (/ page 525)
L
Distance warning (/ page 524)
Ù
Electric power steering malfunction
(/ page 518)
;
Check Engine (/ page 519)
#
Electrical malfunction (/ page 519)
æ
Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐
tion indicator (/ page 519)
ÿ
Vehicles with a Widescreen Cock‐
pit: coolant too hot or cold
(/ page 519)
h
Tire pressure monitor (/ page 528)
516
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 35).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
7
Seat belt warning lamp
flashes
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
*The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
#
Fasten your seat belt(/ page 39).
*There are objects on the front passenger seat.
#
Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
517
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
7
Seat belt warning lamp
lights up
The red seat belt warning lamp will light up for six seconds once the engine has started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
*The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#
Fasten your seat belt (/ page 39).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Warning lamp for electric
power steering
The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The power-assisted steering or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
518
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*Possible causes:
R
The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
R
Coolant level too low
R
The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R
The radiator fan is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
519
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
or
#
Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
#
Check the coolant level (/ page 390).
#
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.
;
Engine diagnosis warning
lamp
The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.
In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.
#
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Electrical malfunction warn‐
ing lamp
The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit.
*There is a malfunction in the electrics.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
520
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
æ
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
*The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#
Refuel.
æ
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving.
*There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐
ing.
#
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
521
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
F
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA
only)
!
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Can‐
ada only)
!
Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
*
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
522
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$
Brake warning lamp (USA)
J
Brakes warning lamp (Can‐
ada)
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*Possible causes:
R
The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
R
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
#
Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circum‐
stances.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
523
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
L
Warning lamp for distance
warning function
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
*The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
#
Be prepared to brake immediately.
#
Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 164).
524
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
!
ABS warning lamp
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
525
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp flashes
The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
*One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 161).
#
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp lights
up
The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
526
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp
The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*
ESP
®
is deactivated.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP
®
deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety sys‐
tems is also limited.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Only deactivate ESP
®
for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated, ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
#
Have ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Observe the notes on deactivating ESP
®
(/ page 161).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
527
Tire pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
h
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp
flashes
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
*The tire pressure monitoring system is defective.
&
WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
*The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
528
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
529
1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC ..................................................... 147
Function ............................................... 147
12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle)
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V)
360° Camera ........................................... 195
Care .................................................... 397
Function .............................................. 195
Opening the camera cover (rear view
camera) ............................................... 198
Selecting a view ................................... 198
A
A/C function
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 127
Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 126
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .............. 161
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment
Mercedes me connect .........................355
Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating ......................... 66
Activating/deactivating automatic
volume adjustment
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 382
Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 208
Activating/deactivating ........................ 211
Brake application ................................. 210
Function .............................................. 208
System limitations ...............................208
Active Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................... 164
Setting ................................................. 170
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 172
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............182
Active Lane Change Assist ................... 181
Calling up a speed ...............................174
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 183
Function ............................................... 172
Increasing/decreasing speed ..............174
Requirements .......................................174
Route-based speed adaptation ............177
Steering wheel buttons ........................ 174
Storing a speed .................................... 174
Switching off/deactivating .................. 174
Switching on/activating ....................... 174
System limitations ...............................172
Active Emergency Stop Assist ...............182
Active Lane Change Assist ...................... 181
Activating/deactivating .......................182
Function ............................................... 181
Active Lane Keeping Assist .....................211
Activating/deactivating .......................213
Activating/deactivating the warning .... 213
Function ............................................... 211
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 213
System limits ....................................... 211
Active Parking Assist .............................. 198
Cross Traffic Alert ............................... 203
Drive Away Assist ................................ 203
Exiting a parking space ........................ 201
Function .............................................. 198
Maneuvering assistance ...................... 204
Parking ................................................ 200
System limitations ...............................198
530
Index
Active Service System PLUS
see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... 176
Display ................................................. 176
Function ............................................... 176
Active Steering Assist .............................179
Activating/deactivating .......................181
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............182
Active Lane Change Assist ................... 181
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 183
Function .............................................. 179
System limitations ...............................179
Adaptive cruise control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function ............................................... 116
Switching on/off .................................. 117
Additives .................................................. 462
Engine oil ............................................ 462
Fuel ..................................................... 462
Additives (engine oil)
see Additives
Additives (fuel)
see Fuel
Address book
see Contacts
Adjusting the balance/fader
Advanced sound system ......................384
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 382
Adjusting the bass, mid-range and
treble
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 382
Adjusting the mid-range, treble and
bass
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 382
Adjusting the sound focus
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 383
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings
Advanced sound system ......................383
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 382
Advanced sound system
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 384
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 383
Calling up the sound menu .................. 383
Information .......................................... 383
Switching volume adjustment on/off
.............................................................383
After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag
Reduced protection ...............................43
Air conditioning menu
Calling up ............................................ 127
Air distribution
Setting (multimedia system) ................127
Air inlet
see Air-water duct
Air pressure
see Tire pressure
Air vents ................................................... 129
Adjusting (front) .................................. 129
Adjusting (rear) .................................... 129
Air vents
see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode ............................ 128
Index
531
Air-water duct .......................................... 391
Keeping free ........................................391
Airbag .........................................................40
Activation .............................................. 35
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....40
Installation locations .............................40
Knee airbag ........................................... 40
Overview ............................................... 40
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....45
Protection ..............................................42
Side airbag ............................................ 40
Window curtain airbag ...........................40
Alarm
see Panic alarm
Alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
All-wheel drive
see 4MATIC
Alternative route
see Route
Ambient lighting
Setting (multimedia system) ................118
Android Auto ............................................ 349
Connecting a mobile phone ................. 350
Control using the application buttons
.............................................................351
Ending ................................................. 351
Information .......................................... 350
Overview ............................................. 349
Sound settings ..................................... 351
Transferred vehicle data ......................351
Animals
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anti-theft protection
Immobilizer ............................................ 86
Anticipatory occupant protection
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay
®
........................................348
Connecting an iPhone
®
....................... 348
Control using the application buttons
.............................................................349
Ending ................................................. 349
Notes .................................................. 348
Overview ............................................. 348
Sound settings .................................... 349
Transferred vehicle data ......................351
Assistance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 220
Assistance systems
see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 385
Battery disconnection periods .............386
Displaying the service due date ........... 385
Function/notes ................................... 385
Regular maintenance work .................. 385
Special service requirements .............. 385
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 86
Activating/deactivating the interior
motion sensor ....................................... 88
Arming/disarming the tow-away
alarm .....................................................88
532
Index
Deactivating the alarm .......................... 87
Function ................................................ 86
Function of the interior motion sensor .. 88
The tow-away alarm function .................87
ATTENTION ASSIST ......................... 204, 206
Function .............................................. 204
Setting ................................................. 206
System limitations ...............................204
Attention assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights .......................... 114
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 137
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 137
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff .......................................... 44, 45
Function of the automatic front
passenger front airbag shutoff .............. 44
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....45
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating .......................125
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 142
Drive program display .......................... 140
Drive programs .................................... 139
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 139
Engaging drive position ....................... 144
Engaging neutral .................................. 143
Engaging park position ........................ 143
Engaging reverse gear .........................143
Kickdown ............................................. 145
Manual gearshifting .............................144
Steering wheel paddle shifters ............ 144
Transmission position display .............. 142
Transmission positions ........................ 142
Automatic transmission (problem)
see Transmission (problem)
B
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................... 161
Battery
Charging (Remote Online) .................... 133
SmartKey ............................................... 67
Battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 412
Charging ...............................................411
Charging (Remote Online) .................... 133
Notes .................................................. 408
Notes (starting assistance and
charging) .............................................. 410
Replacing .............................................412
Starting assistance .............................. 411
Belt
see Seat belt
Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 208
Activating/deactivating ........................ 211
Function .............................................. 208
System limitations ...............................208
Index
533
Bluetooth
®
............................................... 283
Activating/deactivating .......................283
Information .......................................... 283
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Notes .................................................. 463
Brake force distribution
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 164
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 161
Active Brake Assist .............................. 164
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................161
Driving tips .......................................... 134
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 164
HOLD function .....................................185
Limited braking effect (salt-treated
roads) .................................................. 134
New/replaced brakepads/brake
discs .................................................... 134
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 134
Braking assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown
Changing a wheel ................................ 447
Overview of the help functions .............. 18
Roadside Assistance .............................. 24
Tow-starting .........................................418
Towing away ......................................... 414
Transporting the vehicle ....................... 416
Breakdown
see Flat tire
Burmester
®
surround sound system .....382
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 382
Adjusting the sound focus ................... 383
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 382
Automatic volume adjustment .............382
Calls up the sound menu ..................... 382
Information .......................................... 382
Selecting the sound profile .................. 383
Buttons
Steering wheel .....................................215
C
Call list
Deleting ...............................................343
Making a call ....................................... 343
Overview ............................................. 342
Selecting options ................................ 343
Selecting options for suggestions ........ 343
Calling up the sound menu
Advanced sound system ......................383
Calls .......................................................... 338
Accepting ............................................ 338
Activating functions during a call ........ 338
Calls with several participants .............338
Declining ............................................. 338
Ending a call ........................................ 338
Incoming call during an existing call .... 339
Making ................................................ 338
Mercedes me ...................................... 352
Calls up the sound menu
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 382
Camera
see 360° Camera
see Rear view camera
534
Index
Car key
see SmartKey
Car wash
see Care
Car wash (care) ........................................391
Car-to-X-Communication
Displaying hazard warnings .................. 319
Overview ..............................................318
Sending hazard warnings .....................319
Care .......................................................... 398
Air-water duct ...................................... 391
Automatic car wash ............................. 391
Carpet .................................................398
Decorative foil .....................................395
Display ................................................ 398
Exterior lighting ................................... 397
Headliner ............................................. 398
Matte finish ......................................... 394
Paintwork ............................................ 394
Plastic trim .......................................... 398
Power washer ...................................... 392
Real wood/trim elements ...................398
Rear view camera ................................ 397
Rear view camera/360° Camera ........ 397
Seat belts ............................................ 398
Seat cover ........................................... 398
Sensors ............................................... 397
Tailpipes .............................................. 397
Washing by hand ................................. 393
Wheels/rims ....................................... 397
Windows .............................................. 397
Wiper blades .......................................397
Cargo tie-down rings ...............................104
Carpet (Care) ...........................................398
Change of address ..................................... 24
Change of ownership ................................ 24
Changing a wheel
Preparation .......................................... 447
Raising the vehicle .............................. 448
Changing a wheel
see Emergency spare wheel
Changing gears ........................................ 144
Manually ..............................................144
Changing hub caps .................................. 447
Character entry
On the touchpad .................................. 275
Charging
Battery (vehicle) ...................................411
USB port ..............................................109
Child safety lock
Rear door .............................................. 62
Rear side windows ................................. 63
Child seat
Attaching (notes) ................................... 54
Basic instructions .................................. 49
Front-passenger seat (notes) ................. 60
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 55
Notes on risks and dangers ...................50
Securing on the front passenger seat ....61
Securing on the rear seat ...................... 59
Top Tether ..............................................57
Children
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle .............50
Basic instructions .................................. 49
Special seat belt retractor ..................... 55
Chock ....................................................... 446
Storage location ..................................446
Chock
see Chock
Index
535
Cleaning
see Care
Climate control
Activating/deactivating .......................126
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (control panel) .......................126
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (multimedia system) .............. 127
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (control panel) .......... 128
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (multimedia sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 128
Air distribution settings .......................127
Air-recirculation mode .........................128
Automatic control ................................ 127
Calling up the air conditioning menu ... 127
Control panel for 3-zone automatic
climate control .................................... 126
Filling capacity for PAG oil ...................466
Front air vents ..................................... 129
Note .................................................... 126
Rear air vents ...................................... 129
Refrigerant .......................................... 465
Refrigerant filling capacity ...................466
Removing condensation from the
windows .............................................. 128
Residual heat ....................................... 128
Setting (multimedia system) ................127
Ventilating the vehicle (convenience
opening) ................................................ 79
Cockpit ......................................................... 6
Overview ................................................. 6
Coffee cup symbol
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Combination switch ................................. 114
Compass .................................................. 325
Computer
see On-board computer
Connection status
Displaying ............................................ 361
Overview .............................................360
Contacts ................................................... 339
Calling up ............................................ 340
Deleting ............................................... 341
Deleting favorites ................................ 342
Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 339
Importing ............................................. 341
Importing (overview) ...........................340
Information .......................................... 339
Making a call ....................................... 341
Name format .......................................340
Options ................................................ 341
Saving as a favorite ............................. 342
Selecting options for suggestions ........ 341
Storing .................................................341
Convenience closing feature .................... 80
Convenience opening ................................ 79
Coolant (engine)
Capacity .............................................. 464
Check level .......................................... 390
Notes ................................................... 464
Copyrights
License .................................................. 32
Trademarks ............................................ 33
Cornering light function .......................... 116
Cross Traffic Alert ...................................203
Crosswind Assist
Function/notes ................................... 164
Cruise control .......................................... 170
Buttons ................................................ 171
536
Index
Calling up a speed ...............................171
Function .............................................. 170
Requirements: .....................................171
Selecting .............................................. 171
Setting a speed .................................... 171
Storing a speed .................................... 171
Switching off ........................................ 171
Switching on ........................................ 171
System limitations ...............................170
Cup holder ............................................... 106
Installing/removing (center console) ... 106
Rear passenger compartment .............108
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) .........28
Customer Relations Department .............28
D
Damage detection (parked vehicle) .......158
Damping adjustment ............................... 187
Dash cam
Starting/ending a video recording ...... 329
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Dashcam
Configuring the settings ......................330
Deleting a video recording ................... 330
Notes .................................................. 328
Selecting a USB device ....................... 329
Data acquisition
Vehicle .................................................. 29
Data import/export ................................ 286
Function/notes ................................... 286
Importing/exporting ............................287
Data storage
Electronic control units ......................... 29
Online services ...................................... 31
Vehicle .................................................. 29
Date
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 282
Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 87
Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components ................26
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)
...................................................................395
Definitions (tires and loading) ............... 440
Designs
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 217
Destination ...............................................314
Editing intermediate destinations ........ 304
Editing the previous destinations .........314
External ............................................... 315
Quick-access to destination informa‐
tion ...................................................... 311
Saving (current vehicle position) ..........314
Saving as global favorite ...................... 314
Destination entry .................................... 292
Entering 3 word addresses .................. 297
Entering a POI or address .................... 292
Entering an intermediate destination .. 304
Entering geo-coordinates ..................... 297
Notes .................................................. 292
Selecting a contact .............................. 297
Selecting a POI .................................... 295
Selecting a received destination .........299
Index
537
Selecting from favorites ......................298
Selecting from the map ....................... 298
Selecting previous destinations ...........295
Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection ............................27
Digital Operator's Manual ........................ 20
Digital speedometer ................................ 221
Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system
DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 142
Engaging drive position ....................... 144
Engaging neutral .................................. 143
Engaging park position ........................ 143
Engaging park position automatically .. 143
Engaging reverse gear .........................143
Function .............................................. 142
Display (Care) .......................................... 398
Display (multimedia system) .................. 251
Home screen .......................................249
Operating ............................................. 251
Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 252
Settings ............................................... 281
Display (on-board computer)
Displays on the multifunction display ... 219
Display content
Displaying ............................................ 218
Display message .....................................468
Calling up (on-board computer) ...........468
Notes .................................................. 468
Display messages
¯ - - - mph .....................................500
ç - - - mph .....................................499
# 12 V Battery See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 506
b Active Headlamps Inoperative .... 475
é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative
.............................................................493
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break! .................................................. 493
b Automatic Headlamp Mode
Inoperative .......................................... 475
û Before Starting the Engine,
Turn Steering Wheel ............................479
$ Check Brake Fluid Level .............491
# Check Brake Pads See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 492
+ Check Coolant Level See Oper‐
ator's Manual .......................................481
5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1
quart) ...................................................513
b Check Left Low Beam (exam‐
ple) ...................................................... 474
h Check Tires ................................ 509
¥ Check Washer Fluid ...................480
ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off .................................... 481
_ Currently Unavailable Camera
View Restricted ................................... 498
ç Currently Unavailable Radar
Sensors Dirty .......................................497
! Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual ...............................501
538
Index
÷ Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual ...............................502
Á Don't Forget Your Key .................474
5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured ............................................. 515
5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi‐
cle Turn Engine Off ............................... 514
5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop
Switch Off Engine ................................ 514
5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level ........ 513
6 Front Left Malfunction Service
Required (example) .............................469
æ Fuel Level Low ............................ 482
æ Gas Cap Loose ...........................482
! Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 502
÷ Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 503
T Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 504
G Inoperative ................................. 506
b Intell. Light System Inoperative .. 476
Á Key Not Detected (red display
message) .............................................473
Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐
play message) ...................................... 473
6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐
function Service Required (example) ...470
ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50
mph ..................................................... 493
b Malfunction See Operator’s
Manual .................................................475
Á Obtain a New Key .......................472
ç Off ..............................................499
ë Off .............................................. 498
F Parking Brake See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 487
h Please Correct Tire Pressure ...... 510
F Please Release Parking Brake .... 490
Á Replace Key Battery ................... 473
# See Operator's Manual .............. 506
6 SRS Malfunction Service
Required .............................................. 469
Ù Steering Malfunction Increased
Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 477
Ù Steering Malfunction See Oper‐
ator's Manual ....................................... 478
Ù Steering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Operator's Manual ....478
# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐
ning ..................................................... 507
# Stop Vehicle See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 507
ç Suspended ................................. 499
b Switch Off Lights ........................ 476
b Switch On Headlamps ................ 475
d Trans. Oil Overheated Drive on
with Care .............................................485
Index
539
F Turn On the Ignition to Release
the Parking Brake ................................ 491
d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch
the Ignition Off Before Exiting .............. 477
h Warning Tire Malfunction ............ 510
h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ............ 509
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....496
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... 496
Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐
rently Limited See Operator's Man‐
ual .......................................................504
Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual .................. 505
Active Distance Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....499
Active Distance Assist Inoperative ......499
Active Distance Assist Now Available
.............................................................500
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....495
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐
tive ...................................................... 495
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 496
Active Steering Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....493
Active Steering Assist Inoperative .......494
Active Steering Asst. Currently
Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer‐
gency Stops ......................................... 495
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....476
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐
tive .......................................................476
Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... 483
Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' ................... 483
Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling
Away See Operator's Manual .............. 486
Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. 484
Beginning Emergency Stop .................. 494
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's Manual .................. 495
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... 495
Check Tire Pressure Soon .................... 511
Check Tire Pressure Then Restart
Run Flat Indicator ................................. 512
Cruise Control Inoperative .................. 500
Cruise Control Off ...............................500
Decrease Speed ................................... 511
Driver's Door Open & Transmission
Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. 483
Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................470
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................471
540
Index
Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning .................................................476
Mercedes me connect Services Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual .................. 505
N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling
Away .................................................... 484
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐
tionary .................................................483
Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Park‐
ing Brake .............................................485
Place the Key in the Marked Space
See Operator's Manual ........................ 474
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 472
Reversing Not Possible Service
Required .............................................. 484
Run Flat Indicator Inoperative .............. 512
Service Required Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer .......................................... 484
Teaching in Transmission Complete .... 486
Teaching in Transmission Operate
Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away ................ 485
Tire Press. Monitor Currently
Unavailable .......................................... 508
Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ........... 508
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors .................................... 508
Tires Overheated ..................................511
To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake
and Start Engine .................................. 483
To switch engine off, press and hold
Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐
onds or press 3 times. ......................... 482
Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐
able See Operator's Manual ................ 496
Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ............. 496
Transmission Malfunction .................... 485
Transmission Malfunction Service
Required .............................................. 486
Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 484
Display on the windshield
see Head-up Display
Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance recorder
see Trip distance
DISTRONIC
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door
Child safety lock (rear door) .................. 62
Locking (emergency key) .......................73
Opening (from the inside) ......................70
Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 73
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................70
Door control panel .....................................16
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 436
Drawbar
see Tow-bar system
Drinking and driving ................................ 134
Drinks holder
see Cup holder
Index
541
Drive Away Assist .................................... 203
Drive position
Inserting .............................................. 144
Drive program display ............................. 140
Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Driver's seat
see Seat
Driving lights
see Automatic driving lights
Driving safety system .............................159
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 161
Active Brake Assist .............................. 164
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................161
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 164
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist ........................ 164
Overview ............................................. 160
Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 159
Responsibility ...................................... 159
STEER CONTROL ................................. 164
Driving system
Suspension with adaptive damping
adjustment .......................................... 187
Driving system
see 360° Camera
see Active Blind Spot Assist
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
see Active Emergency Stop Assist
see Active Lane Change Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Parking Assist
see Active Speed Limit Assist
see Active Steering Assist
see ATTENTION ASSIST
see Blind Spot Assist
see Cruise control
see Driving safety system
see HOLD function
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
see Rear view camera
see Start-off assist
see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving tips
Drinking and driving ............................ 134
General driving tips .............................134
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 134
Drowsiness detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Dynamic handling control system
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 139
Configuring drive program I ................. 141
Displaying engine data .........................141
Displaying vehicle data ........................ 141
Drive program display ..........................140
Drive programs ....................................139
Function .............................................. 139
Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)
.............................................................140
Selecting the drive program ................140
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Damping adjustment ........................... 187
E
E10 ............................................................ 461
Easy entry feature
Function/notes .....................................97
Setting ................................................... 98
542
Index
Easy exit feature
Function/notes .....................................97
Setting ................................................... 98
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion)
Function/notes ................................... 164
ECO display
Function .............................................. 139
Resetting ............................................. 222
ECO start/stop function ......................... 137
Automatic engine start ........................ 137
Automatic engine stop .........................137
Method of operation ............................137
Switching off/on ................................. 138
Electric parking brake .............................156
Applying automatically ........................ 156
Applying or releasing manually ............ 157
Emergency braking .............................. 158
Releasing automatically .......................157
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Overview of the help functions .............. 18
Reflective safety vest ........................... 401
Emergency braking .................................158
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call system
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency engine start .......................... 418
Emergency key
Locking a door ....................................... 73
Unlocking a door ...................................73
Emergency operation mode
Starting the vehicle ............................. 132
Emergency release
Trunk lid (from inside) ............................ 77
Emergency spare wheel .........................452
Inflating ............................................... 454
Notes .................................................. 452
Removing ............................................ 453
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation .............................................. 35
Engine
ECO start/stop function ......................137
Engine number .................................... 458
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 132
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 133
Starting (start/stop button) .................131
Starting assistance .............................. 411
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 150
Engine data
Displaying ............................................ 141
Engine number ........................................ 458
Engine oil .................................................389
Additives .............................................462
Capacity .............................................. 463
Checking the oil level using the on-
board computer ................................... 388
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ...............463
Quality ................................................. 463
Topping up ...........................................389
Entering characters ................................. 274
Function/notes .................................... 274
On the touchscreen (media display) ....278
Setting the keyboard ...........................281
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Index
543
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist .................................164
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) ....... 161
Activating/deactivating .......................163
Function/notes .................................... 161
Exterior lighting
Care .................................................... 397
Exterior lighting
see Lights
Exterior mirrors ............................... 122, 123
Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................123
Automatic mirror folding function ........ 125
Folding in/out .....................................122
Operating the memory function ............ 98
Parking position ...................................124
Setting ................................................. 122
F
Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Favorites
Adding .................................................268
Adding a destination ...........................298
Calling up ............................................ 268
Deleting ............................................... 269
Home address .....................................298
Moving ................................................ 269
Overview ............................................. 268
Renaming ............................................ 269
Work address ...................................... 298
Flat tire .....................................................401
Changing a wheel ................................ 447
MOExtended tires ................................ 402
Notes ................................................... 401
TIREFIT kit ...........................................403
Flat towing
see Tow-bar system
Floor mats .................................................111
Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 159
Free software ............................................ 32
Frequencies
Two-way radio ...................................... 457
Frequency band
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 224
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .....40
Front passenger seat
see Seat
Fuel ...........................................................462
Additives .............................................462
E10 ...................................................... 461
Fuel reserve ........................................ 462
Gasoline ............................................... 461
Quality (gasoline) ................................. 461
Refueling .............................................. 147
Sulfur content ...................................... 461
Tank content ....................................... 462
Fuel consumption
On-board computer .............................221
Fuel consumption indicator
Calling up .............................................141
Function seat
see Door control panel
Fuses ......................................................... 418
Before replacing a fuse ........................ 418
Fuse assignment diagram .................... 418
Fuse box in the engine compartment ... 419
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐
well ...................................................... 420
Fuse box in the trunk ........................... 421
544
Index
Notes ................................................... 418
Fuses
see Fuses
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ........................... 154
Opening or closing the door ................154
Programming buttons .......................... 151
Radio equipment approval numbers .... 154
Resolving problems ............................. 153
Synchronizing the rolling code .............153
Gas station search
Starting automatic search ................... 306
Switching automatic search on/off ..... 306
Gasoline .................................................... 461
Gearshift recommendation .................... 145
Genuine parts ............................................ 22
Glide mode ............................................... 145
Global search
Function .............................................. 272
Overview ............................................. 272
Glove box
Locking/unlocking ...............................101
H
Handbrake
see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 422
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 76
Hazard warning lights .............................115
Hazardous substances
Information ............................................ 25
Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically) .............. 92
Rear (installing/removing) .....................93
Rear passenger compartment
(adjusting) .............................................93
Head-up Display ...................................... 226
Adjusting display elements (on-board
computer) ............................................ 226
Adjusting the brightness (on-board
computer) ............................................ 226
Function .............................................. 227
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 226
Operating the memory function ............ 98
Setting the position (on-board com‐
puter) .................................................. 226
Switching on/off ................................. 227
Headliner (care) ....................................... 398
High beam
Switching on/off ..................................114
High-beam flasher ................................... 114
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................116
Hill start assist ........................................ 185
HOLD function ......................................... 185
Function/notes ................................... 185
Switching on/off ................................. 185
Home screen (media display)
Overview ............................................. 249
Hood
Opening/closing ................................. 386
Hotspot
Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 285
Index
545
I
Identification plate
Engine .................................................458
Refrigerant .......................................... 465
Vehicle ................................................ 458
Ignition
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 130
Ignition key
see SmartKey
Immobilizer ................................................ 86
Indicator lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Individual drive program
Configuring .......................................... 141
Selecting ............................................. 140
Inside rearview mirror
see Exterior mirrors
Inspection
see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster
see Instrument Display
Instrument cluster lighting .................... 220
Instrument Display .................................. 214
Adjusting the lighting .......................... 220
Function/notes .................................... 214
Instrument cluster ................................. 10
Warning/indicator lamps .....................515
Intelligent Light System
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................116
Cornering light function ....................... 116
Interior lighting ........................................ 118
Ambient lighting ................................... 118
Reading light ........................................ 118
Setting ................................................. 118
Switch-off delay time ........................... 119
Interior motion sensor
Activating/deactivating ......................... 88
Function ................................................ 88
Intermediate destination
Calculating a route with intermediate
destinations ........................................ 305
Entering ............................................... 304
Modifying ............................................ 304
Starting an automatic gas station
search ................................................. 306
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search .......................................... 307
Internet
Calling up a web page .......................... 361
Closing the browser ............................363
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 363
Deleting history ................................... 363
Managing bookmarks .......................... 363
Internet connection
Communication module function ........ 360
Connection status ...............................360
Displaying the connection status .........361
Establishing .........................................360
Information .......................................... 359
Restrictions ......................................... 359
iPhone
®
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
J
Jack
Storage location ..................................446
Jump-start connection .............................411
General notes ...................................... 410
546
Index
K
KEYLESS-GO
Locking the vehicle ................................ 70
Problem .................................................72
Unlocking setting .................................. 66
Unlocking the vehicle ............................70
Kickdown .................................................145
Using ................................................... 145
Knee airbag ................................................ 40
L
Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling
Lamp
see Interior lighting
Lamps (Instrument Display)
see Warning/indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language .................................................286
Notes .................................................. 286
Setting .................................................286
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur‐
ing system
Installing ................................................ 55
Light switch
Overview ..............................................113
Lighting
see Interior lighting
see Lights
Lights ........................................................ 113
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................116
Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 220
Automatic driving lights ....................... 114
Combination switch ............................. 114
Cornering light function ....................... 116
Hazard warning lights .......................... 115
High beam ........................................... 114
High-beam flasher ................................ 114
Light switch .........................................113
Low-beam headlamps .......................... 113
Parking lights .......................................113
Rear fog lamp ....................................... 113
Responsibility for lighting systems .......113
Setting the exterior lighting switch-
off delay time ....................................... 117
Standing lights .....................................113
Switching the surround lighting
on/off .................................................. 118
Turn signals .......................................... 114
Limited Warranty
Vehicle .................................................. 29
Live Traffic Information
Displaying the traffic map .................... 316
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 317
Provider information ............................ 316
Showing local area messages .............. 318
Switching the traffic information dis‐
play on .................................................317
Load index (tires) .................................... 438
Load-bearing capacity (tires) ................. 438
Loading ..................................................... 104
Cargo tie-down rings ........................... 104
Definitions ........................................... 440
Notes ..................................................... 99
Roof carrier ......................................... 105
Stowage space under the trunk floor ... 105
Index
547
Loading guidelines .................................... 99
Loading information table ...................... 431
Loads
Securing ................................................ 99
Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto‐
matic locking feature .............................72
Emergency key ...................................... 73
KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 70
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside ..............................................70
Low-beam headlamps
Switching on/off .................................. 113
Lubricant additives
see Additives
Luggage
Securing ................................................ 99
Lumbar support
see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way) ...........................92
M
Maintenance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 220
Vehicle ................................................... 24
Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................ 189
Restraint system ................................... 35
Malfunction message
see Display message
Map ................................................... 316, 319
Avoiding an area ..................................323
Avoiding an area (overview) .................323
Changing an area ................................ 323
Deleting an area .................................. 324
Displaying the compass ....................... 325
Displaying the map version .................322
Displaying the next intersecting
street ................................................... 322
Displaying the range ............................ 326
Displaying the satellite map ................325
Displaying the traffic map .................... 316
Displaying weather information ...........326
Map data ............................................. 324
Moving ................................................ 320
Selecting POI symbols ......................... 321
Selecting text information ................... 322
Selecting the map orientation .............320
Setting the map scale .......................... 319
Setting the map scale automatically ....325
Showing in the multifunction display
of the instrument cluster .....................326
Switching freeway information
on/off .................................................322
Updating .............................................. 324
Massage program
Resetting the settings ............................94
Massage programs
Selecting the front seats ....................... 94
Massage settings
Resetting ............................................... 94
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 394
Maximum load rating .............................. 437
Maximum permissible load
Calculation example ............................ 433
Determining ........................................ 432
548
Index
Maximum tire pressure .......................... 437
MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia
system) .................................................... 255
Notes ................................................... 254
Operating a function with the favor‐
ites pose .............................................. 258
Operating functions through proxim‐
ity of the hand .....................................256
Overview ............................................. 255
Selecting settings ................................ 260
Switching the reading light for the
driver and front passenger on/off .......259
Switching the search light for the
driver on/off .......................................259
Mechanical key
Inserting/removing ............................... 67
Media
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 224
Media display
Notes ................................................... 248
Media mode
Adding a favorite song .........................372
Connecting Bluetooth
®
audio equip‐
ment .................................................... 370
Connecting USB devices .....................370
Controlling media playback ................. 371
Copyright and trademarks ................... 367
Notes about the search function in
categories ............................................ 372
Overview of the media menu ............... 369
Playing back similar music tracks ........ 372
Removing a favorite song .................... 372
Starting a search in categories ............ 372
Starting media playback ...................... 371
Supported format and data storage
media .................................................. 366
Surprise mix ........................................372
Using the keyword search ................... 373
Media playback
Operating (on-board computer) ...........224
Media source
Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 224
Memory function
Head-up Display — Calling up stored
settings .................................................98
Head-up Display — Storing settings .......98
Operating ..............................................98
Outside mirrors — Calling up stored
settings .................................................98
Outside mirrors — Storing settings ........ 98
Seat — Calling up stored settings ..........98
Seat — Storing settings .......................... 98
Menu (on-board computer)
Assistance ........................................... 220
Designs ................................................ 217
Head-up Display .................................. 226
Maintenance ....................................... 220
Media .................................................. 224
Navigation ........................................... 222
Overview .............................................. 216
Radio ...................................................224
Telephone ............................................ 225
Trip ...................................................... 221
Mercedes me app
Calling up services .............................. 356
Calling up your user account ...............355
Deleting the connection to the user
account ............................................... 356
Information .......................................... 355
Mercedes me calls
Arranging a service appointment ........ 353
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center ................................................. 353
Information .......................................... 352
Index
549
Making a call via the overhead con‐
trol panel ............................................. 352
Transferred data ..................................353
Mercedes me connect
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment .................................................... 355
Information .......................................... 354
Transferred data ..................................355
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Notes ................................................... 130
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐
tem ........................................................... 356
Automatic emergency call ................... 357
Information .......................................... 356
Information on data transfer ............... 358
Manual emergency call ........................ 358
Overview ............................................. 357
Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ 346
Connecting .......................................... 347
Ending ................................................. 347
Note .................................................... 346
Overview ............................................. 346
Sound settings .................................... 347
Message (multifunction display)
see Display message
Message memory .................................... 468
Messages .................................................343
Calling a message sender .................... 345
Composing .......................................... 344
Configuring the displayed text mes‐
sages ................................................... 344
Deleting ............................................... 346
Forwarding .......................................... 345
Overview .............................................343
Reading ...............................................344
Replying .............................................. 344
Sending ...............................................344
Using a number/URL .......................... 345
Using templates .................................. 345
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 243
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
Mobile phone
Damage detection (parked vehicle) ..... 158
Wireless charging .................................110
Mobile phone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Telephone
Mobile phone voice recognition
Starting ...............................................338
Stopping ..............................................338
Model series
see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tires ................................... 402
Multifunction display
Overview of displays ............................ 219
Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons .............................215
Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel
Multimedia system
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................159
Adjusting the volume ...........................274
Central control elements .....................250
Configuring display settings ................281
550
Index
Configuring drive program I ................. 141
Favorites ............................................. 268
Main functions .................................... 260
MBUX Interior Assistant (notes) ..........254
Overview ..............................................247
Restoring the factory settings ............. 290
Standby mode function .......................159
Switching the sound on/off ................. 273
Multimedia system
see Display (multimedia system)
see Entering characters
see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi‐
media system)
see Notifications Center
see Profile
see Suggestions
see Themes
see Touch Control
see Touchpad
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 222
Overview ..............................................291
Showing/hiding the menu ...................290
Switching on ....................................... 290
Updating the map data ........................ 324
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 234
Navigation
see Destination
see Destination entry
see Map
see Parking service
see Route
see Route guidance
see Traffic information
Navigation announcements
Activating/deactivating .......................312
Adjusting the volume ...........................312
Repeating ............................................ 313
Switching audio fadeout on/off ...........312
Navigation messages
On-board computer ............................. 222
Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 336
Connecting the mobile phone to the
multimedia system .............................. 336
General information ............................336
Switching mobile phones .................... 336
Using a mobile phone .......................... 336
Neutral
Inserting .............................................. 143
NFC
see Near Field Communication (NFC)
Non-operational time
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................159
Standby mode function .......................159
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .......134
Notifications Center ................................ 270
Calling up a notification .......................271
Editing a notification ............................ 271
Global search (overview) .....................272
Notification types ................................ 270
Overview ............................................. 270
Selecting actions for a notification ......271
Using the global search ....................... 272
O
Occupant safety
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Index
551
Occupant safety
see Airbag
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
see Restraint system
see Seat belt
Odometer
see Total distance
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer ................................. 216
Assistance menu .................................220
Displaying the service due date ........... 385
Head-up Display menu ........................ 226
Media menu ........................................224
Menu designs ...................................... 217
Menu overview .....................................216
Multifunction display ............................219
Navigation system menu ..................... 222
Operating ............................................. 216
Radio menu .........................................224
Service menu ...................................... 220
Telephone menu .................................. 225
Trip menu ............................................ 221
On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
Online services
Data storage .......................................... 31
Open-source software .............................. 32
Opening the trunk lid using your foot
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...........................76
Operating fluids
Additives (fuel) .................................... 462
Brake fluid ...........................................463
Coolant (engine) .................................. 464
Engine oil ............................................ 462
Fuel (gasoline) .....................................461
Notes .................................................. 459
Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 465
Windshield washer fluid .......................464
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity (wireless
vehicle components) ............................. 26
Information ............................................ 25
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ................................. 23
Operator's Manual (digital) ......................20
Overhead control panel
Overview ................................................ 14
P
Paint code ................................................ 458
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .........394
Panic alarm ................................................ 66
Activating/deactivating ......................... 66
Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof
Park position
Inserting .............................................. 143
Selecting automatically ....................... 143
Parking
see Electric parking brake
Parking aid
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
552
Index
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................... 187
Activating .............................................191
Adjusting warning tones ...................... 192
Function .............................................. 187
Problems ............................................. 189
Side impact protection ........................ 190
Switching off ........................................ 191
System limitations ...............................187
Parking assistance systems
see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake
see Electric parking brake
Parking for an extended period .............. 158
Parking lights ...........................................113
Parking options
see Parking service
Parking position
Exterior mirrors .................................... 124
Storing the position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using
reverse gear .........................................124
Parking service ........................................ 327
Notes ................................................... 327
Selecting parking options .................... 327
Showing a parking option on the
map ..................................................... 328
PARKTRONIC
Malfunction ......................................... 189
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Payload
Calculation example ............................ 433
Determining the maximum .................. 432
Permitted towing methods .....................413
Pets in the vehicle .....................................63
Phone book
see Contacts
PIN protection
Activating/deactivating .......................287
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 398
POI
Quick access ........................................311
Selecting ............................................. 295
POI symbols
Selecting ............................................. 321
Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 130
Power washer (care) ...............................392
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection) .................................................48
Function ................................................ 48
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound ................................. 48
Reversing measures .............................. 48
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection plus) ................................ 49
Function ................................................ 49
Reversing measures .............................. 48
Preventative occupant protection sys‐
tem
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
Previous destinations
Selecting .............................................295
Profile ....................................................... 261
Creating a new profile ......................... 262
Maximum number of profiles ...............261
Index
553
Notes ................................................... 261
Overview ..............................................261
Selecting a profile ............................... 263
Selecting profile options ..................... 263
Showing the profile selection when
entering ............................................... 264
Synchronizing ...................................... 263
Programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Protecting the environment
Notes ..................................................... 22
Protection against collision
see Drive Away Assist
Protection against theft
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Q
QR code
Rescue card .......................................... 29
Qualified specialist workshop .................. 27
R
Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage ............................................... 159
Radio
Activating ............................................ 373
Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 376
Calling up the station list .....................375
Deleting stations .................................. 376
Direct frequency entry ......................... 375
Displaying information .........................376
Displaying radio text ............................ 376
Editing station presets .........................376
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 224
Moving stations ...................................376
Overview ..............................................374
Searching for stations .......................... 375
Setting a channel .................................375
Setting the waveband .......................... 375
Showing accident reports .................... 376
Storing radio stations .......................... 375
Switching the HD Radio function
on/off .................................................. 375
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 239
Radio stations
Dialing (on-board computer) ................224
Rain closing function
Sliding sunroof ...................................... 84
Range
Displaying ............................................ 221
Reading light
Switching on/off using poses ............. 259
Reading light
see Interior lighting
Real wood (Care) .....................................398
Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 62
Rear fog lamp
Switching on/off .................................. 114
Rear seat
see Seat
Rear view camera ....................................192
Care .................................................... 397
Function .............................................. 192
Opening the camera cover (360°
Camera) ............................................... 198
Reflective safety vest .............................. 401
554
Index
Refrigerant (air conditioning system)
Notes .................................................. 465
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle ............................147
Remote Online
Charging the battery ............................133
Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐
rior .......................................................133
Starting the vehicle ............................. 133
Reporting safety defects .......................... 28
Rescue card ............................................... 29
Reserve
Fuel ..................................................... 462
Reset function (multimedia system) .....290
Residual heat ...........................................128
Restoring (factory settings)
see Reset function (multimedia system)
Restraint system .......................................34
Basic instructions for children ...............49
Function in an accident ......................... 35
Functionality .......................................... 35
Malfunction ........................................... 35
Protection ..............................................34
Reduced protection ...............................34
Self-test ................................................. 35
Warning lamp ........................................ 35
Reverse gear
Inserting .............................................. 143
Rims (Care) .............................................. 397
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) ........... 24
Roll away protection
see HOLD function
Roof carrier
Attaching .............................................105
Loading ............................................... 105
Roof load .................................................. 467
Route ................................................ 299, 305
Accepting a detour recommendation
after a prompt ..................................... 302
Activating a commuter route ...............306
Alternative route (quick-access) ...........311
Calculating .......................................... 299
Displaying destination information ...... 304
Displaying the route list .......................305
Editing a stored route .......................... 308
External ...............................................315
Planning ..............................................304
Recording a route ................................ 307
Saving a recorded route ...................... 308
Selecting a type ...................................301
Selecting an alternative route .............305
Selecting notifications ......................... 303
Selecting options ................................ 302
Showing a stored route on the map ..... 307
Starting a saved route .........................307
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search .......................................... 307
Switching the automatic gas station
search on/off ...................................... 306
With intermediate destinations ...........305
Route guidance ....................................... 308
Canceling ............................................. 313
Changing direction .............................. 309
Destination reached .............................312
Freeway information .............................311
From an off-road location .................... 313
Lane recommendations ....................... 310
Notes .................................................. 308
Off-road ............................................... 314
To an off-road destination .................... 313
Index
555
Route-based speed adaptation
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 183
Function .............................................. 177
Route-based speed adjustment
Setting .................................................178
Run-flat characteristics
MOExtended tires ................................ 402
S
Safety systems
see Driving safety system
Satellite map ...........................................325
Satellite radio
Activating/deactivating TuneStart ....... 381
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites ... 380
Deleting a channel ...............................379
Displaying EPG information .................379
Displaying service information .............381
Information .......................................... 376
Information about Smart Favorites
and TuneStart ...................................... 380
Logging in ............................................ 377
Moving a channel ................................ 379
Music and sport alerts function ........... 379
Overview ............................................. 378
Pause and playback function ...............381
Restrictions ......................................... 376
Selecting a category ............................ 378
Selecting a channel .............................379
Setting music and sport alerts ............ 379
Setting the parental control ................. 379
Storing a channel ................................ 379
Switching on ........................................ 377
Search light
Switching on/off using poses .............259
Seat .................................................... 90, 102
4-way lumbar support ...........................92
Adjusting (electrically) ...........................91
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 91
Backrest (rear) locking ........................ 104
Configuring the settings ........................ 94
Correct driver's seat position ................ 90
Folding the backrest (rear passenger
compartment) back ............................. 103
Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 102
Operating the memory function ............ 98
Resetting the settings ............................94
Setting options ...................................... 16
Seat belt ..................................................... 36
Fastening ............................................... 39
Protection ..............................................36
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating ......................... 40
Function ................................................ 40
Seat belt warning
see Seat belts
Seat belts ...................................................40
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment ............................................ 40
Care .................................................... 398
Reduced protection ...............................38
Releasing ...............................................40
Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 40
Warning lamp ........................................ 40
Seat cover (Care) .....................................398
Seat heating
Activating/deactivating ......................... 94
Seat ventilation
Activating/deactivating ......................... 95
Second telephone
Connecting .......................................... 335
556
Index
Selecting a gear
see Changing gears
Selecting the sound profile
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 383
Selector lever
see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff ............................................ 45
Sensors (Care) .........................................397
Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS
Service station search
Starting automatic search ................... 307
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting the date format .......................... 282
Setting the distance unit ........................ 286
Setting the map scale
see Map
Shift paddles
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Shifting gears
Gearshift recommendation .................. 145
Short messages
see Messages
Side airbag .................................................40
Side impact protection ...........................190
Side windows ............................................. 78
Child safety lock in the rear
passenger compartment .......................63
Closing .................................................. 78
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 80
Convenience closing feature .................80
Convenience opening ............................ 79
Opening ................................................. 78
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 79
Problem ................................................. 80
Size designation (tires) ........................... 438
Sliding sunroof ...........................................81
Automatic functions .............................. 84
Closing .................................................. 81
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 80
Opening ................................................. 81
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 79
Problem ................................................. 84
Rain closing function .............................84
SmartKey ................................................... 65
Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 66
Battery ................................................... 67
Energy consumption .............................. 67
Features ................................................ 65
Key ring attachment .............................. 67
Mechanical key ...................................... 67
Overview ............................................... 65
Panic alarm ........................................... 66
Problem .................................................69
Unlocking setting .................................. 66
SmartKey functions
Deactivating .......................................... 67
Smartphone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Telephone
Snow chains ............................................ 423
Index
557
Socket (12 V) ............................................ 108
Front center console ........................... 108
Trunk ...................................................109
Software update ...................................... 288
Information .......................................... 288
Performing .......................................... 289
System updates ................................... 289
Sound
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound ................................. 48
Wheels and tires ..................................422
Sound
see Burmester
®
surround sound system
see Sound settings
Sound settings ......................................... 381
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 382
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ................................................ 381
Automatic volume adjustment .............381
Calls up the sound menu ..................... 381
Information .......................................... 381
Spare wheel
see Emergency spare wheel
Special seat belt retractor ........................ 55
Specialist workshop ..................................27
Speech dialog system
see Voice Control System
Speed index (tires) ..................................438
Speedometer
Digital .................................................. 221
Standby mode
Activating/deactivating .......................159
Function .............................................. 159
Standing lights ......................................... 113
Start-off assist ......................................... 187
Activating ............................................ 187
Function .............................................. 186
Start/Stop button
Parking the vehicle .............................. 150
Starting the vehicle .............................. 131
Switching on the power supply or
ignition ................................................ 130
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting assistance
see Jump-start connection
Starting the engine
see Vehicle
Starting-off aid
see Hill start assist
Station
Deleting ............................................... 376
Direct frequency entry .........................375
Moving .................................................376
Searching ............................................ 375
Setting ................................................. 375
Storing .................................................375
Station list
Calling up ............................................ 375
Station presets
Modifying ............................................. 376
STEER CONTROL
Function/notes ................................... 164
Steering wheel .........................................215
Adjusting (manually) .............................. 96
Buttons ................................................ 215
Steering wheel heater ............................97
Steering wheel heater
Switching on/off ...................................97
558
Index
Steering wheel paddle shifters .............. 144
Stowage areas
see Loading
see Stowage compartment
Stowage compartment ............................ 101
Armrest ................................................ 101
Center console .................................... 101
Door .................................................... 101
Glove box .............................................101
Stowage compartment in the glove
box
Opening ............................................... 101
Stowage compartments
see Loading
see Stowage compartment
Stowage space under the trunk floor .... 105
Suggestions ............................................. 266
Calling up ............................................ 267
Configuring .......................................... 267
Deleting ............................................... 268
Overview ............................................. 266
Renaming ............................................ 268
Sulfur content .......................................... 461
Sun visor
Operating ............................................ 125
Surround lighting
Switching on/off .................................. 118
Surround View
see 360° Camera
Suspension
Adaptive damping adjustment .............187
Damping characteristics ...................... 187
Switch-off delay time
Exterior ................................................ 117
Interior ................................................. 119
Switching volume adjustment on/off
Advanced sound system ......................383
Synchronization function
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 128
Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 128
System settings
Activating/deactivating PIN protec‐
tion ...................................................... 287
Reset function (multimedia system) ....290
Setting the distance unit ..................... 286
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 282
Setting the time zone .......................... 282
Setting the time/date format .............. 282
System settings
see Bluetooth
®
see Data import/export
see Language
see Software update
see Wi-Fi
T
Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 397
Tank content
Fuel ..................................................... 462
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 462
Technical data
Information .......................................... 456
Vehicle identification plate .................. 458
Telephone ........................................ 225, 333
Activating functions during a call ........ 338
Calls with several participants .............338
Changing a function ............................ 335
Index
559
Connecting a mobile phone (Near
Field Communication (NFC)) ...............336
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐
key) .....................................................334
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Simple Pairing) .................................... 334
Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 336
Importing contacts ..............................341
Importing contacts (overview) .............340
Incoming call during an existing call .... 339
Information .......................................... 334
Interchanging mobile phones .............. 335
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 225
Mobile phone voice recognition .......... 338
Notes ................................................... 331
Operating modes ................................. 334
Reception and transmission volume .... 337
Replacing mobile phones .................... 335
Setting the ringtone ............................. 337
Switching mobile phones (Near Field
Communication (NFC)) ........................ 336
Telephone menu overview ...................333
Telephone operation ............................ 338
Using Near Field Communication
(NFC) ...................................................336
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 237
Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 110
Telephone number
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 225
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth
®
Telephony .......................... 334
Temperature grade .................................. 435
Text messages
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 243
Text messages
see Messages
Themes ..................................................... 264
Calling up ............................................ 265
Deleting ............................................... 266
Fastening ............................................. 265
Modifying ............................................ 266
Moving ................................................ 266
Overview ............................................. 264
Through-loading feature
see Seat
Time
Manual time setting ............................. 282
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 282
Setting the time zone .......................... 282
Setting the time/date format .............. 282
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............436
Tire and Loading Information placard ... 431
Tire characteristics ................................. 438
Tire inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit
Tire information table .............................431
Tire labeling .............................................435
Characteristics .................................... 438
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................436
Load index ...........................................438
Load-bearing capacity .........................438
Maximum tire load ............................... 437
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 437
Overview ............................................. 435
Speed rating ........................................ 438
Temperature grade .............................. 435
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 435
560
Index
Tire size designation ............................438
Traction grade .....................................435
Tread wear grade .................................435
Tire load (maximum) ...............................437
Tire pressure ................................... 425, 426
Checking (manually) ............................ 426
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ............................................... 428
Maximum ............................................ 437
Notes ................................................... 424
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system ................................... 430
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................429
Tire pressure loss warning system
(function) ............................................. 429
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 427
Tire pressure table .............................. 425
TIREFIT kit ...........................................403
Tire pressure loss warning system
Function .............................................. 429
Restarting ............................................ 430
Tire pressure monitor ............................. 429
Function .............................................. 427
Restarting ............................................ 429
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure .................. 428
Checking the tire temperature ............ 428
Tire pressure table .................................. 425
Tire Quality Grading ................................ 435
Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ............................................... 428
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 427
Tire tread ................................................. 422
Tire-change tool kit
Overview .............................................446
TIREFIT kit ................................................ 403
Storage location ..................................403
Using ................................................... 403
Tires
Changing hub caps .............................. 447
Characteristics .................................... 438
Checking .............................................422
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ................................................... 426
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................428
Definitions ...........................................440
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................436
Flat tire ................................................ 401
Installing .............................................. 450
Load index ...........................................438
Load-bearing capacity .........................438
Maximum tire load ............................... 437
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 437
MOExtended tires ................................ 402
Noise ................................................... 422
Notes on installing .............................. 443
Overview of tire labeling ......................435
Removing ............................................ 450
Replacing .................................... 443, 447
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system ................................... 430
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................429
Rotating ............................................... 445
Selection ............................................. 443
Snow chains ........................................ 423
Index
561
Speed rating ........................................ 438
Storing ................................................ 446
Temperature grade .............................. 435
Tire and Loading Information placard .. 431
Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 424
Tire pressure loss warning system
(function) ............................................. 429
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 427
Tire pressure table .............................. 425
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 435
Tire size designation ............................438
TIREFIT kit ...........................................403
Traction grade .....................................435
Tread wear grade .................................435
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 422
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether .................................................. 57
Total distance .......................................... 221
Displaying ............................................ 221
Touch Control .......................................... 250
On-board computer .............................. 216
Operating ............................................ 250
Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 251
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 251
Touchpad .................................................. 252
Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐
ating feedback .....................................254
Operating ............................................ 252
Reading the handwriting recognition
aloud ................................................... 253
Selecting a station and track ...............254
Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 254
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 253
Touchscreen (media display)
Entering characters .............................278
Operating ............................................. 251
Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 252
Tow-away alarm
Activating/deactivating ......................... 88
Function ................................................ 87
Tow-bar system ........................................ 213
Tow-starting ............................................. 418
Towing away ............................................. 414
Towing eye
Installing .............................................. 417
Storage location ................................... 417
Towing methods .......................................413
Traction grade ......................................... 435
Traffic information ...................................315
Car-to-X-Communication .....................318
Displaying the traffic map .................... 316
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 317
Live Traffic Information ........................ 316
Overview ..............................................315
Switching on the display ......................317
Traffic map
see Map
Traffic Sign Assist ...................................206
Function/notes ................................... 206
Setting .................................................207
System limitations ...............................206
Transferred vehicle data
Android Auto ........................................ 351
Apple CarPlay
®
.................................... 351
Transmission (problem) .......................... 146
Transmission position display ................ 142
Transporting
Vehicle .................................................416
562
Index
Tread wear grade ..................................... 435
Trim element (Care) ................................ 398
Trip
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 221
Trip computer
Displaying ............................................ 221
Resetting ............................................. 222
Trip distance ............................................ 221
Displaying ............................................ 221
Resetting ............................................. 222
Trip odometer
see Trip distance
Trunk lid
Closing .................................................. 75
Emergency release (from inside) ...........77
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...........................76
Opening .................................................74
Opening dimensions ............................466
TuneIn
Calling up ............................................ 363
Calling up the station list (category
last selected) .......................................366
Deleting stations .................................366
Logging out ......................................... 366
Overview ............................................. 365
Registering .......................................... 366
Saving stations .................................... 366
Selecting and connecting to a station
.............................................................365
Selecting stream .................................366
Setting options ....................................366
Terms of use ........................................366
TuneMix
Creating a list ...................................... 380
Turn signal indicator
see Turn signals
Turn signals ..............................................114
Switching on/off .................................. 114
Two-way radios
Frequencies ......................................... 457
Notes on installation ...........................456
Transmission output (maximum) .........457
U
Units of measurement
Setting .................................................286
Unlocking setting ...................................... 66
USB port ...................................................109
User profile
see Profile
Using the telephone
see Calls
V
Vehicle ...................................................... 132
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................159
Correct use ........................................... 28
Damage detection (parking) ................ 158
Data acquisition .................................... 29
Data storage .......................................... 29
Diagnostics connection .........................27
Equipment ............................................. 23
Limited Warranty ...................................29
Locking (automatically) ......................... 72
Locking (from the inside) ....................... 70
Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 70
Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 73
Lowering .............................................. 451
Maintenance .......................................... 24
Parking for an extended period ............ 158
Problem notification .............................. 28
Index
563
QR code rescue card ............................. 29
Qualified specialist workshop ................27
Raising ................................................ 448
Standby mode function .......................159
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 132
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 133
Starting (start/stop button) .................131
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 150
Towing .................................................213
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................70
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................70
Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 79
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 244
Vehicle data
Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) .............141
Roof load ............................................. 467
Transferring to Android Auto ................ 351
Transferring to Apple CarPlay
®
............ 351
Turning radius ...................................... 466
Vehicle height ...................................... 466
Vehicle length ...................................... 466
Vehicle width ....................................... 466
Wheelbase ...........................................466
Vehicle data storage
Event data recorders .............................31
MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes
me connect ............................................ 31
Vehicle dimensions ................................. 466
Vehicle electronics
Notes .................................................. 456
Two-way radios .................................... 456
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .................... 458
Paint code ...........................................458
VIN ...................................................... 458
Vehicle interior
Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 133
Vehicle key
see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation
Outside the USA or Canada ...................24
Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 403
TIREFIT kit ...........................................403
Towing eye ...........................................417
Ventilating
Convenience opening ............................ 79
Vents
see Air vents
VIN ............................................................ 458
Engine compartment ........................... 458
Identification plate .............................. 458
Windshield ........................................... 458
Vision
Removing condensation from the
windows .............................................. 128
Voice Control System .............................229
Audible help functions .........................231
Improving speech quality .................... 232
Language setting .................................230
Media player voice commands ............ 240
Message voice commands .................. 243
Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐
ing) ...................................................... 229
Navigation voice commands ................ 234
Notes on the voice commands ............ 232
Online voice control ............................ 232
Operable functions .............................. 230
564
Index
Operating safety .................................. 228
Radio voice commands .......................239
Setting (multimedia system) ................230
Switch voice commands ...................... 232
Telephone voice controls .....................237
Text message voice commands ...........243
Vehicle voice commands .....................244
Voice prompting .................................. 229
Voice control system
see Voice Control System
W
Warning lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Warning/indicator lamp
! ABS warning lamp ...................... 525
$ Brake warning lamp (USA) .......... 523
J Brakes warning lamp (Canada) ...523
ÿ Coolant warning lamp .................519
# Electrical malfunction warning
lamp .................................................... 520
; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. 520
å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp .............527
÷ ESP
®
warning lamp flashes ........ 526
÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up ...... 526
æ Fuel reserve warning lamp .........521
! Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Canada only) ...522
F Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA only) ........ 522
6 Restraint system warning lamp ...517
7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes ...517
7 Seat belt warning lamp lights
up ........................................................ 518
h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp flashes ...................528
h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up .................528
L Warning lamp for distance
warning function .................................. 524
Ù Warning lamp for electric
power steering .....................................518
! Yellow electric parking brake
indicator lamp is malfunctioning .........522
Warning/indicator lamps ........................ 515
Overview ..............................................515
PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ 45
Warranty ....................................................29
Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid
Washing by hand (care) .......................... 393
Water tank
see Air-water duct
Weather information ............................... 326
Web browser
Calling up a web page .......................... 361
Calling up options ...............................362
Calling up the settings .........................363
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 363
Deleting Internet history ...................... 363
Ending ................................................. 363
Managing bookmarks .......................... 363
Index
565
Overview ............................................. 362
Website
Calling up ............................................. 361
Wheel change
Lowering the vehicle ............................451
Mounting a new wheel ........................ 450
Removing a wheel ...............................450
Removing/installing hub caps .............447
Wheel rotation .........................................445
Wheels
Care .................................................... 397
Changing hub caps .............................. 447
Checking .............................................422
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ................................................... 426
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................428
Definitions ...........................................440
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
.............................................................436
Flat tire ................................................ 401
Installing .............................................. 450
Load index ...........................................438
Load-bearing capacity ......................... 438
Maximum tire load ............................... 437
Maximum tire pressure ....................... 437
MOExtended tires ................................ 402
Noise ................................................... 422
Notes on installing .............................. 443
Overview of tire labeling ......................435
Removing ............................................ 450
Replacing .................................... 443, 447
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system ................................... 430
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................429
Rotating ............................................... 445
Selection ............................................. 443
Snow chains ........................................ 423
Speed rating ........................................ 438
Storing ................................................ 446
Temperature grade .............................. 435
Tire and Loading Information placard .. 431
Tire characteristics .............................. 438
Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 424
Tire pressure loss warning system
(function) ............................................. 429
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 427
Tire pressure table .............................. 425
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 435
Tire size designation ............................438
TIREFIT kit ...........................................403
Traction grade .....................................435
Tread wear grade .................................435
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 422
Wi-Fi .........................................................283
Overview ............................................. 283
Setting ................................................. 284
Setting up a hotspot ............................ 285
Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Dis‐
play
Instrument cluster ................................. 12
Window curtain airbag ............................. 40
Windows
see Side windows
Windows (Care) .......................................397
Windshield ............................................... 120
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 120
Windshield
see Windshield
Windshield washer fluid .........................464
Notes ................................................... 464
566
Index
Windshield washer system
Topping up ...........................................390
Windshield wipers
Activating/deactivating .......................120
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 120
Winter operation
Snow chains ........................................ 423
Wiper blades
Care .................................................... 397
Replacing .............................................120
Wireless charging
Function/notes ................................... 109
Mobile phone ....................................... 110
Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ...................... 26
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Index
567
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Mercedes-A-Class-2020

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes A-Class 2020 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes A-Class 2020 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 45,7 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Mercedes A-Class 2020

Mercedes A-Class 2020 Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 46 pagina's

Mercedes A-Class 2020 Snelstart handleiding - English - 2 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info